1. No category

Denver Public Schools
Construction Services / Strategic Sourcing
1617 S. Acoma St.
Denver, Colorado 80223
14-BS-2225
___________________________________________________________________________________
PROJECT MANUAL
         
SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. 1 IN THE
CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER AND STATE OF COLORADO
PROJECT: Martin Luther King and Noel
LOCATIONS:
MLK H.S.
Noel Campus
Project #
PP2225
PP2225
BID #:
14-BS-2225
DATE:
May 13, 2014
Architect
JRM Architecture Inc.
1860 Blake St. Ste 170
Denver, CO 80202
VENDOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Purpose:
The purpose of this Solicitation is to provide Denver Public Schools a bid for general
renovations described in the Scope of Work/Specifications and the Agreement.
Date:
May 13, 2014
Proposal number:
Bid No.: 14-BS-2225
Proposal title:
General Renovations
Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference
May 8, 2014, 2:00 pm at
Martin Luther King H.S.
th
19535 E. 46 Ave.
Denver, CO 80249
Bids will be received until:
May 29, 2014
2:00 PM, Local Denver Time
at 1617 S. Acoma St., Denver, CO 80223
For additional information please contact:
Email Address
Brian Swift, Strategic Sourcing
[email protected]
Documents included in this package:
Vendor Acknowledgement
Instructions to Vendors
Bid Form
Bid Bond Form
Performance and Payment Bond Form
Illegal Alien Certification Form
Contractor Safety Statement
Construction Agreement
Construction Agreement Exhibits
General Conditions
Scope of Work/Specifications
The undersigned hereby affirms that (1) he/she is a duly authorized agent of the Vendor, (2) he/she has read all
terms and conditions, technical specifications and all other Solicitation Documents which were made available in
conjunction with this Solicitation and fully understands and accepts them, (3) that the offer is being submitted on
behalf of the Vendor in accordance with any terms and conditions set forth in this document, and (4) that the Vendor
will accept any awards made to it as a result of the offer submitted herein for a minimum of ninety (90) calendar days
following the date of submission.
VENDOR PRINT OR TYPE YOUR INFORMATION
(Include this form in your proposal)
Name of Company: ____________________________________________
Fax: _____________
Address: ________________________
City/State: ________________
Zip: ______________
Contact Person: ___________________
Title: _____________________
Phone: ___________
Authorized Representative’s Signature: ____________________________
Phone: ___________
Printed Name: ____________________
Title: _____________________
Date: ____________
Email Address: ___________________
Approved by: ______________
Date: ____________
SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. 1 IN THE
CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER AND STATE OF COLORADO
INSTRUCTIONS TO VENDORS
***ALL PRE-BID MEETINGS WILL START PROMPTLY AT THE TIME STATED, ANY VENDOR
ARRIVING AFTER THE SCHEDULED TIME WILL NOT BE PERMITTED TO BID***
In addition to matters appearing in the Base Bid form, all vendors shall pay close attention to the
following:
SCHEDULE OF ACTIVITIES: The following activities outline the process to be used to solicit vendor
responses and to evaluate each vendor proposal.
May 2, 2014
May 13, 2014
May 20, 2014 @ 5:00PM
May 29, 2014
August 1, 2014
September 1, 2014
Distribute Invitation to Bid
Mandatory pre-bid conference
Deadline for submitting questions
Bid due date
Substantial Completion
Final Completion
Sealed bids will be received by School District No. 1 in the City and County of Denver and State of
Colorado at the Construction Services Offices, 1617 S. Acoma St., Denver, CO 80223. Attn: 14-BS2225 Until 2:00 PM on May 29, 2014, at which time bids there will be a public bid opening.
Bids received after closing time of 2:00 P.M. will be returned unopened.
The project is to be substantially completed by August 1, 2014. The entire project is to be completed in
time to be accepted by the District on or before September 1, 2014, or as otherwise provided for in the
specifications.
1
Bid Forms: All forms used must be the forms prepared by the District. They include the
following:
Base Bid
Bid Bond (unless the required Bid Guaranty is in the form of a cashier’s or certified check).
“BDOP Participation Report” submitted to BDOP (Business Diversity Outreach Program (formerly
HUBS)) Coordinator within three (3) working days of bid date
Proof of Advertisement: For bids of $250,000 and above, the Contractor shall submit as part of
bid documentation, a copy of contractor’s advertisement inviting bids from BDOP contractors as
specified in the General Conditions
All blank spaces in these forms must be completely and correctly filled in with ink or typewriter. In
case of conflict between words and numerals, the words will govern, unless obviously incorrect.
A bid must be submitted on all alternates listed.
The Bid Bond (if this type of Bid Guaranty is used) must be accompanied by a duly executed
Power of Attorney from the surety company.
NOTE: If Bid is by:
Individual
The person signing the Bid should state below his signature that he is
the sole owner of his business.
Partnership
The partner signing the Bid should state that he is a partner of the firm
making the bid.
Corporation
The officer signing the Bid must be the president or vice president of the
corporation. He must state his title and make certain that the seal of the
corporation is affixed and attested by the secretary or assistant secretary
of the corporation.
Anyone signing a Bid as agent must submit with the Bid evidence proving that his signature
thereto is binding upon his principal.
2
Submitting Bid: Bids must be submitted in duplicate (one original and one copy) in sealed
envelopes marked as follows: (Faxed bids are not acceptable)
Name and Address of Vendor Bidding
Denver Public Schools
Construction Services Strategic Sourcing Department
1617 S. Acoma St.
Denver, CO 80223
ATTN: 14-BS-2225
Time of Opening:
(Write on envelope the date and time set for the opening of bids.)
If delivered:
Denver Public Schools, Construction Services, 1617 S. Acoma St., Denver, CO
80223 – attn: 14-BS-2225 Strategic Sourcing Dept. If bids are delivered on date
due, it is suggested that vendors arrive one-half hour early to allow sufficient time
for parking and receiving. There is limited parking on the street. Limited visitor
parking is available in the paved DPS lot.
If mailed:
Denver Public Schools, Attn: 14-BS-2225 Strategic Sourcing Dept., 1617 S.
Acoma St., Denver, CO 80223.
If the bid is sent by mail, use registered mail. Enclose the sealed bid (envelope marked as
indicated above) in the mailing envelope. No bid will be considered unless received prior to the
time and at the place designated in the Advertisement for Bid.
Each bid must be submitted on a form prepared by School District No. 1 and must be
accompanied by a Bid Guaranty in an amount not less than five per cent of the total bid price.
3
The Bid Guaranty may be (1) a cashier's check, (2) a certified check, or (3) a bid bond submitted
on a form prepared by the School District. The Bid Guaranty must be payable to the School
District as a guaranty that the bid submitted will not be withdrawn for ninety days after the
opening of the bids, and that, if the bid is accepted, the vendor will, within the prescribed time,
enter into the required formal Agreement with the School District and furnish the required
Contractor's Performance Bond and Certificates of Insurance, the amount of such Bid Guaranty
to be paid to the School District as liquidated damages if such guaranty is not fulfilled.
4
Method of Award: Award of individual contracts will be based upon the total amount of the base
bid plus any alternates selected to be included in the contract. Selection of alternates will be
based on the availability of funds. Alternates will be selected as judged by the District to provide
the best value to the District within the funds available for the project.
5
Inconsistencies and omissions: Any seeming inconsistencies between any plans or
specifications or provisions of the contract documents, or any other matter seeming to require
explanation, must be inquired into by the prospective vendor at least 72 hours (excluding
Sundays and holidays) prior to the time set for the opening of bids. Decisions of major importance
on such matters will be issued in the form of addenda. All addenda shall become part of the
contract documents and receipt of the same by the vendor must be acknowledged on the Base
Bid form.
If any prospective vendor notices that any sheet or page or other portion of the contract
documents is missing, it shall be his responsibility to obtain such missing sheet, page or other
portion.
6
Approvals: Requests for approval of equal products or materials must be written and must be
received by the architect at least seven (7) working days prior to the bid opening. Requirements
for the form and content of such requests are included in the contract documents. No request for
substitutions will be considered after bid opening.
7
ELIGIBILITY OF VENDORS - MUST BE ENGAGED IN SUPPLYING PRODUCTS OR
SERVICES RENDERED: Pre-award inspection of the Vendor's facility may be made prior to
award of the contract. Solicitations will only be considered from firms which have been engaged
in the business of manufacturing or distributing the goods and/or performing services as
described in this solicitation. The Vendors must be able to produce evidence that they have an
established satisfactory record of performance for a reasonable period of time and have sufficient
financial support, equipment and organization to ensure that they can satisfactorily execute the
services if awarded a contract. The term equipment and organization as used herein shall be
construed to mean a fully equipped and well established company in line with the best business
practices in the industry and as determined by the proper authorities of the District. The District
reserves the right, before awarding the contract, to require a Vendor to submit such evidence of
its qualifications as it may deem necessary, and may consider any evidence available to it
(including, but not limited to, the financial, technical and other qualifications and abilities of the
Vendor, including past performance and experience with the District) in making the award in the
best interest of the District.
Local office shall be required: Due to the service level required in conjunction with this
Solicitation, the Vendor shall maintain an office within the Colorado, area. This office shall be
staffed by a competent company representative(s) who can be contacted during normal business
hours and who is authorized to discuss matters pertaining to the contract.
Withdrawal of bids: Offers may be withdrawn prior to the time and date set for the opening.
Such requests must be made in writing on company letterhead.
Offers may not be withdrawn after the time and date set for the opening for a period of ninety
calendar days. If an Offer is withdrawn by the Vendor during this ninety day period, the District
may, at its option, suspend the Vendor from the bid list and may not accept any Offer from the
Vendor for a six month period following the withdrawal.
8
Applicable laws and regulations: Each vendor will be assumed to be familiar with all state and
local laws, charter provisions, codes, ordinances and regulations which might in any manner
affect the work to be done or those to be employed in or about the work. No plea of
misunderstanding or ignorance on the part of any successful vendor will in any way excuse such
vendor from the necessity of full compliance with every such law, charter provision, code,
ordinance and regulation.
i.
Corporations and Partnerships: Vendors on public contract for services shall
comply with the provisions of CRS §8-17.5-101 et seq., which requires a
Contractor to certify that the Vendor and its sub-contractors do not knowingly
employ illegal aliens on public contracts for services. Non-compliance with
certification requirements may result in penalties including termination of the
awarded contract. If so terminated, Contractor shall be liable for all actual and
consequential damages; or
ii.
Sole Proprietorships and Individuals: Vendors on public contract for services
who are sole proprietors and persons eighteen years of age or older shall comply
with the provisions of CRS §24-76.5-101 et seq., which requires the submission
of a sworn affidavit that you are lawfully present in the United States before
signing of the Agreement for any public benefit such as this contract. Any person
who knowingly makes a false, fictitious, or fraudulent statement or representation
in an affidavit shall be in violation of C.R.S. 18-8-503.
See the bid documents and the contract’s general terms and conditions for
additional information.
9
Preference to Colorado Materials: The work shall be done by materials produced or
manufactured in Colorado, provided Colorado materials can be obtained in marketable quantities
and provided that such preference need not be given to materials of a quality inferior to the
quality of the materials offered by competitors outside the state, although a differential of not to
exceed 5% may be allowed in cost of Colorado materials of equal quality, all as provided by law.
10 Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting: All prospective vendors are required to attend a mandatory pre-bid
conference commencing at 2:00 PM local time, on May 8, 2014, at Martin Luther King H.S.
th
19535 E. 46 Ave. Denver, CO 80249. Independent inspections of the sites may be conducted
by the vendors Monday through Friday from 3:00 p.m. – 5:30 p.m. during the bid period. The
vendors must check into the school’s office to obtain a visitor’s pass and must also check out of
the office.
11 Equal Opportunity: The District intends and expects that the contracting processes of the
school district and its contractors provide equal opportunity without regard to gender, race,
ethnicity, religion, age, or disability and that its contractors make available equal opportunities to
the extent third parties are engaged to provide goods and services to the school district as
subcontractors, vendors, or otherwise. Accordingly, the contractor shall not discriminate on any
of the foregoing grounds in the performance of the contract and shall make available equal
opportunities to the extent third parties are engaged to provide goods or services in connection
with performance of the contract. The Vendor shall disseminate information regarding all
subcontracting opportunities under this contract in a manner reasonably calculated to reach all
qualified potential subcontractors who may be interested. The contractor shall maintain records
demonstrating its compliance with this article and shall make such records available to the Owner
upon the Owner’s request.
12 Intent to Award Notice: The recommendation for award shall be posted on the District's
Strategic Sourcing Department web page at: (http://purchasing.dpsk12.org/bids/default.asp). It is
the sole responsibility of the vendor to check the website periodically for the award
recommendation. This shall serve as notice to all Vendors of the District's intent to make award to
the lowest responsive/responsible Vendor(s). Vendors may request a copy of the tabulation sheet
by emailing the buyer at [email protected]. If it is determined by the District that there are
no Vendors that could be grieved by the award of this solicitation, The District reserves the right
to waive or shorten the protest period and proceed with award.
13 APPEAL OF AWARD. Vendors may appeal by submitting, in writing, a detailed request for
reconsideration to the District's Executive Director of Facility Management within 72 hours after
the recommendation of award is posted on the Strategic Sourcing Department's web site at
http://purchasing.dpsk12.org/bids/default.asp, provided that the appeal is sought by the Vendor
prior to the District finalizing a contract with the selected vendor.
14 Execution of Documents: The vendor to whom the work is awarded will be required to execute
three copies of the formal Agreement with the School District, on forms supplied by the District, to
furnish, at the vendor's expense, three fully executed copies of the required Contractor's
Performance and Payment Bond, and to furnish the requisite Certificates of Insurance and
insurance endorsements, all within five (5) business days from the date of the Notice of Award. If
such vendor fails to execute said Agreement and to furnish said Bond and Insurance documents
within said five (5) day period, the District shall be entitled to collect the amount of such vendor's
Bid Guaranty as liquidated damages, to consider all rights arising out of the District's acceptance
of such vendor's Bid as abandoned and to award the work covered by such Bid to another, or to
re-advertise the work, or otherwise dispose of the work, as the District may see fit.
15 Owner’s Project Representative:
All questions regarding the Specifications and Contract Documents for this project shall be
directed to:
DPS Strategic Sourcing:
Brian Swift, Strategic Sourcing
Email: [email protected]
16 Special Note to All Vendors: Each vendor shall be assumed to be familiar with the complete
set of Contract Documents and to have given due consideration to all existing conditions and
limitations under which the work is to be performed. The submission of a bid will be construed as
conclusive evidence that the vendor has made such examination.
Vendor’s failure to comply with all the requirements for bid including documents to be submitted
therewith, the use of proper forms, their proper and complete execution including the filling in of
all blank spaces therein, may well result in the rejection of bid.
The School District reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive any informalities, and to
accept any bid deemed desirable.
17 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY
The liquidated damages amount to be applied under Section 3.5 of the General Conditions of the
Contract for delays in Substantial Completion is $1000.00 per day.
The liquidated damages amount to be applied under Section 3.5 of the General Conditions of the
Contract for delays in Final Completion is $1000.00 per day.
18 Rejection: Vendor’s failure to comply with all the requirements for the bid including documents
to be submitted therewith, the use of proper forms, their proper and complete execution including
the filling in of all blank spaces therein, may result in a rejection of bid. This solicitation does not
commit the District to award a contract, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation of a bid, or to
procure or contract for the articles of goods or service. The District reserves the right to waive
insignificant requirements, to accept or reject any or all bids or portions of bids for just cause
received as a result of this request or to cancel in part or in its entirety this bid, if it is in the best
interest of the District to do so.
DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS
SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. 1 IN THE CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER
AND STATE OF COLORADO
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
BID FORM
BASE BID
PROJECT:
TO: SCHOOL DISTRICT NO 1 IN THE
CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER
AND STATE OF COLORADO
General Renovations
LOCATION:
th
Martin Luther King H.S. 19535 E. 46 Ave. Denver, CO 80249
Noel Campus 5290 Kittredge St. Denver, CO 80239
14-BS-2225
School
Bid Amount
MLK H.S.
$______________________________
Noel Campus
$______________________________
Alternate 1 – Science Room Upgrades
$
Name of Company: ____________________________________________
Contact Person: ___________________
Title: _____________________
Authorized Representative’s Signature: ________________________________
Date:_____________
14-BS-2225 Project Experience Qualifications Sheet
Must list 1 project of at least $500,000 and 3 projects of at least $300,000
Project
Value
Location
Owner
Reference
Contact Name
Reference
Contact phone
DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS SUPPLIER PORTAL
Effective July 1, 2014, all new business conducted with DPS will require you to be registered on the
DPS Supplier Portal.
The Denver Public Schools (DPS) District is modernizing its Financial Management and Strategic
Sourcing business processes to include two-way web-based communication with its Suppliers and
Vendors. The benefits extended to our supplier/vendor business partners that register with DPS include:





Electronic Bidding Events/Solicitations.
o Bids and Proposals sent directly to your personal Supplier Portal account
o On-line bid responses, negotiations, awards, and much more
Direct submission of electronic invoices (depending on your contractual relationship).
Complete view of your contracts, purchase orders, invoices and payments online through your
“Supplier Portal”.
Ability to maintain your business profile, points of contact, diversity qualifications, list of
commodities you wish to provide, W-9s, certifications and insurance documentation, along with
optional subcontractor tracking.
Historical record of your interaction and performance with DPS
Access to the supplier portal can be found here: http://purchasing.dpsk12.org/
Supplier Portal User Guides are available at same link (under the ‘Suppliers/Vendors’ link on the righthand of the page).
SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. 1
IN THE CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER
AND STATE OF COLORADO
PROJECT:
BID BOND
LOCATION:
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we [the Contractor] _____________________ [hereinafter called “Principal”], and
_________________________ [ hereinafter called “Surety”], a corporation organized and existing under
the laws of _______________ and duly authorized to transact such business in Colorado, are held and
firmly bound unto School District No. 1 in the City and County of Denver and State of Colorado
[hereinafter called “Obligee”], in the sum of five per cent (5%) of the Principal’s total bid price as lawful
money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made to the Obligee, the
Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal is submitting a proposal, or bid, for the above described project for the Obligee,
and said Obligee has required as a condition for receiving said proposal that it be accompanied by the
specified Proposal Guaranty in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the Principal’s total bid price,
in pursuance of which requirement this Bid Bond is made, executed, and delivered.
Now, the condition of this obligation is such that if the Principal shall maintain said proposal or bid in full
force and effect for ninety days after the opening of the bids for such project, or, if the Principal’s proposal
or bid is accepted, the Principal shall, within the prescribed time, enter into the required formal Agreement
with the Obligee, furnish the required Certificates of Insurance and furnish the required Contractor’s
Performance Bond, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and
effect.
Signed, sealed, and delivered this __________________day of ____________________, 20___
(SEAL)
PRINCIPAL
Attest:
By _____________________________
By _____________________________
Title ____________________________
Title ____________________________
(SEAL)
SURETY
By _______________________________
Attorney-in-Fact
THIS BOND MUST BE ACCOMPANIED
BY A POWER OF ATTORNEY
SCHOOL DISTRICT NO.1
IN THE CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER
AND STATE OF COLORADO
PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND
Bond No._________ (the “Bond”)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that _________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________, as Principal (the “Principal”), and _______________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________, a corporation organized and existing under the laws
of the State of _______________________, and authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado, as Surety
(the “Surety”), jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns
to the SCHOOL DISTRICT NO.1 IN THE CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER AND STATE OF COLORADO (the “Owner”), in
the principal amount of _________________________________________________________ ($______________)
as adjusted by approved change orders (not to exceed ten (10) percent of the principal amount of this Bond unless
expressly approved by the Surety, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld) and interest as provided by
law (collectively referred to herein as the “Penal Sum”), for the performance of and payment of all amounts due
under the agreement between the Principal and the Owner, dated _______________, 20__, (the “Agreement”)
for the following project: _______________________________________________________ (the “Project”),
together with the obligations of the Contract Documents, as defined in the Agreement, all of the documents are
incorporated by this reference and shall be, collectively, referred to as, the “Contract”.
The condition of this obligation is such that, if the Principal shall at all times duly, promptly, and properly perform
all the terms and conditions of the Contract and any authorized modifications thereof during the original term of
the Contract, any extensions thereof that may be granted by the Owner, and during the term of any guarantee or
warranty required under the Contract; and promptly make payment of all amounts, claims, or demands lawfully
due to all persons, firms, associations, or corporations supplying or furnishing to the Principal or its subcontractors
labor or materials, supplies, or equipment which are used, provided, or performed in the prosecution of the work
provided for in the Contract and any and all duly authorized modifications of the Contract that may hereafter be
made, then the Principal and Surety shall have no obligation under this Bond, otherwise, it shall remain in full force
and effect and the Surety shall pay the full value of all payment amounts, claims or demands lawfully due and shall
indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all payments which the Owner may be required to make under the
Contract or applicable law in excess of the Contract price not exceeding the amount of this obligation, together
with interest as provided by law, as well as attorneys’ fees and costs incurred by the Owner in the resolution of any
claim.
Whenever the Owner terminates the Contract in accordance with the terms thereof, the Surety shall, within
fifteen (15) calendar days after written notice of such termination, notify the Owner in writing of its election to
complete the Contract in accordance with its terms, or notify the Owner that the Surety elects not to complete the
Contract. If the Surety fails to give the written notice so required within such time period, then it will be deemed
to have elected not to complete the Contract. Should the Surety elect to complete the Contract, it shall, within
fifteen (15) additional calendar days following the date of receipt of the written notice of such election and with
the Owner’s written approval, obtain a contractor to complete the work in accordance with the original Contract’s
terms and conditions and thereafter proceed to work with due diligence and as the work progresses make
available sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract price. The Surety may not
engage the Principal to complete the Contract, without the prior written consent of the Owner, which consent may
be withheld at the sole and absolute discretion of the Owner.
If the Surety elects to complete the Contract, then it shall be entitled to receive the balance of the Contract price,
less (i) any amounts paid by the Owner to the Principal; (ii) costs incurred by the Owner in correcting any defective
work; (III) any additional legal, design professional, and other costs incurred by the Owner resulting from the
Principal’s default; and (iv) liquidated damages caused by delayed performance or nonperformance of the
Principal. Any progress payments, less retainage, due but not paid at the date of termination shall be paid to
Surety so long as the Surety has agreed to indemnify the Owner for the amount thereof and no other claims have
been made to such funds by subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the Contract or applicable law.
In the event the Surety elects not to complete the Contract, the Owner may then have the work completed by such
means and in such manner, by contract with or without public bidding, or otherwise, as it may deem advisable.
The Surety in such event shall at all times make available, sufficient funds, which at no time shall exceed the Penal
Sum, as work progresses under the Contract between the Owner and its new contractor, and will pay the cost of
the completion of the Contract pursuant to its terms, together with the other amounts set forth in sections (i)
through (iv) above, but in no event shall the Surety be responsible for the payment of any sums to the Owner until
the Owner has agreed to pay its total obligation according to the terms of the Contract, plus change orders, less
deductions and claims chargeable by law or by the Contract, if any, and less the retainage which will be disbursed
as proved by the Contract Documents and applicable law.
The procedures set forth herein shall apply should there be a default and termination or a succession of defaults
and terminations in fulfilling the terms and conditions of the work under the Contract.
Any judgment recovered hereunder by the Owner shall include interest at the legal rate, together with reasonable
attorneys’ fees and costs.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF said Principal and Surety have executed this Bond, this _______________________ day of
_____________________________A.D., 20_______.
Principal:
(PRINCIPAL’S CORPORATE SEAL)
ATTEST:
By:
Print Name:
Title:
Date:
By:
Print Name:
Title:
Date:
Surety:
(SURETY’S CORPORATE SEAL)
By:
Print Name:
Date:
Attorney-in-fact
THIS BOND MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY A POWER OF ATTORNEY
Best’s Rating:
_____
Best’s Financial Rating:
_____
Date: ________________________
DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS
WORKER STATUS
CERTIFICATION STATEMENT REGARDING ILLEGAL ALIENS
[Reference HB 1343 – Certification]
CERTIFICATION STATEMENT FOR CORPORATIONS & PARTNERSHIPS
The Vendor, whose name and signature appear below, certifies and agrees as follows:
1.
The Vendor shall comply with the provisions of CRS 8-17.5-101 et seq.
2.
The Vendor shall not knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien to perform work under this
purchase order or enter into a contract with a subcontractor that knowingly employs or contracts
with an illegal alien.
3.
The Vendor represents, warrants, and agrees that it (i) has verified that it does not employ any
illegal aliens, through participation in the Basic Pilot Employment Verification Program
administered by the Social Security Administration and Department of Homeland Security, or (ii)
otherwise shall comply with the requirements of CRS 8-17.5-102(2)(b)(I).
4.
The Vendor shall comply with all reasonable requests made in the course of an investigation by
the Colorado Department of Labor and Employment If the Vendor fails to comply with any
requirement of this provision or CRS 8-17.5-101 et seq., the School District may terminate the
above referenced purchase order for breach and the Vendor shall be liable for actual and
consequential damages to the School District.
CERTIFIED and AGREED to this ______day of ____________ , 20__
_______________________________________
Name of Firm (print)
_______________________________________
Signature of Authorized Representative
_______________________________________
Name of Authorized Representative (print)
_______________________________________
Denver Public Schools Project Name
DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS
WORKER STATUS
AFFIDAVIT REGARDING ILLEGAL ALIENS
[Reference HB06:1023 – Certification]
AFFIDAVIT FOR SOLE PROPRIETORS & INDIVIDUALS
I, _______________________________, swear or affirm under penalty of perjury under the laws of the
State of Colorado that (check one):
____
I am a United States citizen, or
____
I am a Permanent Resident of the United States, or
____
I am lawfully present in the United States pursuant to Federal law.
I understand that this sworn statement is required by law because I applied for a public benefit. I
understand that state law requires me to provide proof that I am lawfully present in the United States prior
to receipt of this public benefit. I further acknowledge that making a false, fictitious, or fraudulent
statement or representation in this sworn affidavit is punishable under the criminal laws of Colorado as
perjury in the second degree under Colorado Revised Statute 18-8-503 and it shall constitute a separate
criminal offense each time a public benefit is fraudulently received.
_______________________________________
Signature
_______________________________________
Name (print)
_______________________________________
Denver Public Schools Project Name
_________________
Date
DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS – DEPARTMENT OF FACILITY MANAGEMENT
Construction Safety Standards Acknowledgement Form
I have been informed that the Construction Safety Standards have been made available to me and that it
is an OSHA and U.S. Department of Labor requirement that I must provide a safe workplace
environment free from safety hazards. The DPS Construction Safety Standards may be found at:
http://bond.dpsk12.org/construction_standards
I am aware that the terms of the Construction Agreement provide that all Contractors shall have a
written Safety and Health Program Plan that complies with current laws regarding worker health and
safety and the prevention of accidents or injury to persons on or about the site (including the
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 as amended, the standards issued by the Secretary of Labor
at 29 CFR Part 1926 and 29 CFR Part 1910 as amended, safety laws of the State of Colorado, and other
safety laws and regulations). These written plans shall be available for Owner’s review at each worksite.
Each Contractor’s employee is responsible for complying with applicable safety and occupational health
requirements, wearing prescribed safety and health equipment, reporting unsafe conditions/activities,
preventing avoidable accidents, and working in a safe manner.
Contractor’s employees are required to wear the following minimum Personal Protective Equipment
(PPE) while on Owner’s worksite:
A. Hard Hat
B. Safety Glasses
C. Safety Vest
D. Safety Shoes
E. Safety Gloves if activity requires hand protection
F. Other PPE as appropriate for work activity
The Prime Contractor is responsible for ensuring subcontractor and sub‐sub‐contractor compliance with
the safety and occupational health requirements as contained within the contractor’s written Safety and
Health Program Plan.
DATE: ________________________
SIGNATURE:_______________________
NAME:________________________
COMPANY AND/OR CONTRACTOR:
FACILITY MANAGEMENT
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
TEL 720-424-5443
FAX 720-424-5465
WEB http://fm.dpsk12.org
Contractor Confined Space Safety Acknowledgement
FACILITY:
PROJECT NAME:
PROJECT NUMBER:
The Contractor has been advised that part or all of their work may be performed within an area
designated as a “Confined Space” or “Confined Space – Permit Required” zone within a DPS
facility.
The Contractor’s responsibility is to perform all work in a safe manner to comply with all the
terms of the Construction Agreement including having a written Safety and Health Program
Plan that complies with current laws regarding worker health and safety and the prevention of
accidents or injury to persons on or about the site (including the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 as amended, the standards issued by the Secretary of Labor at 29 CFR Part
1926 and 29 CFR Part 1910 as amended, safety laws of the State of Colorado, and other safety
laws and regulations).
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to comply with 29 CFR 1910.146 of the Occupational Safety
and Health Act Regulation Standards pertaining to entering and working in a designated
Confined Space area.
By acknowledgement of this provision, Contractor assumes all responsibility in performance of
their work according to standard best safety practices.
Contractor acknowledges they have been informed of the hazard(s) found within the
designated area, and is aware there may be additional hazards not yet identified.
The Prime Contractor is responsible for ensuring subcontractor and sub-subcontractor
compliance with the safety and occupational health requirements as contained within the
contractor’s written Safety and Health Program Plan.
DATE:
SIGNATURE:
_______
_______
PRINTED NAME:
COMPANY AND/OR CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________
DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS
SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. 1 IN THE CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER
AND STATE OF COLORADO
Construction Agreement
Construction Agreement Exhibits
General Conditions
DRAFT
CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
This CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT (this “Agreement”) is entered into this ____ day of ____________,
20___, by and between School District No. 1 in the City and County of Denver and State of
Colorado (the “Owner”) and ________________________________________ [full legal name], a
_______________________ [state of formation and type of entity, e.g., “Colorado corporation,”
“Colorado limited liability company,” etc.] (“Contractor”).
In consideration of the covenants and agreements contained in the Contract Documents, the
sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged by the Contractor and Owner, Contractor and Owner hereby
promise and agree as follows:
Article 1.
1.1
KEY TERMS; DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT
The Project. The “Project” consists of the construction of [an addition to] [a remodeling of] [a
remodeling of part of] a building [or facility] known as ___________.
The principal function of this [building/facility] is [will be] __________________________.
Owner’s project number for the Project is ______________________.
The Project may be further described on Exhibit A.
1.2
1.3
The Contract Sum.
1.2.1
The “Contract Sum” shall be the amount of $____________________, which shall be
full compensation to the Contractor for all of the Work described in the Contract
Documents.
1.2.2
General conditions costs shall be identified on the Schedule of Values, but there is no
separate General Conditions Fee under this Contract.
1.2.3
There is no separate Contractor Fee under this Agreement. The Contract Sum includes
Contractor’s profit and compensation for Contractor’s overhead and administrative
expenses.
The Contract Documents. The “Contract Documents” include:
1.3.1
All written modifications or amendments to this Agreement, including Change Orders;
1.3.2
This Agreement, including all exhibits and attachments;
1.3.3
The General Conditions of the Contract;
1.3.4
Construction Documents prepared and approved in accordance with this Contract;
1.3.5
The following other documents, if any: _______________________________.
The Contract Documents are intended to be complementary, and anything required by any of the
Contract Documents shall be as binding as if required by all of the Contract Documents. In the
event of inconsistencies in requirements between different parts of the Contract Documents,
unless Owner otherwise agrees in writing, Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater
quantity. In the event of any irreconcilable difference between different provisions of the Contract
Documents, the provision or requirement set forth in the Contract Document first appearing in the
list above shall control.
Rev. 12/2009
943305.2
1.4
Contractor’s Role in General; The Work. Contractor accepts the relationship of trust and
confidence established with the Owner by the Contract Documents. Contractor agrees to furnish
efficient business administration and superintendence and to use its best efforts to perform the
Work in the best and most sound way and in the most expeditious and economical manner
consistent with the interests of the Owner, within the time periods provided in the Milestone
Schedule.
1.5
Exclusions. The scope of the Work shall not include, and Owner shall be responsible for, any
items listed on Exhibit C.
Article 2.
2.1
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION
Defined Terms.
2.1.1
Terms Defined in the General Conditions of the Contract. Initially capitalized terms
used but not defined in this Agreement shall have the meanings given them in the
General Conditions of the Contract.
2.1.2
Agreement. This Construction Agreement, including exhibits hereto.
2.1.3
Contract Sum. Defined in Section 1.2.1 above.
2.1.4
Contract Documents. Defined in Section 1.3 above.
2.1.5
Owner Parties. Defined in Exhibit A.
2.1.6
Project. Defined in Section 1.1 above and Exhibit A.
2.1.7
Self-Work. Any of the types of Work described on Exhibit D and any other part of the
Work as to which Owner consents in writing to performance by Contractor as Self-Work
(which consent shall not unreasonably be withheld) to the extent that such work is
actually directly performed by Contractor and is not performed through a Subcontractor.
Article 3.
PROGRESS PAYMENTS
3.1
Applications for Payment. In addition to the documents and information required by the
General Conditions of the Contract, Contractor’s Applications for Payment shall include a
statement in form approved by Owner setting forth (A) the percentage of the Work completed and
the materials stored on the Site for the period ending the last day of the month for which the
Progress Payment is requested for each category of the Schedule of Values, (B) the amount
previously invoiced under the Contract, (C) the amount previously retained, (D) the net amount to
be paid on the current Progress Payment (less applicable Retainage), and (E) the amount of the
Contract Sum remaining unpaid if the requested payment is made in full.
3.2
Amount of Progress Payments. The net amount to be paid based on an Application for
Payment shall be (a) the total of the amounts obtained by applying the percentage of completion
for each line item in the Application for Payment to the price for that item in the Schedule of
Values, less (b) the total amount of previous Applications for Payment.
Article 4.
4.1
MISCELLANEOUS
Claims for Damages. Should either party suffer injury or damage to persons or property
because of any act or omission of the other party or of any of its employees, agents, or others for
whose acts it is legally liable, a claim shall be made in writing to such other party, with a copy to
the Architect, within the time period required by the express terms of this Agreement and the
-2-
General Conditions of the Contract, or if not specified in this Agreement or the General
Conditions of the Contract, within a reasonable time after such injury or damage.
4.2
Assignment; Successors and Assigns. Neither party to the Contract shall assign it or
subcontract it as a whole without the written consent of the other. The Contractor shall not assign
its interest in any amounts due or to become due to it under the Contract without the written
consent of the Owner. Subject to the foregoing provisions of this Section, the Contract shall be
binding upon and inure to the benefit of the parties hereto and their respective successors and
assigns.
4.3
Entire Agreement. This Agreement, the General Conditions of the Contract, any other Contract
Documents, and all exhibits thereto constitute the entire agreement between the parties with
respect to the Project and all prior proposals are hereby terminated.
[The remainder of this page is intentionally blank.]
-3-
Signature page to Construction Agreement:
Executed to be effective as of the date first written above.
[Signature block for corporation as contractor:]
Contractor:
[Fill in full legal name of entity,] a Colorado
corporation [if the entity was formed in another
state, identify that state instead]
(CORPORATE SEAL)
ATTEST:
By:
Print Name:
Title:
Date:
By:
Print Name:
Title:
Date:
[Signature block for other entity:]
Contractor::
[Fill in full legal name of entity,] a Colorado [state
type of entity: limited liability company, limited
liability partnership, etc.] [if the entity was formed in
another state, identify that state instead]
By:
Print Name:
Title:
[Owner signatures appear on the following page]
-4-
Date:
Signature page to Construction Agreement:
APPROVED AS TO FORM IN BEHALF OF
SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. 1:
Date:
James T. Allen
Interim Senior Director of Facilities
Date:
Office of the General Counsel
Date:
Trena Deane
Executive Director, Facility Management
Date:
David Suppes
Chief Operating Officer
(S E A L)
SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. 1
IN THE CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER
AND STATE OF COLORADO
ATTEST:
Date:
By:
Print Name:
President, Board of Education
Print Name:
Secretary, Board of Education
-5-
Date:
TABLE OF EXHIBITS
A.
Project Information and Certain Key Terms
B.
Expenses Included in Cost of Work
B-1.
Method of Payment Matrix
C.
Schedule of Exclusions
D.
Schedule of Permitted Self-Work
E.
Arbitration Process
F.
Equal Opportunity Construction Contracting Procedures
G.
Schedule Requirements
H.
General Conditions of the Contract
I.
Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract (if any)
J.
Federal Funding Provisions (if applicable)
J-1.
Wage Determination (if applicable)
-6-
DRAFT
CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Article 1.
KEY TERMS; DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT ................................................................ 1
1.1 The Project ..................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 The Contract Sum........................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 The Contract Documents ................................................................................................................ 1
1.4 Contractor’s Role in General; The Work......................................................................................... 2
1.5 Exclusions ....................................................................................................................................... 2
Article 2.
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION ................................................................................ 2
2.1 Defined Terms. ............................................................................................................................... 2
Article 3.
PROGRESS PAYMENTS ....................................................................................................... 2
3.1 Applications for Payment ................................................................................................................ 2
3.2 Amount of Progress Payments ....................................................................................................... 2
Article 4.
MISCELLANEOUS ................................................................................................................. 2
4.1 Claims for Damages ....................................................................................................................... 2
4.2 Assignment; Successors and Assigns............................................................................................ 3
4.3 Entire Agreement ............................................................................................................................ 3
-i-
DRAFT
EXHIBIT A – PROJECT INFORMATION AND CERTAIN KEY TERMS
Project Name:
Project No.
Contractor:
1.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT:
[Insert a narrative description of the scope of the project. If there is a separate written document
that describes the scope of the project, a cross-reference may be included here so long as it is
unambiguous (include document dates, authors, etc.) and the document should be attached if
practicable or clearly identified as a Contract Document.]
2.
MILESTONE SCHEDULE
BOE Approval of Construction Contract:
Building Permit Granted:
Required Substantial Completion Date:
Required Final Completion Date:
3.
PROJECT TEAM
The key members of the Project Team provided by Contractor include:
Contractor’s Project Manager: ______________________
[Add others, if there will be more.]
4.
ADDITIONAL LIABILITY INSURANCE COVERAGE REQUIREMENTS
Umbrella or Excess Following Form Insurance: $3,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate.
(See Section 12.1.7 of the General Conditions of the Contract.)
Pollution Liability Insurance:
5.
Not required initially (Owner may later require as provided in
Section 12.4 of the General Conditions of the Contract).
Minimum limits of $
per occurrence and in the
aggregate (see Section 12.4 of the General Conditions of the
Contract).
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY
5.1
The liquidated damages amount to be applied under Section 3.5 of the General
Conditions of the Contract for delays in Substantial Completion is $_______.00 per day.
5.2
The liquidated damages amount to be applied under Section 3.5 of the General
Conditions of the Contract for delays in Final Completion is $____.00 per day.
Construction Agreement Exhibits
Rev. 01/2012
A-1
6.
FEDERAL FUNDING
If this box is checked,
Owner expects to pay for the Project using funds from United States
government sources, and Section 4.17 of the General Conditions of the Contract, the provisions
of Exhibit J, and the wage determination attached as Exhibit J-1 shall apply to the Project.
7.
COP REQUIREMENTS
If this box is checked,
then (i) Owner Parties shall include, in addition to the parties otherwise
identified in this Agreement, Denver Public Schools Leasing Corporation and J.P. Morgan Trust
Company, National Association, (ii) Contractor acknowledges that Owner under this Agreement is
the tenant of the Project site and Denver Public Schools Leasing Corporation is the owner, and
(iii) unless Owner and Contractor otherwise agree in writing, Owner shall be responsible to obtain
from the property owner all consents and approvals required under the lease of the Site with
respect to the Project.
8.
TESTING
Contractor shall with due diligence study and evaluate all testing reports furnished by Owner,
Architect, or their consultants, and any reports obtained by Contractor. Contractor shall advise
Owner and Architect of any impact of such reports on the construction and contemplated
utilization of the Project. Contractor shall not be held responsible for the accuracy of Ownerfurnished information, provided that Contractor shall notify Owner of any inaccuracy or
incompleteness in information furnished by the Owner that is apparent in the exercise of
reasonable professionally diligent review.
9.
AS-BUILTS, MANUALS
At Substantial Completion, Contractor shall deliver to Architect one (1) complete set of As-Builts
and all required documents and manuals under Section 4.10 of the General Conditions of the
Contract.
10.
NOTICE ADDRESSES OF THE PARTIES
Address for notices to Owner:
[with a copy to:]
Address for notices to Contractor:
A-2
DRAFT
EXHIBIT B – COST OF WORK
The Contract Sum is a stipulated sum and does not vary according to the Cost of Work.
There is no Exhibit B-1.
B-1
DRAFT
EXHIBIT C – SCHEDULE OF EXCLUSIONS
The following items are excluded from the scope of the Work:
1.
Architectural services.
2.
[List others.]
C-1
DRAFT
EXHIBIT D – SCHEDULE OF PERMITTED SELF-WORK
[None]
D-1
DRAFT
EXHIBIT E – DISPUTE RESOLUTION
Disputes, concerning the interpretation of, the meaning of the construction documents or the
performance of any work under this Agreement between Contractor and Owner (the “Parties”), which
cannot be resolved by designated representatives of the parties shall be subject to the provisions and
procedures of the Dispute Resolution hereof. Except as otherwise provided herein, with respect to any
Dispute that may arise under this Agreement, it shall be a condition precedent of the Parties to stay any
legal action and before pursuing any litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction, for the Parties to work,
in good faith, to resolve all Disputes, including any legal claims, that may arising out of any Dispute under
this Agreement and agree to follow the Dispute Resolution process and procedures up to and until a final
decision rendered.
All Disputes shall be conducted in accordance with the following provisions unless Owner and
Contractor agree, in writing, that no Dispute which has not then already been submitted to Dispute
Resolution, shall be subject to Dispute Resolution hereunder if one hundred eighty (180) days or more
have passed since the Final Completion of the Project and one of the Parties has instituted litigation with
respect to such Dispute before the time that Dispute Resolution of such Dispute has been demanded in
accordance herewith. Capitalized terms not otherwise defined in this Exhibit shall have the same
meanings assigned to them in the Agreement.
1.
Good Faith Resolution.
Any Dispute will initially be resolved informally. The Parties shall
attempt in good faith to resolve promptly any Dispute by negotiation between representatives who
have authority to settle the dispute (“Authorized Representatives”). The Authorized
Representatives must not be any person with direct responsibility for administration of this
Agreement.
2.
Executive Director. Any Dispute that is not resolved under Section 1 of this Exhibit E, shall be
referred to the Executive Director of Facilities (the Executive Director”) who will render a final
determination.
3.
Notice of Demand for Dispute Resolution.
In order to initiate Dispute Resolution, the Party
demanding Dispute Resolution shall give the other Party telephonic notice of the demand and
shall give written notice demanding Dispute Resolution to such Parties. Such written notice shall
identify the issues in dispute. Any time periods based on the date of notice of the demand for
Dispute Resolution shall be measured from the date such written notice is given in accordance
with Article 16 of the Agreement.
4.
Time and Place for Meeting. Upon written request from either Party to the Executive Director,
the Executive Director shall schedule a meeting (the “Meeting”) at the Executive Director’s office
within three (3) days of receipt of the request. Owner and Contractor shall both attend the
Meeting with the Executive Director and each Party shall be represented as it determines to be
appropriate. At or before the Meeting, either Party may, at its option, submit a short written
statement describing the matter in dispute and its position in regard to the same. At the Meeting,
the Parties shall show the Executive Director the parts of the Work or the drawings, or plans and
specifications in dispute and each Party shall make such presentation of its case at the Meeting
as its shall determine. The Meeting shall continue (including from day to day if required) until all
presentations permitted by the Executive Director have been completed. Unless agreed to at the
Meeting by the Executive Director, neither Party shall be entitled to make any submission after
the Meeting as to any matter discussed at the Meeting.
5.
Executive Director’s Decision. The Executive Director shall deliver a decision as to each issue
discussed at a Meeting to the Parties promptly and, in any event, within five (5) business days
following the conclusion of the Meeting as to any Dispute discussed at a Meeting. Each decision
shall be rendered in a reasoned writing explaining the basis therefor in sufficient detail for a third
party to understand the basis for the decision (the “Decision”). The Executive Director’s decision
is final.
E-1
DRAFT
EXHIBIT F – EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTING PROCEDURES
1
OWNER’S POLICY
a)
The policy of the Denver Public Schools with respect to equal opportunity
contracting was established by Board of Education Resolution 2621. That policy commits
the Owner to the creation and preservation of equal opportunities for all people to
participate in the delivery of goods and services through the contracting processes of the
Denver Public Schools without regard to gender, race, ethnicity, religion, age, or
disability. It is the express expectation of the Board of Education that those who contract
with the Owner shall in turn make available equal opportunities to the extent third parties
are engaged to provide goods and services to the Owner as subcontractors, vendors, or
otherwise.
b)
Pursuant to resolution 2621, the contracting policies and practices of the Owner
are to conform to the following parameters:
c)
No person shall be excluded from participation in, denied the benefits of, or
otherwise discriminated against in connection with the award and performance of any
contract on the grounds of gender, race, ethnicity, religion, age, or disability.
d)
Neither the gender, race, ethnicity, religion, age, nor disability of any contractor
or subcontractor shall be a factor in the evaluation of any proposal or award of any
contract.
e)
Any party contracting with the Owner for the provision of goods or services shall
be required to agree as a condition of the contract not to discriminate on any of the
foregoing grounds in the performance of the contract.
f)
Information regarding contracting opportunities with the Owner shall be
disseminated in a manner calculated to reach all persons qualified to provide pertinent
goods and services.
g)
The criteria used in evaluating contract proposals shall be based on the Owner’s
interest in securing cost effective, quality goods and services and shall not exclude or
disadvantage parties for reasons that are not closely related to those interests.
h)
In determining contract requirements care shall be taken to encourage
submission of quotes or proposals from as wide a base of potential vendors as is
reasonably possible.
i)
Owner contracts for the provision of goods or services shall require that the
contracting parties disseminate information regarding any third party contracting
opportunities in a manner reasonably calculated to reach all persons qualified and willing
to participate.
j)
Owner contracts for the provision of goods or services shall require that the
contracting party retain and make available to the Owner records regarding dissemination
of information regarding third party contracting opportunities, including responses
received by the contracting party.
2
DISSEMINATION OF INFORMATION
a)
Pursuant to Resolution 2621 contracting opportunities and processes shall be
disseminated as follows:
F-1
(1) Dissemination of Information by the Owner
(a)
The Owner shall disseminate information regarding construction
contracting opportunities by placing advertisements in a local newspaper of
general circulation to all potentially interested contractors and subcontractors in
the community. In addition, the Owner shall make plans available for
construction projects in its Construction Services Office, in the offices of the
project architect, and at suitable locations within the community where those
plans may be reviewed by interested contractors and subcontractors free of
charge.
(2) Dissemination of Information by Contractors
(a)
Each contractor shall place advertisements inviting bids or proposals on
all work not to be performed by the contractor itself. At minimum, such
advertisements shall be placed in a newspaper or trade journal of general
circulation within the Denver metropolitan area for at least one (1) day. Such
advertising may be excused only with written permission of the Owner’s
Construction Services office, under circumstances where such advertisement
would be impractical or would not reasonably further the equal opportunity
contracting policy of the Owner. A contractor participating in more than one
project may consolidate its advertisements to save costs.
3
DATA COLLECTION AND REPORTING
a)
Pursuant to Resolution 2621 the Owner’s Purchasing Department is responsible
for collecting and maintaining information necessary to permit the Owner to determine the
effectiveness of Owner contracting policies and practices in ensuring equal opportunity.
Such information will be collected, maintained, and reported as follows:
(1) Subcontractor Bidding Phase
(a)
Each Contractor shall promptly provide to the Owner’s Purchasing
Director copies of advertisements placed pursuant to these procedures.
(b)
The Contractor shall provide to the Owner’s Purchasing and Manager of
the Business Diversity Outreach Program a completed Subcontractor
Participation Report when the Contractor has collected the bids from which it
intends to select Subcontractors. A form of this report is available from the
Owner. The Contractor shall provide data on all subcontractors contacted during
the bid period and on each bid received from all subcontractors. Such list shall
identify which, if any, of the firms on the list are, to the best of the Contractor’s
information, certified diverse businesses (“Certified Diverse Businesses”).
Certified Diverse Business firms are defined for purposes of this procedure as
businesses owned or controlled by Native Americans, Asian Americans, African
Americans, Hispanics, or women. A business is deemed owned by whoever
holds at least 51% of the equity interest in the enterprise. A business is deemed
controlled by its chief executive officer (if the business is a corporation), its
managing partner (if business is a partnership), the proprietor (if the business is a
sole proprietorship), and in all cases by the person or persons with ultimate
decision-making authority in the ongoing, day-to-day operation of the business.
For a diverse business to become a Certified Diverse Business, the diverse
business must obtain certification from a governmental agency, an industry
recognized third party certification organization or the Owner may recognize the
diverse business as “certified”.
F-2
(c)
The information required by the preceding paragraph shall promptly be
supplemented each time a subcontractor is replaced or an additional
subcontractor is retained.
(d)
To facilitate identification of Certified Diverse Businesses, the Owner will
place on its Website the “Denver Public Schools Diverse Business Directory”.
Contractors may also utilize the websites of the City & County of Denver,
www.denvergov.org, Rocky Mountain Minority Supplier Development Council,
www.rmmsdc.org, U.S. Small Business Administration, www.sba.gov, State of
Colorado/DBE Certification, www.dot.state.co.us/eeo/certification, and Regional
Transportation District, www.rtd-denver.com.
(e)
The Owner’s Purchasing Department shall verify and compile all data
received from contractors regarding Certified Diverse Business usage and shall
report such data to the Board of Education. Each report shall set forth:
(i) The identity of each Certified Diverse Business firm
(ii) The type of work done by each Certified Diverse Business firm
(iii) The dollar amount of the contracts with such firms
(iv) The dollar amount of Certified Diverse Business participation on each
specific project
(v) The dollar amount of Certified Diverse Business participation on all
projects in total during any reporting period
(vi) The percentage of the dollar volume of Certified Diverse Business
participation in each project
(vii) The percentage of the dollar volume of Certified Diverse Business
participation on all projects in total
4
RECORDS RETENTION AND INSPECTION
a)
Each contractor shall retain and make available to the Owner and its designees
records sufficient to permit the Owner to ascertain compliance with the equal opportunity
contracting requirements. The following records shall be maintained and made available
for inspection by the Owner and its designees:
(1) All records reflecting any invitations to submit bids or proposals regarding
subcontracting opportunities on any Owner project, including, but not limited to:
(2) Copies of advertisements placed by the contractor in any newspaper or trade
journal
(3) Copies of requests for proposals or bid solicitations sent to any potential
subcontractors, including names and addresses of each person or entity to whom
such solicitations or proposals were sent
(4) Logs showing persons contacted by telephone or in person regarding bid
opportunities
F-3
(5) All responses received to invitations to bid on subcontracting opportunities,
including written responses and notes, memoranda, or other records of oral
responses.
(6) All correspondence accepting, rejecting, qualifying, revising, or otherwise related
to any invitation to bid subcontracting opportunities or responses thereto.
5
CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
a)
Pursuant to Resolution 2621 each Owner contract with any contractor shall
contain the following provisions:
b)
Denver Public Schools intends that the contracting processes of the Owner and
its contractors provide equal opportunity without regard to gender, race, ethnicity,
religion, age, or disability, and that its contractors make available equal opportunities to
the extent third parties are engaged to provide goods and services to the Owner as
subcontractors, vendors, or otherwise. Accordingly, the contractor shall not discriminate
on any of the foregoing grounds in the performance of the contract and shall make
available equal opportunities to the extent third parties are engaged to provide goods or
services in connection with performance of the contract.
c)
The contractor shall disseminate information regarding all subcontracting
opportunities under this contract in a manner reasonably calculated to reach all qualified
potential subcontractors who may be interested. The contractor shall maintain records
demonstrating its compliance with this article and shall make such records available to
the Owner upon the Owner’s request.
d)
In implementing the foregoing provisions the contractor shall comply with and be
bound by the Owner’s equal opportunity construction contracting procedures in all
respects. Such procedures are hereby incorporated by reference and are made a
material part of this contract, violation of which may be deemed grounds for termination
of the contract by the Owner.
6
ENFORCEMENT
a)
The Owner’s equal employment opportunity construction contracting
requirements shall be enforced under the direction of the Owner’s Chief Operating Officer
who shall cause to be implemented the following steps:
(1) Compliance Review
(a)
Contractor compliance with the advertising and Certified Diverse
Business identification requirements of these procedures shall be verified in each
instance. In addition, contractor records shall be reviewed and the information
contained in those records verified to such extent as the Chief Operating Officer
deems appropriate to ensure compliance with these procedures.
(2) Complaints
(a)
Any person who believes any person or firm has been subject to
discrimination with respect to contracting opportunities, or that any contractor has
failed to fulfill the requirements of these procedures, may file a complaint in
writing with the Owner’s Purchasing Director, who shall cause a prompt
investigation to be undertaken regarding that complaint.
F-4
(3) Reasonable Cause Notice
(a)
If an audit, review, or investigation results in a determination of
reasonable cause to believe that a contractor is not in compliance with these
procedures, the Purchasing Director shall cause notice be given to the contractor
in person or by registered mail identifying the area of noncompliance and
requiring the contractor to show cause why specified sanctions should not be
imposed. The notice shall advise the contractor that he may review the evidence
supporting such reasonable cause determination and that he may submit a
written response to such determination and request a hearing before the Chief
Operating Officer regarding such determination and any sanction to be imposed.
The notice shall further set forth the sanction proposed for such noncompliance.
(4) Hearing
(a)
If a contractor requests a hearing regarding a reasonable cause
determination, the Chief Operating Officer, or his designee shall hold a hearing at
which such information and argument relevant to the determination shall be
presented. The hearing shall be informal and the rules of evidence shall not be
applied.
(5) Decision
(a)
Following receipt of the contractor’s response to the reasonable cause
notice, or following a hearing, if one is requested, the Chief Operating Officer, or
his designee shall issue a decision making finding with respect to the contractor’s
compliance or noncompliance with these procedures and imposing such
sanctions, if any, as are appropriate. Such decision shall be final and binding.
(6) Contractor’s Cooperation
(a)
Each contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in auditing, reviewing
compliance, and investigating complaints. Such cooperation shall include
maintaining and producing records required by these procedures and making
available to the Owner personnel who have such information pertinent to these
procedures. No contractor shall retaliate against any person or firm, or attempt
to intimidate or coerce any person or firm for registering a complaint or
cooperating with an investigation related to these procedures. Nor shall any
contractor knowingly provide any false or inaccurate information in connection
with any audit, review, or investigation.
(7) Sanctions
(a)
Sanctions to be imposed for violations of these procedures may include
one or more of the following:
(i) Forfeiture of opportunities to bid on Owner work for a specified time
period or for specified projects
(ii) Disqualification from the Owner’s list of approved contractors that are
considered for district-wide projects, either permanently, or for a specified
time period
(iii) Contract termination
F-5
(iv) Such other sanctions as may be deemed appropriate to effectuate the
purposes of these procedures
F-6
DRAFT
EXHIBIT G – SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS
1.
Electronic Data Format. The Project Schedule shall be developed and maintained using MS
Project, Suretrack or another electronic system approved in writing by Owner.
2.
General Requirements.
3.
4.
2.1
The Project Schedule shall include realistic activity sequences and durations, allocation
of labor and materials, processing of shop drawings and samples, normal weather delays
in accordance with Section 3.4.2 of the General Condition of the Contract and allowances
for lead times in delivery of products. The Project Schedule shall provide for coordination
with any separate construction activities by Owner that relate to or affect the Project
(including any abatement, moving, or other occupancy requirements) and shall indicate
the occupancy priority for different portions of the Site.
2.2
The Project Schedule shall be divided into logical building areas by floor levels,
elevations, functional spaces and additions or renovations.
Submissions.
3.1
Contractor shall submit an updated Project Schedule with each Application for Payment.
Each update shall include a time-scaled summary chart and a narrative report containing
a description of the current status of the progress of the Work, current and anticipated
delaying factors and their estimated impact on performance of other activities and
completion dates, and an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed to address
any delaying factors. Such monthly submittal shall include a time-scaled Gantt chart and
mathematical analysis in Portable Document Format (.pdf) and an electronic copy of the
MS Project or Suretrack file that can be accessed to review all task relationships and all
attached constraints.
3.2
Whenever the current update to the Project Schedule reflects a delay of five (5) or more
working days behind schedule, Contractor shall submit, together with the Project
Schedule update, a written statement describing the cause of the delay and the actions
being taken or considered by the Contractor to recover the time lost.
3.3
Proposed changes to the Project Schedule shall be submitted to Owner’s Project
Manager for review. Submissions of the Project Schedule proposing changes shall
clearly identify the activities and/or logic affected by the proposed changes and compare
such changes to the most recently accepted Project Schedule.
Detail Requirements. The Project Schedule shall, at a minimum, include the following detail and
account for the following factors:
4.1
Activity durations in working days.
4.2
Long lead time procurement activities.
4.3
Contractor phasing activities.
4.4
Milestone dates for phasing requirements.
4.5
Owner activities (e.g. delivery of Owner-furnished items)
4.6
Resource constraints.
G-1
5.
4.7
Interfaces with work by others (e.g. utility connections)
4.8
Concurrent activities by Owner’s separate contractors, to the extent they may interface
with or otherwise affect the Work.
4.9
Inspection, commissioning and testing activities.
4.10
Clean-up and punchlist activities.
4.11
Owner move-in activities.
4.12
Weather constraints.
4.13
Change Directives and Agreed Changes.
4.14
Start, early start, late start, actual start, % complete, finish, early finish, late finish,
remaining duration, actual finish, and total float for each activity.
Drawing and Analysis Details.
5.1
5.2
The CPM logic drawings included in the Construction Schedule shall be 30” x 42” and
shall, at a minimum, include:
5.1.1
Activity descriptions.
5.1.2
Activity durations.
5.1.3
Marked critical path.
5.1.4
Marked complete activities.
5.1.5
Highlighted milestone dates.
5.1.6
The update number and date for the logic drawing.
The CPM computer analysis included in the Construction Schedule shall, at a minimum,
include:
5.2.1
The activity designation.
5.2.2
The activity description.
5.2.3
The activity duration (in working days), early start, late start, early finish, and late
finish dates, % complete, remaining duration, and total float.
5.2.4
Subcontract or trade designation.
G-2
DRAFT
EXHIBIT H – GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
(See Separate Attachment)
H-1
DRAFT
EXHIBIT I – SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
(none)
I-1
School District No. 1 in the City and County of
Denver and State of Colorado
General Conditions of the Contract
Article 1.
1.1
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION
Definitions.
1.1.1
Terms Defined in Other Contract Documents. Terms defined in the Agreement or
other Contract Documents and not defined herein shall have the meanings given them in
the Contract Documents where they are defined.
1.1.2
Agreed Change. Defined in Section 5.1.2 below.
1.1.3
Agreement. The Agreement to which these General Conditions of the Contract are
attached.
1.1.4
AHJ. The governmental authority having jurisdiction over the Project selected by Owner
for building permits, inspections and approvals.
1.1.5
Application for Payment. Defined in Section 2.2.1.
1.1.6
Dispute Resolution. An Owner administrativeproceeding pursuant to the provisions of
Exhibit E to the Agreement.
1.1.7
Dispute. A dispute subject to Dispute Resolution.
1.1.8
Architect. The architect, engineer, or other design consultant engaged by Owner in
connection with the Project. If the Owner has not engaged such a person, references to
the Architect shall be deemed to refer to the Owner unless otherwise expressly provided.
1.1.9
As-Builts. Defined in Section 2.5.1.4 below.
1.1.10 Change Directive. Defined in Section 5.1.1 below.
1.1.11 Change Order. Defined in Section 5.6 below.
1.1.12 CMGC Agreement. If these General Conditions of the Contract are used with a
Construction Manager / General Contractor Agreement, that agreement.
1.1.13 Colorado Labor. “Colorado Labor” means any person who is a resident of the State of
Colorado at the time of employment, selected without discrimination as to race, color,
creed, sex, age, or religion, except when sex or age is a bona fide occupational
qualification; provided that if C.R.S. § 8-17-101 is revised to provide a different definition
of the term “Colorado Labor,” such term shall have the meaning provided in C.R.S. § 817-101.
1.1.14 Commencement of Construction. Defined in Section 14.7 for the purposes of that
Section only.
General Conditions of the Contract
12/2011
Denver Public Schools
1.1.15 Construction Documents. The part of the Contract Documents comprised of the plans,
specifications and other documents prepared by Architect, subject to Owner’s approval,
to be used in the execution of the Work.
1.1.16 Construction Fee. If the Agreement is a CMGC Agreement, the term “Construction Fee”
is defined in the Agreement. Otherwise, references in these General Conditions of the
Contract to the “Construction Fee” shall mean the Contractor Fee.
1.1.17 Construction Work. The portion of the Work comprised of the physical construction of
the Project, including supervision and administration thereof.
1.1.18 Contract. The agreement between Owner and Contractor relating to the Project
contained in the Contract Documents.
1.1.19 Contract Documents. The Contract Documents identified in the Agreement.
1.1.20 Contractor. Defined in the Agreement. Where Contract Documents refer to a
“Mechanical Contractor,” “Electrical Contractor,” or other specific contractors, those
references mean “Contractor” when the work to be performed is part of the scope of
Contractor’s Work.
1.1.21 Contractor Fee. If the Agreement is a CMGC Agreement, the term “Contractor Fee” is
defined in the Agreement. Otherwise, the term “Contractor Fee” shall mean the part of
the Contract Sum allocated in the Schedule of Values to Contractor’s profit,
administrative and overhead expenses.
1.1.22 Contract Sum. Defined in the Agreement. If the Agreement is a CMGC Agreement,
then adjustments in the Contract Sum to be made under these General Conditions of the
Contract shall be applied to the Guaranteed Maximum Price, and prohibitions on
adjustments to the Contract Sum contained in these General Conditions of the Contract
shall be construed as prohibitions on adjustments to the Guaranteed Maximum Price.
1.1.23 Cost of Work. The sum of Direct Hard Costs, Soft Costs, and (if the Agreement
provides for one) the General Conditions Fee, unless a different definition is provided in
the Agreement.
1.1.24 CPM. The Critical Path Method of construction scheduling, as described in CPM in
Construction – A Manual for General Contractors, published by The Associated General
Contractors of America, Inc.
1.1.25 Current Laws. The applicable laws and regulations in effect from time to time on and
after the date of this Agreement, including building codes, dimensional aspects of zoning
regulations, safety regulations, environmental laws, and other laws and regulations
applicable to the Project, as the same have been officially interpreted by published
decisions of courts, published regulations, and other official published interpretations
which have the force of law.
1.1.26 Direct Hard Costs. The costs of labor and materials for the physical construction of the
improvements comprising the Work, including any site and infrastructure work, overlot
grading, asphalt paving of parking areas and entry drive, surfacing of entries and loading
dock, curb and gutter, sidewalks, site lighting, water and sanitary sewer piping and
manholes, telephone conduit, landscaping, irrigation systems, storm sewers, retaining
and detention ponds, site amenities, and fiber-optic conduit, manholes, electricity service
lines, excavation and placement of foundation systems, concrete slab-on-grade,
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
2
Denver Public Schools
structural frame and facades, window systems, roof-top mechanical enclosures,
mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems, interior framing and finishes, and other
similar elements.
1.1.27 Employee Benefits. Defined in Section 22.2.
1.1.28 Event of Default. Defined in Section 14.1.
1.1.29 Excused Delay. Defined in Section 3.4.
1.1.30 Final Completion. Defined in Section 3.3. “Finally Complete” and “Finally Completed”
shall have the correlative meanings.
1.1.31 Final Payment. Defined in Section 2.5.1.
1.1.32 Force Majeure Delay. Defined in Section 3.4.3.1.
1.1.33 General Conditions Fee. May be defined in the Agreement.
1.1.34 General Conditions of the Contract. These General Conditions of the Contract,
including without limitation any and all Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract
and Addenda to General Conditions of the Contract.
1.1.35 Hazardous Substances. Defined in Section 16.1.
1.1.36 Interim Schedule. Defined in Section 4.2.1.
1.1.37 Lost Weather Day. Defined in Section 3.4.2.2.
1.1.38 Milestone Schedule. The schedule for the design and construction (if construction is
contemplated) of the Project set forth in Exhibit A to the Agreement.
1.1.39 Ordinary Course Materials. Defined in Section 16.5.
1.1.40 Owner. School District No. 1 in the City and County of Denver and State of Colorado.
1.1.41 Owner Delay. Defined in Section 3.4.1.
1.1.42 Owner Parties. Owner, its directors, officers, agents and employees, the members of its
Board of Education, and such other parties as may be designated as Owner Parties in
Exhibit A to the Agreement.
1.1.43 Owner’s Project Manager. The individual employee or agent of Owner designated by
Owner from time to time as Owner’s primary representative in connection with the
Project.
1.1.44 Owner’s Website. Owner’s Internet World Wide Web page at http://fm.dpsk12.org/ and
its subsidiary pages.
1.1.45 Progress Payment. Defined in Section 2.2.
1.1.46 Project Schedule. Defined in Section 4.2.2.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
3
Denver Public Schools
1.1.47 Proposed Change. Defined in Section 5.2.1 below.
1.1.48 Punch List. A punch list prepared by Contractor, Architect and Owner at the time of
Substantial Completion, further described in Section 3.2 below, listing items of Work to be
completed in order to bring the Work to Final Completion.
1.1.49 Required Substantial Completion Date. The date specified as the Required
Substantial Completion Date in the Milestone Schedule.
1.1.50 Required Final Completion Date. The date specified as the Required Final Completion
Date in the Milestone Schedule.
1.1.51 Retainage. Defined in Section 2.2.2.
1.1.52 Schedule of Values. Defined in Section 2.1.
1.1.53 Site. The property of Owner where the Project is to be constructed (or a portion of such
property reasonably designated by Owner), whether one or more parcels.
1.1.54 Soft Costs. Amounts payable by Contractor to third parties for development approvals
and building permits, costs of insurance and bonds (unless Exhibit B-1 to the Agreement
allocates such costs to a different category), consulting fees, and other fees, taxes, and
assessments related to the Work and payable to governmental authorities for which
Contractor is liable
1.1.55 Standards. Denver Public Schools Design and Construction Standards, a copy of which
is available on Owner’s Website.
1.1.56 Subcontractor. Any contractor who has contracted directly with Contractor for the
performance of part of the Work.
1.1.57 Substantial Completion. Defined in Section 3.2. “Substantially Complete” and
“Substantially Completed” shall have the correlative meanings.
1.1.58 Sub-subcontractor. Any contractor who has not contracted directly with Contractor but
has contracted directly with or indirectly with a Subcontractor for the performance of part
of the Work.
1.1.59 Supplier. Any materialman, or supplier of materials or equipment who has contracted
directly or indirectly with Contractor to provide materials and supplies for the Work.
1.1.60 Warranty Period. Defined in Section 11.1.
1.1.61 Weather Delay. Defined in Section 3.4.2.
1.1.62 Work. All construction, construction management, supervision, coordination and other
tasks contemplated by or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. If the
Agreement is a CMGC Agreement, the term “Work” also includes the Pre-Construction
Work.
1.1.63 Work Product. All documents, materials, and things, including plans and other
drawings, specifications, reports, assessments and models, created or prepared by
Architect or Contractor.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
4
Denver Public Schools
1.2
Interpretation.
1.2.1
“Including” shall, unless otherwise specifically stated, mean including, but not limited to.
1.2.2
Words such as “hereby,” “herein,” and “hereunder” and words of similar import shall be
construed to refer to the Agreement in its entirety and the General Conditions of the
Contract, subject to the provisions of the Agreement relating to resolution of differences
between terms of different Contract Documents.
1.2.3
Where otherwise consistent with the context, the singular shall include the plural and the
plural shall include the singular.
1.2.4
The titles of articles and sections used in the Agreement and these General Conditions of
the Contract are primarily for the convenience of the reader but may be used as aids in
interpreting any provision herein. If any of the provisions of the exhibits attached to the
Agreement hereto or of any of the Contract Documents are inconsistent with the
provisions of the Agreement, the provisions of the Agreement shall control.
1.2.5
Any references to “days” in any Contract Documents refer to calendar days. Any
references in any Contract Documents or any communications between Owner and
Contractor to “business days” refer to days when Owner’s administrative offices are open
for the regular conduct of business. Any such references to the “school year” refer to the
period from August to late May or early June when Owner’s school facilities are in regular
session, as determined by the official calendar of Denver Public Schools. Any such
references to “summer” refer to the period between the end of one school year in late
May or early June and the commencement of the next school year in August.
1.2.6
Wherever the Contract Documents contain the words “as directed,” “as required,” “as
ordered,” “as designated,” “as indicated,” “as prescribed,” or other words or phrases of
like import to refer to elements of the Work, the same shall be construed to refer to the
direction, requirement, order, designation, indication, prescription, or other approval of
the Architect and Owner, unless otherwise expressly stated. When the words “as
approved,” “as accepted” (or “acceptable”), “satisfactory,” or other words or phrases of
like import are used to refer to elements of the Work, they shall mean approved or
accepted by, or acceptable to, or satisfactory to the Architect and Owner, unless
otherwise expressly stated.
Article 2.
PAYMENTS
2.1
Schedule of Values. Before beginning Construction Work or at such earlier time as may be
required by the Agreement, Contractor shall submit a schedule showing the breakdown of the
total cost of the Project into itemized categories for the various parts of the Work, separating
material costs, labor costs, general conditions costs and other costs, including as material costs
the material costs of all Subcontractors and the costs of all materials to be taken from the
Contractor’s or any Subcontractor’s own stocks of material, all in form acceptable to the Owner,
and supported by such evidence as the Architect or Owner may request. Such schedule shall be
subject to approval by Owner, which approval shall not unreasonably be withheld. If Owner does
not approve such schedule, it shall specify the portions thereof that it does not approve and give
reasons why Owner is withholding approval, and Contractor shall revise the schedule. Such
schedule, or any revision thereof, when approved by Owner is called the “Schedule of Values.”
2.2
Progress Payments. Owner shall make monthly payments (each a “Progress Payment”) on
account of the Contract as follows:
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
5
Denver Public Schools
2.2.1
Application for Payment.
2.2.1.1 Before Work commences, Owner shall designate a day of the month by which
Applications for Payment shall be due. On or before such day of each month
after the Construction Work has commenced (but not earlier than the first day of
such month), Contractor shall submit to Owner and Architect an “Application for
Payment” substantially in the form of the current AIA Documents G702 and
G703 (the Application and Certificate for Payment and the Continuation Sheet)
based on the Schedule of Values, and such other materials and information as
may be required by the Agreement. No Application for Payment except the
Application for Final Payment shall be made for an amount less than $1,000.00.
2.2.1.2 Each Application for Payment shall constitute a representation and warranty of
Contractor (whether or not specifically stated) that Contractor is not in default
hereunder, the amounts requested in the Application for Payment are due
hereunder, after payment of the amounts requested in the Application for
Payment, the amount remaining to be paid under the Contract is sufficient to pay
for the balance of the Work, the Work performed to date is in accordance with
that contemplated by the Milestone Schedule (or specifying the portions thereof
that are not), Contractor has no claims hereunder and has no request for
changes in the Milestone Schedule or the Contract Sum not provided for in the
Application for Payment. Each Application for Payment shall further constitute
the representation and warranty of Contractor (whether or not specifically stated)
that the percentage of the Work represented to have been done in each category
provided on the Schedule of Values has, in fact, been completed as of the last
day of the period for which such Application for Payment has been submitted.
The period covered by an Application for Payment shall end not earlier than ten
(10) days before the due date for the Application for Payment, unless Contractor
and Owner agree otherwise in writing.
2.2.1.3 Each Application for Payment shall set forth the status of all Proposed Changes,
Change Directives, and Change Orders.
2.2.1.4 Contractor shall promptly submit such additional information and documents as
Owner or Architect may reasonably request in support of the Application for
Payment.
2.2.2
Retainage. Until the Work has been completed and all conditions to Final Payment have
been satisfied, Owner shall be entitled to retain from each Progress Payment five percent
(5%) of the amount that would otherwise be due to the Contractor (the “Retainage”).
2.2.3
Warranty of Title to Work Completed. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to
all work, materials, and equipment covered by an Application for Payment, whether
incorporated in the Work or not, will pass to Owner upon the receipt of such payment by
Contractor, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, or other encumbrances,
including all claims of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and any others providing work or
materials for the Project, or who might be entitled to make a claim based thereon. No
work, materials, or equipment covered by an Application for Payment shall have been
acquired subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance
thereon is retained by the seller or otherwise imposed by Contractor or by other persons
who perform any work at the Site or furnish any materials or equipment for the Work.
Although title to all components and aspects of the Work which are in place and title to all
materials on account of which any payment has been made to Contractor shall be
granted to Owner in accordance with this Section, Contractor shall continue to provide for
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
6
Denver Public Schools
adequate protection of all Work until Substantial Completion. Contractor shall make good
any damage, injury, or loss to Work prior to Substantial Completion except to the extent
such damage, injury, or loss is caused by Owner, its contractors, suppliers, agents,
licensees, guests, or invitees.
2.2.4
Payment of Subcontractors and Suppliers. Contractor shall promptly pay all amounts
due to Subcontractors, Suppliers, and any others engaged by Contractor for the Work.
Whether or not expressly stated, each Application for Payment to Owner will constitute a
warranty and representation from Contractor to Owner that all Work previously paid for by
Owner is free and clear of all liens, encumbrances and claims and that all
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others engaged by Contractor for such Work have been
paid all amounts due to them on account of payments previously made by Owner to
Contractor. Owner may, at its option, pay Subcontractors, Suppliers and other vendors
directly or by checks issued to Contractor and such persons jointly.
2.2.5
Payments for Pre-Requisitioned Materials. The costs of materials purchased and
stored in accordance with all applicable provisions of the Contract Documents but not yet
installed may be included in the applicable category of costs for an Application for
Payment when stored, provided that such costs shall not be included again when the
materials are installed, and Owner shall be entitled to a credit for the value of any such
materials not actually incorporated in the Work. Payments to be made on account of
such materials shall be conditioned upon submission of bills of sale or such other
documents or procedures satisfactory to Owner to establish Owner’s unencumbered title
to such materials or equipment or otherwise to protect Owner’s interest.
2.2.6
Right to Audit; Non-Waiver. Payment of any Progress Payment by Owner shall not
foreclose the right of Owner to examine the books and records of Contractor applicable to
the Contract to determine the correctness and accuracy of any item and shall not
constitute an acceptance by Owner of the Work covered thereby or a waiver of any claim
or right which Owner may have with regard to such Work or the Application for Payment.
2.2.7
Certificate for Payment.
2.2.7.1 The Architect shall, within ten (10) days after receipt of the Contractor’s
Application for Payment, either certify the same to Owner for payment (with a
copy to the Contractor) or notify Contractor and Owner of the reasons for
withholding certification, which the Architect may withhold in whole or in part if it
determines in its professional judgment that it cannot make the representations
required by this Section 2.2.7 with respect thereto or for other good cause
(including any of the causes listed in Section 2.4 below except Section 2.4.1).
2.2.7.2 The issuance of a certificate for payment shall constitute a representation by the
Architect to the Owner, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and
belief based on the observation of the Work required by the Architect’s
agreement with the Owner, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated
and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,
subject to minor deviations to be corrected prior to completion and specific
qualifications the Architect may set forth in its certificate. The issuance of such a
certificate shall not be construed as a representation that the Architect has
evaluated construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures.
Such a certificate for payment shall not be construed as a determination binding
upon Owner of any of the matters described in this Section 2.2.7.2.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
7
Denver Public Schools
2.3
Time for Progress Payment. Subject to the provisions of Section 2.4 below, Owner shall make
Progress Payments based on Applications for Payment within thirty (30) days after the date each
application is properly submitted; provided, however, that if an Application for Payment is
submitted after the day of the month it is due, payment thereon shall be made within thirty (30)
days after the due date of the next Application for Payment.
2.4
Owner’s Ability to Withhold Payment. Architect may decline to approve, or Owner may decline
to make payment of, any portion of a Progress Payment that is not then payable in accordance
herewith and may decline to make payment of any other portion of a Progress Payment which is
reasonably necessary to protect Owner from any loss because of any of the following:
2.4.1
Architect’s withholding of certification of the Progress Payment or the applicable portion
thereof.
2.4.2
Defective portions of the Work not corrected (for which an Application for Payment has
been submitted).
2.4.3
Damage by Contractor to property not included in the Work.
2.4.4
Failure of Contractor to obtain necessary permits or licenses or to comply with Current
Laws.
2.4.5
Failure to submit required progress reports.
2.4.6
Failure to keep a superintendent on the Site during Construction Work.
2.4.7
Failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others
for labor, materials, or equipment, the filing of claims for payment with respect to part of
the Work, or a reasonable likelihood exists that a claim will be made.
2.4.8
A reasonable likelihood exists that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance
of the Contract Sum.
2.4.9
The Work cannot be Substantially Completed by the Required Substantial Completion
Date, as extended, if applicable, pursuant to the terms of the Contract Documents, and
the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover the sum of (i) the unpaid balance of
the Contract Sum plus (ii) liquidated damages or other damages for the anticipated delay.
2.4.10 Failure of Contractor to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2.4.11 The Work has not reached the stage of completion claimed in the Application for
Payment or, for any other reason, payment is not then due hereunder.
2.4.12 Claims filed in connection with the Work or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing
of claims.
2.4.13 Amounts due and unpaid from Contractor to Owner under the Contract or any other
agreement.
2.4.14 Any other cause that reasonably justifies withholding payment either (i) to assure the full
and timely performance by Contractor hereunder or (ii) to protect Owner from loss or
damage hereunder.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
8
Denver Public Schools
2.4.15 If Owner withholds any portion of a Progress Payment, it shall be obligated to pay the
undisputed balance of the Progress Payment, as set forth in the Application for Payment,
less the amount reasonably estimated by Owner as necessary to protect Owner from the
losses enumerated under this Section 2.4. No such withholding in good faith shall
constitute an Event of Default by Owner or entitle Contractor to stop the Work.
2.5
Payment upon Final Completion.
2.5.1
Full payment of the Contract Sum, including all Retainage previously withheld (the “Final
Payment”), shall be due and payable within sixty (60) days after (i) Final Completion has
been achieved and the Contract has otherwise been fully performed by Contractor except
for Contractor’s responsibility to correct defective or nonconforming Work not yet
discovered as provided in Article 11, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which
necessarily survive Final Payment; (ii) Contractor has submitted to Owner and Architect
Contractor’s Application for Final Payment; (iii) if required by the Agreement, a final
accounting for the Cost of Work has been submitted by Contractor and reviewed by
Owner and its consultants; (iv) any adjustments in the Final Payment required by such an
accounting have been made; (v) Contractor has given Owner written notice that all of the
documents and materials required by this Section 2.5.1 have all been delivered; and
(vi) all of the following items have been provided to Owner and Architect or otherwise
satisfied:
2.5.1.1 Contractor’s affidavit that all payrolls and bills for materials, equipment, and other
indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner has paid Contractor prior
to the time of the Application for Payment have been paid or otherwise satisfied.
2.5.1.2 Consent of surety to Final Payment.
2.5.1.3 Reasonable evidence in the form of a “contractor certification” of material
compliance with all requirements of the Contract Documents, together with
(A) the operation and maintenance manuals required by Section 4.10; (B) keys
for any newly keyed doors with a keying schedule (master, sub-master, and
special keys); (C) certificates of all tests and inspections; (D) all existing printed
or typewritten operating, servicing, maintenance, and cleaning instructions for all
Work, including parts lists and special tools for mechanical and electrical Work;
and (E) any similar materials reasonably requested by Owner.
2.5.1.4 A complete set of redline Construction Documents, including all plans and
specifications, depicting and describing the condition of the Work as constructed
(“As-Builts”), sufficient in the Architect’s judgment for the Architect to prepare
final and complete as-built drawings and specifications for the Work.
2.5.1.5 A certificate (or, at Owner’s option, endorsements) evidencing that insurance
required by the Contract Documents to remain in force, if any, is currently in
effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire without at least thirty
(30) days prior notice to Owner.
2.5.1.6 A written statement that Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not
be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents.
2.5.1.7 Acceptance of the Final Payment by Contractor shall constitute a waiver of
claims by Contractor except those previously made in writing and identified by
Contractor as unsettled at the time of Application for Final Payment and except
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
9
Denver Public Schools
for any disputed amounts that are pending any final cost accounting process
required by the Agreement.
2.5.1.8 If, after Substantial Completion, the Final Completion of the Work is prevented
through delay in the correction and completion of items on the Punch List by
causes beyond the control of the Contractor, the Owner may, in its sole
discretion, pay Contractor any of the amounts that would otherwise be due in
Final Payment except that Owner shall retain an amount equal to three hundred
percent (300%) of the cost of completing and correcting such incomplete or
unacceptable Work, as reasonably estimated by Owner.
2.6
2.7
Final Settlement – Subcontractor and Supplier Claims
2.6.1
Before Final Payment is made, Owner will advertise the final settlement of the Contract
by two (2) publications of notice thereof pursuant to C.R.S. § 38-26-107, the last of which
shall be published not less than ten (10) days before the date set for final settlement. If
any unpaid claim for labor, materials, rental machinery, tools, equipment, sustenance, or
other supplies used or consumed in connection with the Work is filed, Owner shall
withhold from the Final Payment amounts sufficient, in Owner’s reasonable
determination, to insure the payment of such claim until such claim shall have been paid
or withdrawn, such payment or withdrawal to be evidenced by filing with the Owner a
receipt in full or an order for withdrawal signed by the claimant or his duly authorized
agent or assignee.
2.6.2
Notwithstanding the foregoing paragraph, funds retained for the payment of claims filed
with the Owner shall not be withheld longer than ninety (90) days following the date fixed
for final settlement as published unless an action is commenced within that time to
enforce such unpaid claim and a notice of lis pendens is filed with the Owner.
2.6.3
At the expiration of the ninety-day period, Owner shall pay to the Contractor such
amounts as are not the subject of suit and lis pendens notices and shall retain thereafter,
subject to the final outcome of such suits, only sufficient funds to insure the payment of
judgments that may result from the suit.
2.6.4
If any claim for such labor, materials, supplies or equipment remains unsatisfied after
Final Payment, Contractor shall refund to Owner all sums which the Owner may for any
reason be obligated to pay to satisfy such claim, including all costs and attorneys' fees
incurred by Owner in connection therewith.
Appropriations.
2.7.1
If the Agreement is a CMGC Agreement, Owner states in accordance with C.R.S. § 2491-103.6 that the amount of money appropriated by the Owner’s Board of Education for
the Work is equal to or in excess of the Guaranteed Maximum Price as it is established
upon the execution of the Agreement, or, if no Guaranteed Maximum Price is established
upon the execution of the Agreement, the Pre-Construction Fee.
2.7.2
If the Agreement is not a CMGC Agreement, Owner states in accordance with C.R.S.
§ 24-91-103.6 that the amount of money appropriated by the Owner’s Board of Education
for the Work is equal to or in excess of the Contract Sum.
2.7.3
No Change Order or other form of order or directive by Owner requiring additional
compensable Work to be performed (including, if the Agreement is a CMGC Agreement,
any approval of a First Cost Estimate or Second Cost Estimate that would newly
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
10
Denver Public Schools
establish or increase the Guaranteed Maximum Price) shall be effective which causes the
amount of compensation to exceed the amount appropriated for the Contract, unless (i)
the Contractor is given written assurance by Owner that lawful appropriations to cover the
costs of the additional Work have been made or (ii) the Work is performed pursuant to a
clause that permits additional compensation in the event of a specific contingency or
event.
2.7.4
2.8
Except to the extent specifically provided to the contrary by Current Laws, Owner's
obligation for payments under the Contract shall extend only to money appropriated for
that purpose as required of school districts by law.
Taxes; Direct Purchase Option.
2.8.1
Contractor shall only include sales and use tax levied by the City and County of Denver
on materials from its Schedules of Values, and Subcontractors and Suppliers shall only
include such amounts in their bids. Except as provided in Section 2.8.2 below, the
Owner will furnish to Contractor, on request by the Contractor, the necessary exemption
certificates to aid the Contractor in the recovery or avoidance of any such taxes paid or
otherwise due to be paid by Contractor for materials and equipment built into the Project,
or to support the Contractor's failure to pay such taxes, as the case may be.
2.8.2
Contractor and its Subcontractors shall be responsible to obtain from the Colorado State
Department of Revenue certificates for exemption indicating that the purchase of
construction building materials for the Work is for a purpose stated in Colorado Revised
Statutes Section 39-26-114(1)(a)(XIX).
2.8.3
At Owner’s option, Contractor and Owner shall cooperate with one another so that Owner
may purchase or contract directly for such items or Contractor and Owner shall make
other appropriate arrangements as necessary to avoid incurring taxes, fees, and other
costs. In such circumstances, Contractor shall act as agent for Owner in effecting such
purchasing and contracting, Contractor shall have all the responsibilities as to such
portions of the Work as Contractor otherwise has with respect to the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible to expedite, arrange for and receive delivery of all such purchases,
regardless of whether made by Contractor or Owner, and shall promptly examine
deliveries to ascertain whether or not they comply with the requirements of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner and Architect of any delay in the
delivery of such purchases, any failure to receive such purchases as needed and any
failure of such purchases to comply with the Contract Documents
2.8.4
To the extent that Owner makes any payments directly to Suppliers, such payments shall
be credited against the payments due from Owner to Contractor hereunder and shown,
as incurred, on all Applications for Payment. Owner shall promptly notify Contractor and
Architect, on serially numbered forms, of any amount paid directly for materials, any
discounts obtained by Owner, and the amount of the credit due to Owner.
2.8.5
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required by law, all
as part of the Contract Sum, except to the extent of the exemptions that may be available
to Contractor or Owner as provided above. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment
(increase) in the Contract Sum to the extent that an increase in the aggregate amount of
such taxes payable by Contractor hereunder results from any change in Current Laws
creating such taxes or increasing the rate of such taxes enacted after the date of the
Agreement.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
11
Denver Public Schools
2.9
Discounts. All discounts for prompt payment obtained by Contractor shall accrue to Owner to
the extent they apply to Costs of Work payable by Owner (whether paid directly or reimbursed to
Contractor). To the extent that such discounts apply to costs paid by Contractor without
reimbursement, such discounts shall accrue to Contractor. All trade discounts, rebates and
refunds, and all returns from sale of surplus or salvage materials and equipment, shall accrue to
the benefit of Owner, and the Contractor’s agreements with others shall provide for such credits
to be applied either through credits from Subcontractors and Suppliers passed through to Owner
by Contractor or by payment directly to Owner.
2.10
Adjustments. The Contract Sum (or, if the Agreement is a CMGC Agreement, the Guaranteed
Maximum Price) may be adjusted by Agreed Change. Contractor is obligated to pay out of its
own funds any overruns of the Contract Sum (or, if the Agreement is a CMGC Agreement, the
Guaranteed Maximum Price) not approved by Agreed Change as provided in Section 5.1.2.
Article 3.
COMPLETION, TIME, AND DELAYS IN CONSTRUCTION
3.1
Time of the Essence. The Work shall be performed in accordance with the Milestone Schedule
and other schedules approved by Owner under the Contract, subject to Excused Delay and
adjustment in accordance with the terms of the Agreement and these General Conditions of the
Contract.
3.2
Substantial Completion. “Substantial Completion” shall have been achieved when the Work is
sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so (i) Owner can occupy and
utilize the Site for its intended use, (ii) a temporary or permanent certificate of occupancy for the
Project (or, if the AHJ does not issue certificates of occupancy for projects like the Project and a
certificate of occupancy is not necessary for Owner’s use of the Project for its intended purpose,
a certificate of compliance) and all other governmental permits for the occupancy and use of all of
the Project have been issued, (iii) all systems to be constructed or installed by Contractor are fully
functional, (iv) Contractor has delivered the As-Builts, and (v) the Work is complete except for
minor items set forth on the Punch List which are not required to be completed for Owner to
occupy and use the Building for its intended purpose, which can reasonably be completed within
thirty (30) days, and the completion of which while Owner and its licensees occupy the Site will
not interfere with such use and occupancy of the Site (including applicable parking and
recreational facilities) for their intended purpose and will not delay or render more expensive in
any material way the completion and correction of the Punch List items. Contractor
acknowledges that the standard for Substantial Completion of an educational facility is
significantly more stringent than the standard customary in the construction industry generally
because of the intensive uses to which educational facilities are put. Contractor shall construct
the Work and achieve Substantial Completion of all Work on or before the Required Substantial
Completion Date.
3.3
Final Completion. “Final Completion” shall have been achieved when (i) all of the Work has
been finally completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and all final certificates of
occupancy required by Current Laws have been issued, (ii) the walk-through inspection of the
Work confirms completion of the Punch List items, and (iii) any other matters required to be
completed to finish the Work and render the Project fully complete and ready for use and
occupancy shall have been completed. When Contractor has completed the Punch List items for
the Work, Contractor shall request a walk-through inspection to confirm the completion of those
items, which Owner and Contractor shall schedule at a mutually convenient time, but in no event
later than five (5) business days after Contractor notifies Owner of its completion of the Punch
List for such portion of the Work. Contractor shall achieve Final Completion of all Work on or
before the Required Final Completion Date.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
12
Denver Public Schools
3.4
Excused Delay. If Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work or the Required
Substantial Completion Date is delayed due to the following causes (“Excused Delay”), the
Required Substantial Completion Date and Required Final Completion Date shall be extended by
a period of time equal to the number of days of Excused Delay (provided that, for any day on
which two or more Excused Delays overlap, Contractor shall be allowed only one day of Excused
Delay):
3.4.1
3.4.2
Owner Delay.
3.4.1.1
An “Owner Delay” shall be a delay caused (i) by the act or neglect of Owner,
(ii) (if the Agreement is a CMGC Agreement) by the failure of Owner during the
Design Phases to approve or submit comments on any Submission or other
plans in the time required by the Project Schedule approved by Owner, or (iii) by
the failure of Owner to execute any documents necessary for the performance of
the Work, including the granting of easements across the Site or the disbursal of
necessary funds to Contractor for payments of amounts due to Contractor
hereunder (not including amounts being disputed); but only to the extent that the
act giving rise to the claimed Owner Delay actually delays progress on the critical
path to completion of the Work.
3.4.1.2
In order to claim that an Owner Delay has occurred, Contractor shall be
required to notify Owner of the claimed Owner Delay promptly, and in any event
before the end of the second (2nd) business day, after the start of the claimed
Owner Delay. Any such notice shall specify the occurrence of the claimed
Owner Delay, the nature of the cause of the claimed Owner Delay, and the Work
that is affected by the claimed Owner Delay. An Owner Delay shall be deemed
to have commenced on the day that it begins if such notice is timely given, or, if
such notice is not timely given, shall be deemed to have commenced on the first
business day after such notice is given.
Weather Delay.
3.4.2.1
In order for a weather delay (a “Weather Delay”) to occur, the Lost Weather
Days in any calendar month must exceed the normal number of such days for
such month set forth below. The Weather Delay, if any, shall be the number of
days of such excess; provided that no Weather Delay shall have occurred except
to the extent that Work which needs to be performed during the period of time
affected by adverse weather is actually delayed in a manner that delays the
critical path to completion of the Work. To the extent that the number of Lost
Weather Days in any month is smaller than the normal number of Lost Weather
Days in such month set forth below, the difference shall be carried forward to the
following month (and, to the extent not then consumed, the ensuing months) and
used to offset any Lost Weather Days in such following month or months.
Contractor and Owner agree that the normal number of such delays for each
month is as follows:
January:
February:
March:
April:
May:
June:
July:
August:
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
6 days
6 days
5 days
5 days
5 days
4 days
4 days
4 days
13
Denver Public Schools
September:
October:
November:
December:
3.4.3
3.4.4
3 day
4 days
5 days
6 days
3.4.2.2
As used herein, a “Lost Weather Day” shall mean a day during which actual
adverse weather prevents work on activities that need to be performed on that
day in accordance with the Project Schedule for fifty percent (50%) or more of
Contractor’s scheduled Work for such day.
3.4.2.3
Contractor shall report, by facsimile notice, to Owner (i) no later than 10:30
a.m. (in the time zone in which the Site is located) on each day Contractor claims
to be a Lost Weather Day or (ii) if Work on the Project has commenced for such
day, within one hour of Contractor’s decision to suspend Work because of such
adverse weather. Such report shall state that Contractor considers that a Lost
Weather Day is occurring and shall describe the weather conditions experienced
and how the weather conditions have affected the Scheduled Work for such day.
Unless Contractor gives such timely notice as to any day when work is adversely
affected by adverse weather, Contractor shall not be entitled to claim such day is
a Lost Weather Day.
Force Majeure Delays.
3.4.3.1
A “Force Majeure Delay” shall be a delay which could not reasonably have
been anticipated or avoided by Contractor and which is caused by labor disputes
(which are not limited in effect to Contractor or the Subcontractor, SubSubcontractor, or Supplier but are generally applicable to contractors at least in
the area where the portion of the Work affected is being performed); fire; flood;
earthquake; riot; war; insurrection; unusual delay in transportation (which is
generally applicable in the area where the portion of the Work affected is being
performed); fuel, material, or labor shortages (which are generally applicable in
the area where the portion of the Work affected is being performed);
unavailability, action, or inaction of public authorities (including delay of
governmental approvals in excess of that normally to be expected, as shown on
the Milestone Schedule) not arising out of the fault of Contractor; or unavoidable
casualties; provided that delays caused by adverse weather conditions shall not
be Force Majeure Delays. No Force Majeure Delay shall have occurred,
however, except to the extent that the critical path to completion of the Work is
actually delayed.
3.4.3.2
In order to claim that a Force Majeure Delay has occurred, Contractor shall
be required to notify Owner promptly, and in any event within two (2) business
days, after the claimed Force Majeure Delay becomes known to Contractor. Any
such notice shall specify the occurrence of the claimed Force Majeure Delay, the
nature of the cause of the claimed Force Majeure Delay, the Work that is affected
by the claimed Force Majeure Delay, and whether such Force Majeure Delay has
ended (in which case the date on which it ended shall be stated) or is then
continuing. A Force Majeure Delay shall be deemed to have commenced on the
day that it begins if such notice is timely given, or, if such notice is not timely
given, shall be deemed to have commenced on the day after such notice is
given.
Any dispute as to whether an Excused Delay has occurred shall be a Dispute and shall,
at the request of either Contractor or Owner, be submitted to Dispute Resolution.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
14
Denver Public Schools
3.5
3.6
Guarantee of Required Substantial Completion Date and Required Final Completion Date
Date.
3.5.1
Time is of the essence in the Contract with respect to the Required Substantial
Completion Date and Required Final Completion Date. As a remedy for Contractor’s
failure to meet the Required Substantial Completion Date and Required Final Completion
Date (as each may be extended by the terms of the Contract Documents), Contractor
shall be liable for liquidated damages for each day after the Required Substantial
Completion Date until the Work is Substantially Complete and each day after the
Required Final Completion Date until the Work is Finally Complete.
3.5.2
Should Contractor fail to Substantially Complete the Work by the Required Substantial
Completion Date, Contractor shall pay to Owner as liquidated damages the amounts set
forth on Exhibit A to the Agreement for each day after the Required Substantial
Completion Date until the Work is Substantially Complete. Should Contractor fail to
Finally Complete the Work by the Required Final Completion Date, Contractor shall pay
to Owner as liquidated damages, in addition to any liquidated damages that may be due
under the foregoing sentence, the amounts set forth on Exhibit A to the Agreement for
each day after the Required Final Completion Date until the Work is Finally Complete.
3.5.3
Contractor shall pay such liquidated damages (without offset or deduction for any
amounts Contractor claims Owner then owes or otherwise) by certified or cashier’s check
or by wire transfer of immediately available funds to a bank account designated by Owner
within thirty (30) days of receipt of invoice from Owner for same, which Owner may issue
from time to time until Substantial Completion and/or Final Completion, as applicable, has
occurred. Any such amounts not paid on or before thirty (30) days after receipt of invoice
shall accrue interest at the default rate of fifteen percent (15%) per annum from the date
due until and including the date paid. In the alternative, Owner shall have the right to
offset any such amounts owed to Owner as liquidated damages in whole or in part
against amounts due to Contractor under the Contract.
3.5.4
Owner’s right to liquidated damages pursuant to this Section 3.5 shall be in lieu of any
other damages Owner may be entitled to collect as a result of Contractor’s delay in
achieving Substantial Completion of the Work on or before the Required Substantial
Completion Date or in achieving Final Completion of the Work on or before the Required
Final Completion Date, as applicable; provided that (i) such liquidated damages shall not
be in lieu of or prevent Owner from exercising any other right or remedy for delay (other
than collection of damages), such as, by way of example and not by way of limitation,
remedies to terminate the Contract or to take over the Work, (ii) such liquidated damages
are only for the failure of Contractor to achieve the required degree of completion of the
Work by the applicable date and are not in lieu of any right or remedy that Owner has for
any other breach, default, or failure to perform under the Contract (for example, and not
by way of limitation, defective work or the filing or assertion of claims by Subcontractors
or Sub-subcontractors), and (iii) in addition to liquidated damages, to the extent that the
failure to achieve any scheduled stage of completion (other than Substantial Completion
or Final Completion) designated in the Milestone Schedule as a significant milestone (for
preparations or installations that Owner will do or for other activities of Owner) on or
before the date therefor provided on the Milestone Schedule results in specific out-ofpocket costs or other specific damages to Owner (such as the cost of storing equipment
ordered that the Building should have been sufficiently finished to house at that stage
according to the Milestone Schedule), Contractor shall pay to Owner the amount thereof.
Extraordinary Measures.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
15
Denver Public Schools
3.6.1
If the progress of the Work falls behind that required by the Milestone Schedule (as
revised to reflect any Excused Delay) in any material way, if requested by Owner,
Contractor shall work additional shifts or overtime, supply additional manpower or
equipment, or take other similar measures, as specified by Owner, and shall continue
such measures until the progress of the Work has reached the stage then required by the
Milestone Schedule (as revised to reflect any Excused Delay). Contractor shall not be
entitled to an increase in the Contract Sum on account of such measures.
3.6.2
Owner may further direct that Contractor take the measures described in Section 3.6.1
above to make up time lost to Excused Delay, in which event Owner’s directive shall be a
Change Directive to the extent of the additional work necessary to recover the time lost to
the Excused Delay, Contractor shall perform the requested work in accordance with
Section 5.1, and the Contract Sum shall be adjusted as provided in Sections 5.1 and 5.4;
provided, however, that only the incremental costs of such acceleration incurred in
excess of those costs necessary to bring the progress of the Work into conformance with
the Milestone Schedule (as adjusted for Excused Delay) shall be included in any increase
to the Contract Sum. Alternatively, Owner may at its option submit a Proposed Change
for such work in accordance with Section 5.2.
3.6.3
Contractor shall, within five (5) calendar days after Owner’s written request, provide
Owner a recovery schedule setting forth in complete detail the acceleration of the Work in
accordance with the provisions of this Section 3.6.
Article 4.
PROJECT AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
4.1
General Scope. Unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents, the
scope of Contractor’s Work, includes all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction
equipment, machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and
services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, whether
temporary or permanent and whether or not to be incorporated into the Work.
4.2
Project Schedule.
4.2.1
Contractor shall, within five (5) business days after the execution of the Agreement,
submit an interim CPM schedule to Owner’s Project Manager (the “Interim Schedule”).
The Interim Schedule shall include as many activities as are reasonably necessary to
sufficiently detail the work to be performed during the first ninety (90) working days and a
summary schedule of the Work for the entire Project. Until the preparation of the Project
Schedule in accordance with Section 4.2.2 below, the Interim Schedule shall be used to
manage the scheduling and coordination of the Work.
4.2.2
Within sixty (60) calendar days after the date of the Agreement, Contractor shall submit
to the Owner’s Project Manager a detailed CPM schedule for the entire Project (the
“Project Schedule”) in Primavera P6 format, including all of the items required by Exhibit
G to the Agreement. The Project Schedule shall be updated at least monthly and
submitted with each Application for Payment. Contractor shall also maintain a ninety (90)
day look-ahead schedule showing the activities to be performed within the immediately
forthcoming ninety (90) days and shall provide a copy of such schedule to Owner upon
request.
4.2.3
The Project Schedule shall be cost-loaded and conform to the Schedule of Values
approved by Owner, and Contractor shall keep current the cost information included in
the Project Schedule. If the Agreement is a CMGC Agreement, Contractor may defer
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
16
Denver Public Schools
cost-loading the Project Schedule until the approval of the Second Cost Estimate but
shall submit a fully cost-loaded Project Schedule within ten (10) days after such approval.
4.2.4
The Interim Schedule and Project Schedule shall conform to the Milestone Schedule. In
the event of conflict between the Milestone Schedule and the Project Schedule, the
Milestone Schedule shall prevail unless otherwise specifically agreed in writing by Owner.
No proposed changes in the Project Schedule that would extend the Required
Substantial Completion Date or Required Final Completion Date shall be binding on
Owner by reason of having been included in the Project Schedule.
4.2.5
Contractor shall record the daily progress of the Project in a daily log available to the
Owner and the Architect. Contractor shall submit a weekly written progress report and
summaries of project-related meetings to the Owner and the Architect, including
information on the subcontractors' work, labor resource levels by trade, safety violations,
inspections or tests, and the percentage of completion of items relative to the approved
Project Schedule.
4.3
Supervision and Construction Procedure. Contractor shall perform, supervise, direct, and
coordinate the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and shall be solely responsible
for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor shall
use its best skill and attention in the prosecution of the Work. Contractor shall take reasonable
measures to verify that significant Subcontractors and Suppliers have, where appropriate
because of the possible unavailability of labor or materials, made reasonable arrangements for
alternate sources of labor and materials so that the Project is not delayed by shortages of labor
and materials which might reasonably be anticipated. Contractor shall be responsible to Owner
for acts and omissions of Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors and
their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract
with Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the Work is properly sequenced
and that each stage of the Work is in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
4.4
Books and Records. Contractor shall keep and maintain all books and records with respect to
the Work including, without limitation, maintaining an accurate record of the Cost of Work. A copy
of all such books and records shall be kept at the Site or at Contractor’s office in the Denver,
Colorado metropolitan area and shall be open to inspection by Owner and Architect at all
reasonable times.
4.5
Site Investigation; Field Verification.
4.5.1
Contractor shall obtain information regarding existing facilities and building systems
sufficient to support Contractor’s Work. Such investigation shall include visual
examination of actual conditions at the Site and conducting conferences with Owner’s
personnel familiar with the existing facilities. Contractor shall confer with Architect and
Owner as may be necessary for Contractor to obtain a complete understanding of the
Project and Owner’s requirements for the Project insofar as they relate to the
Contractor’s Work.
4.5.2
Before ordering any material or doing any Construction Work, Contractor shall verify all
measurements shown in the Construction Documents at the Site of the work and shall be
responsible for the correctness of the same. Any differences between conditions on the
Site and the Contract Documents that Contractor may observe shall be promptly reported
in writing to the Architect before proceeding with any affected materials ordering or Work.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
17
Denver Public Schools
4.6
4.7
Use of Site.
4.6.1
Contractor shall confine operations at the Site to areas permitted by Current Laws,
ordinances, permits, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber
the Site with any materials or equipment. Contractor shall maintain the Site in a safe
condition. Contractor shall not load any structure or earth, or permit any part thereof to
be loaded, with a weight that will endanger safety or stability.
4.6.2
If any portions of an existing building are to be remodeled or repaired, such portions shall
be adequately partitioned off with dust-proof partitions. Contractor’s Project Schedule
and management of the Site and Work shall be planned and executed to permit the
completion of the Work in an orderly fashion during the school vacation periods, if any,
during which it is scheduled to occur, or in such manner as to permit full use of the Site
by Owner without impairment of any existing facilities.
4.6.3
Owner shall have the right to take possession of and to use any completed or partially
completed portions of the Work, even if the time for completing the entire Work or such
portions of the Work has not expired and even if the Work has not been finally accepted.
Such possession and use shall not constitute an acceptance of such portions of the
Work. Architect and Contractor shall conduct an inspection of such portions of the Work
before Owner occupancy thereof. A report of items incomplete, damaged or otherwise
unacceptable will be prepared by the Architect and delivered to the Contractor and
Owner. This report shall be used as a record of the condition of such Work at the time of
Owner’s occupancy thereof and shall not be construed to constitute acceptance of such
Work by Owner. Any material delays resulting from such occupancy of the Work by
Owner shall constitute Owner Delay (but only to the extent that such occupancy causes
actual delays in the Work that satisfy all the requirements necessary to be an Owner
Delay under Section 3.4.1) unless such occupancy is rendered necessary by Contractor’s
failure to complete the Work in accordance with the Milestone Schedule and Project
Schedule, as adjusted for Excused Delay.
4.6.4
If the Site is occupied by Owner, Contractor’s access to the Site for Construction Work
shall be limited during the school year to times outside normal school business hours and
such other days and times as Owner may specifically authorize in writing. Contractor’s
access to an occupied Site outside the school year shall be limited to normal business
hours and such other days and times as Owner may specifically authorize in writing.
Contractor shall have access to an occupied Site during school district holidays only with
Owner’s specific written authorization.
Cleaning Up. Contractor, at all times, shall keep the Work in neat and clean condition and free
from waste materials or rubbish caused by its operations. At least weekly, or more often as
necessary to comply with the requirements of the previous sentence and maintain a safe and
efficient site, Contractor shall clean up the Site and remove all waste and materials that have not
previously been removed, remove all equipment not then being used on a regular basis, remove
any excess materials, and take all other actions reasonably necessary to maintain the Site in a
good, clean, and orderly condition. At the completion of the Work, Contractor shall remove all its
waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project as well as all of its tools, construction
equipment, machinery, and surplus materials and shall clean all glass surfaces and leave the Site
“broom clean” or its equivalent, except as otherwise specified. If Contractor fails to clean up as
required hereby, Owner may do so and one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the reasonable cost
thereof shall be paid by Contractor or deducted from any amount thereafter becoming payable to
Contractor. No such charge by Owner shall be included within the Cost of Work.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
18
Denver Public Schools
4.8
Coordination with Owner’s Consultants. Owner may engage consultants to inspect portions of
the Work. Contractor shall cooperate with such inspections, review the inspection and laboratory
reports prepared by Owner’s separate consultants and advise and assist Owner in resolving any
concerns raised by those reports. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Architect when the
following work is ready for inspection before enclosing any such work:
4.8.1
Foundation bearing surfaces (where applicable)
4.8.2
Reinforcing steel after placing and prior to pouring concrete or grout.
4.8.3
Concrete placement.
4.8.4
Structural steel prior to being enclosed or covered.
4.8.5
Mechanical work prior to being enclosed or covered.
4.8.6
Electrical work prior to being enclosed or covered.
4.8.7
Each coat of specified waterproofing.
4.9
Drawings and Specifications at Site. Contractor shall maintain at the Site for Owner and
Architect one copy of all drawings, specifications, addenda, approved shop drawings, Change
Directives, Agreed Changes, Change Orders, and other modifications in good order and marked
daily to record all changes made during construction. Contractor shall keep permanent records of
all lines and levels required for excavation, grading and foundations. These drawings,
specifications, and similar items shall be made available to Owner and Architect at the Site.
4.10
Manufacturers’ and Subcontractors’ Warranties; Manuals. Upon Substantial Completion,
Contractor shall compile and deliver to Architect operation and maintenance manuals for each
building included in the Project, including a copy of each warranty extending beyond the Warranty
Period and a copy of each instruction manual provided to Contractor by manufacturers of
equipment, machinery, and similar items, a summary of any warranty time limitations contained in
third-party manufacturers’ warranties, and instructions to Owner’s representatives in the operation
of mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and other systems constituting part of the Work. Contractor
shall provide two (2) copies of each such manual for each building. Contractor shall arrange for
manufacturers’ representatives to assist in equipment and system start-up.
4.11
Unsuitable Conditions. The Contractor shall not perform any Work at any time, or permit any
Work to be done, under any conditions unsuited to its proper execution, safety, and reliability.
Any costs resulting from ill-timed work by Contractor shall be borne by Contractor, except to the
extent otherwise specifically provided herein.
4.12
Owner’s Separate Work.
4.12.1 Contractor acknowledges that Owner may enter into separate contracts for work to take
place on the Site at the same time as the Construction Work. Contractor shall coordinate
its efforts with the other activities of Owner on the Site, and Owner shall require its other
contractors to coordinate their activities with Contractor, to enable the work under each
contract to proceed without undue interference and to allow each contractor to perform its
work that relates to the work of other contractors in a timely manner.
4.12.2 In the event of any alleged damage caused by Contractor to another contractor’s work or
vice versa, Contractor shall negotiate in good faith with the other contractor to settle the
claim. Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless Owner from and against
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
19
Denver Public Schools
any Claims of damage to another contractor’s work to the extent of the negligence or fault
attributable to the acts or omissions of Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor,
anyone directly or indirectly employed or engaged by them or anyone for whose acts they
may be liable.
4.12.3 If any part of the Contractor’s Work depends upon the work of any other contractor, the
Contractor shall inspect and promptly (and in any event within two (2) days after
discovery) report to the Architect any defects in the other contractor’s work that render it
unsuitable for proper execution of the Work. Contractor’s failure so to inspect and report
shall constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper for the
reception of the Contractor’s Work, except as to latent defects that may become apparent
in the other contractor's work only after the execution of the Contractor’s Work. The
Contractor shall measure work already in place and shall immediately report to the
Architect any discrepancy between the executed work and the Contract Documents.
4.13
Quality Control. Contractor shall establish and maintain a quality control program specific to the
Project. Such program shall include a Project-specific quality control plan, regularly scheduled
meetings to discuss quality control issues and objectives, the submittal review and approval
processes required by the Contract Documents, appropriate testing and inspections, and
documentation and tracking systems appropriate to the Project. A proposed written program
shall be submitted to the Owner for review and approval before the commencement of the
Construction Work.
4.14
Issue Tracking. Contractor shall implement an effective system for recording and tracking
requests for clarification and instructions, submittals, approvals, information and other responses
from the Architect, Agreed Changes, Change Directives, Change Requests and other
communications that define or raise questions about the Work. At each weekly progress
meeting, Contractor shall identify and raise for discussion any open issues that may impact the
schedule or cost of the Project.
4.15
Self-Work. The Cost of Work shall, so long as the same conforms to all the requirements and
restrictions set forth herein, include the labor costs incurred by Contractor in performing SelfWork. No labor costs for Self-Work shall be permitted to the extent that (i) the same exceed the
lowest reasonable cost thereof which would be provided by capable and qualified Subcontractors
and/or (ii) such Self-Work fails to meet standards of quality available from capable and qualified
Subcontractors.
4.16
Project Manager and Superintendents. The person, if any, designated as the Contractor’s
Project Manager and other persons designated as key members of the Project Team on Exhibit A
to the Agreement shall be assigned exclusively to the Project until the Project (including the
Punch List) has been completed, except to the extent that assignment of such persons to other
projects is approved in writing by Owner. Contractor’s Project Manager shall have authority to act
on behalf of and bind the Contractor, and directions given to Contractor’s Project Manager shall
be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Contractor shall keep Contractor’s Project Manager
and necessary assistants, all of whom shall be satisfactory to Owner, on the Site at all times work
is being performed. The key members of the Project Team shall not be changed without Owner’s
prior written consent, except in the event of termination of such persons’ employment by
Contractor.
4.17
Federally Funded Projects. If Exhibit A to the Agreement indicates that any funds from United
States government sources are to be used to pay for the Project, Contractor shall be responsible
to comply with all Current Laws applicable thereto, including the Davis Bacon and Related Acts,
regulations promulgated thereunder, and all other laws applicable to federally-assisted
construction projects, including without limitation Title 29, Subtitle A, Part 5 of the Code of Federal
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
20
Denver Public Schools
Regulations. Certain provisions required by 29 C.F.R. § 5.5 are attached to the Agreement as
Exhibit J.
4.18
Extra Inspections. If Contractor notifies Owner that Substantial Completion, Final Completion, or
other milestones in the Milestone Schedule have been achieved but the Architect determines that
the required degree of completion has not been achieved, Contractor shall be responsible to
reimburse out of its own funds any fees or charges payable by Owner for later re-inspection of the
Work.
Article 5.
5.1
5.2
CHANGES IN THE WORK
Change Directive.
5.1.1
Owner may, without invalidating the Contract, direct a change in the Work and may state
a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum, Required Substantial
Completion Date, or Required Final Completion Date, or any combination of them, by a
“Change Directive.” Upon receipt of the Change Directive, Contractor shall promptly
proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise Owner of its disagreement, if
any, with the proposed adjustment of the Contract Sum, Required Substantial Completion
Date and Required Final Completion Date, if any.
5.1.2
A Change Directive signed by Contractor indicates the agreement of Contractor
therewith, including adjustment of the Contract Sum, Required Substantial Completion
Date or Required Final Completion Date, if such is proposed by Owner. Such agreement
shall be effective immediately and shall be an “Agreed Change,” which term, as used
herein, shall mean any change in the Work as to which Contractor and Owner have
agreed as any changes in the Contract Sum, the Required Substantial Completion Date
and the Required Final Completion Date. If no such agreement is reached, Contractor
shall give notice to Architect and Owner of its objection to the change, if any, in the
Contract Sum, Required Substantial Completion Date and/or Required Final Completion
Date proposed in the Change Directive within five (5) business days after receipt of the
Change Directive. If Contractor fails to give such notice within such time, Contractor shall
be deemed to have agreed to the proposal contained in the Change Directive, and the
Change Directive shall become an Agreed Change.
5.1.3
If Contractor timely objects to any adjustment of the Contract Sum, Required Substantial
Completion Date or Required Final Completion Date as a result of a Change Directive,
then, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Parties, the disagreement shall be a
Dispute and may be submitted to Dispute Resolution.
Proposed Changes.
5.2.1
Owner may, without issuing a Change Directive, issue a request for the effect of a
proposed change by a “Proposed Change.” Any Proposed Change shall be in the form
of a Change Directive, except that, instead of setting forth Owner’s proposal for the
change, if any, in the Contract Sum, Required Substantial Completion Date or Required
Final Completion Date, the same shall request a proposal from Contractor therefor.
5.2.2
Contractor shall, as quickly as is reasonably possible after Contractor’s receipt of the
Proposed Change, respond in writing to each Proposed Change with a statement
containing Contractor’s proposal for changes in the Contract Sum, Required Substantial
Completion Date or Required Final Completion Date on account of the change in the
Work proposed in the Proposed Change. Such statement shall set forth specifically the
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
21
Denver Public Schools
deadline by which Owner needs to approve such proposal for Contractor to proceed with
the Proposed Change without delaying the Work.
5.2.3
Following Contractor’s delivery of its proposal based on a Proposed Change, Owner
may:
5.2.3.1 decide not to make the change requested by the Proposed Change, in which
case no notice shall be required to be given to Contractor (and if Owner fails to
respond on or before the deadline specified in Contractor’s proposal, Owner shall
be deemed not to have accepted Contractor’s proposal),
5.2.3.2 agree in writing to Contractor’s proposal by notice given to Contractor on or
before the deadline set forth in Contractor’s proposal, in which case, the
Proposed Change, with any changes in the Contract Sum, Required Substantial
Completion Date or Required Final Completion Date determined in accordance
with Contractor’s proposal, shall become an Agreed Change, or
5.2.3.3 issue a Change Directive with respect to any part or all of the changes, in which
case the Change Directive shall be processed in the same manner as any other
Change Directive without consideration being given to Contractor’s proposal for
determining the Contract Sum, Required Substantial Completion Date and
Required Final Completion Date.
5.3
Changes not Requiring a Change Order. The Architect may order minor changes in the work,
not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Required Substantial
Completion Date or Required Final Completion Date and not inconsistent with the intent of the
Contract Documents, by notice to Owner and Contractor specifying the change proposed and
making reference to this Section 5.3. No such proposed change shall adversely affect the quality
or the value of the Work described in the Contract Documents, or provide for a substitution of
materials of an inferior quality to those specified in the Construction Documents. Owner may
object to such proposed change by notice given to Architect and Contractor on or before the end
of the fifth (5th) business day after Architect’s notice is received by Owner, in which case the
change shall be rejected and not implemented by Contractor. If Owner approves the change or
fails to object thereto within such time, such change shall become an Agreed Change.
5.4
Determination of the Cost or Savings Attributable to a Change Directive. Changes in the
Contract Sum resulting from a Change Directive shall be determined by agreement of Contractor
and Owner, acting reasonably, based on any or all of the following:
5.5
5.4.1
reasonable estimates,
5.4.2
unit prices, or
5.4.3
other reasonable method for determining reasonable expenditures and savings.
Change Pricing. All pricing information provided by Contractor in connection with a Change
Directive or Proposed Change shall include itemized amounts for at least the following categories
of costs (as applicable):
5.5.1
material quantities and unit prices by division;
5.5.2
labor costs based on stated estimated hours and hourly rates for each classification of
labor;
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
22
Denver Public Schools
5.5.3
field supervision costs;
5.5.4
costs of construction equipment;
5.5.5
insurance and bond premiums;
5.5.6
Social Security tax and other payroll and unemployment taxes; and
5.5.7
overhead and profit (based on the same percentage of Direct Hard Costs used to
compute the Construction Fee, or, if the Construction Fee is an agreed lump sum, based
on the same ratio that the originally agreed Construction Fee bears to the originally
scheduled Direct Hard Costs).
When both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the change in the Contractor
Fee (if the same is a percentage of the Direct Hard Costs) shall be figured on the basis of the net
increase or decrease, if any. In no event shall the combined amount of overhead and profit for
Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and Contractor with respect to any additive change exceed
fifteen percent (15%) of costs of labor and materials associated with the change that are payable
under the Contract.
5.6
Change Orders. Each month, as part of the Application for Payment, Contractor shall prepare a
“Change Order,” which shall be a summary of all Agreed Changes approved for such month, a
summary of the Agreed Changes, if any, in the Contract Sum and Required Substantial
Completion Date as a result of such changes. If, at the end of the month, any Change Directives
have been issued as to which the changes, if any, in the Contract Sum and Required Substantial
Completion Date have not been agreed to, the Application for Payment shall also include a list of
all of such Change Directives.
5.7
Tracking. The Architect shall assign tracking numbers to Proposed Changes, Change Directives
and Agreed Changes, and the Contractor shall assign tracking numbers to Change Orders, which
the parties shall use in all correspondence related thereto for ease of reference.
Article 6.
6.1
SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND PERSONNEL.
Terms of Subcontracts.
6.1.1
Those portions of the Work that are not Self-Work as permitted hereby shall be
performed under subcontracts or by other appropriate agreements with Contractor. By
appropriate written agreement, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent
of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to Contractor by terms of
the Contract Documents and to assume toward Contractor all the obligations and
responsibilities which Contractor, by the Contract Documents, assumes toward Owner.
Each subcontract agreement shall satisfy all requirements therefor contained in the
Contract Documents, shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner under the Contract
with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting
thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless
specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights,
remedies and redress against Contractor that Contractor, by the Contract Documents,
has against Owner.
6.1.2
Each subcontract agreement shall contain a clause that allows Contractor to terminate a
subcontract if the Subcontractor is added to the GSA Excluded Parties List Report during
performance of the Work. Where appropriate (for example, for significant
Subcontractors), Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
23
Denver Public Schools
agreements with Sub-subcontractors. Contractor shall make available to each proposed
Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the
Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound. Subcontractors shall
similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their
respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.
6.1.3
Each contract entered into by Contractor with any Subcontractor shall require that each
such Subcontractor include, in its respective contracts with any Sub-subcontractor, for
the benefit of Owner, payment documentation requirements substantially similar to those
set forth in the Contract Documents (including those providing for retainage, procedures
for submitting applications for payment, and payment procedures), as well as any other
provisions expressly stated in the Contract Documents to be included in each such
Subcontractor’s contracts with their respective Sub-subcontractors. Contractor shall
require Subcontractors to submit applications for payment to the Contractor in time for
the Contractor to submit its Application for Payment on the basis of such Subcontractors’
Work within the time required by the Contract Documents.
6.1.4
Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work and each contract for supplying
materials is assigned by Contractor to Owner; provided that the assignment is effective
only after termination of the Contract by Owner for cause and only for those agreements
which Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor or Supplier in writing at or after the
time of such termination. Each subcontract agreement with a Subcontractor or each
contractor with a supplier shall permit the subcontract agreement to be assigned to
Owner and shall obligate the Subcontractor to recognize any such assignment which
becomes effective and to render its performances thereunder to Owner after the
effectiveness of any such assignment and shall provide that Owner shall be responsible
to the Subcontractor only for those obligations of Contractor that accrue subsequent to
Owner’s exercise of any rights under this conditional assignment. Except as provided in
this paragraph, nothing in the Contract Documents shall be deemed to create any
contractual relationship whatsoever between any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor
and the Owner.
6.2
Equal Opportunity. Owner intends and expects that its contracting processes and the
contracting processes of its professional designers and consultants, contractors, and vendors,
including professional designers and consultants, shall provide equal opportunity without regard
to gender, race, ethnicity, religion, age, or disability, and that its vendors shall make available
equal opportunities to the extent third parties are engaged to provide goods and services to
Owner as contractors, subcontractors, consultants, vendors, or otherwise. Accordingly,
Contractor shall not discriminate on any of the foregoing grounds in the performance of the
contract, and shall make available equal opportunities to the extent third parties are engaged to
provide services in connection with performance of the contract. Joint ventures, partnerships, or
other cooperative relationships between contractors or vendors and MBE, WBE, SBE, and DBE
firms may be considered one indication of good faith intention to comply with this requirement.
Each contractor and vendor shall disseminate information regarding all subcontracting
opportunities under this contract in a manner reasonably calculated to reach all qualified potential
subcontractors who may be interested. Contractor shall comply with, and maintain records of its
compliance with, the provisions of Exhibit F to the Agreement with respect to equal opportunity
contracting and shall make such records available to the District upon the District’s request.
6.3
Discipline; Sufficiency of Skilled Workers; Removal. Contractor shall, at all times, enforce
strict discipline and good order among its employees and Subcontractors, and shall not employ or
engage any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him for any portion of the
Work. Contractor shall require that plumbers, pipefitters, and electricians have sufficient numbers
of journeymen workers on the site to maintain on the site a ratio of journeymen to apprentices of
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
24
Denver Public Schools
not less than one to two (1:2). Smoking, possession of weapons, possession and/or consumption
of alcoholic beverages and any other activities which are deleterious to Owner’s operations are
strictly prohibited. Discourteous or aggressive behavior toward staff, students or the general
public will not be tolerated. Owner may require by notice to Contractor that any worker that
Owner determines to be careless, incompetent, unskilled, or otherwise objectionable be
dismissed from work on the Project.
6.4
Colorado Labor. As required by C.R.S. § 8-17-101, Colorado Labor shall be employed to
perform the work to the extent of not less than eighty percent at each type or class of labor in the
several classifications of skilled and common labor employed on the Project.
Article 7.
INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION OF DEFECTS
7.1
Inspections. Owner, Architect and their representatives and consultants shall have reasonable
access to the Work during normal business hours and any non-business hours when construction
is scheduled to occur, and Contractor shall permit and facilitate inspection of the Work by Owner,
Architect, their representatives, and public authorities concerned with such Work.
7.3
Notice of Defect. If prior to Substantial Completion, Owner or Architect determines that the
Work is defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, Owner or Architect shall
give written notice to Contractor promptly (i.e. within five (5) business days) after discovering
such defect(s). Architect has authority to stop the Work whenever such stoppage may in
Architect’s judgment be necessary to insure the proper execution of the Work.
7.4
Warranty and Correction of Work During Construction.
7.4.1
Contractor warrants that all materials shall be new unless otherwise specified, and
specifically approved in writing by Owner in each instance, and all of the Work will be
performed in a good and workmanlike manner, free from faults and defects and in
conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not conforming to these standards,
including substitutions not allowed by the Contract Documents, will be considered
defective.
7.4.2
If required by Architect or Owner, and upon their written request therefor, Contractor shall
furnish reasonable evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment
supplied by Contractor pursuant to the Contract.
7.4.3
Architect and Owner shall have the authority to reject Work not conforming to the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall, upon the directive of the Architect, remove and
replace any non-conforming materials, at Contractor’s sole cost, without an adjustment in
the Contract Sum or the Required Substantial Completion Date.
7.4.4
Contractor shall remove from the Site portions of the Work which are not in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by Contractor
nor accepted by Owner. Contractor shall, if required by Owner, furnish evidence
reasonably satisfactory to Owner as to the kind and quality of materials. No materials
shall be substituted for those specified except by Agreed Change. Where standards,
publications or other specifications of technical societies or testing organizations are
identified in the Contract Documents, the latest revisions of the same as of the date of the
Request for Proposals or bid opening shall govern unless indicated otherwise. No
materials shall be substituted for those specified except by Agreed Change.
7.4.5
Contractor shall be responsible to correct, at its cost, any damage to other contractors’
work resulting from the uncovering or correction of defects in the Work.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
25
Denver Public Schools
7.5
Uncovering Work. The Work may be covered by Contractor as the Work progresses in
accordance with the Milestone Schedule, Contract Documents and the Project Schedule. If a
portion of the Work is covered contrary to Architect’s written request delivered to Contractor or
contrary to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in
writing by Architect or Owner, be uncovered for Architect’s and/or Owner’s observation and be
replaced at Contractor’s expense without change in the Required Substantial Completion Date,
Required Final Completion Date or the Contract Sum. If a portion of the Work has been covered
in accordance with the Milestone Schedule, Contract Documents and the Project Schedule which
Architect and Owner have not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered,
Architect or Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by Contractor. If the
Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall,
by appropriate Agreed Change, be charged to Owner, and the time required to uncover and
recover such Work shall be an Owner Delay (but only to the extent of that such activities cause
actual delay in the Work that satisfies all the requirements necessary to be an Owner Delay under
Section 3.4.1). If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall
pay such costs unless the condition was caused by Owner in which event Owner shall be
responsible for payment of such costs and the time lost in uncovering and recovering the Work
shall not be an Owner Delay, and there shall be no change in the Required Substantial
Completion Date.
7.6
Failure to Correct Defect. If Contractor fails to correct defective or nonconforming Work in
accordance with the above provisions, Owner may correct it, and an Agreed Change will be
issued reducing the Contract Sum by 125% of Owner’s out-of-pocket cost of correcting the Work.
In the alternative, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, or may
deduct 125% of the value thereof from Contractor’s Applications for Payment, until Contractor
corrects the defective or nonconforming Work as provided above.
7.7
Acceptance of Defective Work. If Owner prefers to accept defective or nonconforming Work, it
may do so in writing within ten (10) business days of the date it is discovered by Owner instead of
requiring its removal and/or correction. In that event, Contractor and Owner shall execute an
Agreed Change providing for an equitable reduction in the Contract Sum; or, if the amount is
determined after Final Payment, Contractor shall pay the amount of such equitable reduction to
Owner. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on the amount of such reduction of the
Contract Sum within ten (10) business days after Owner determines not to replace the defective
Work, the amount of such reduction shall be a Dispute and may be submitted to Dispute
Resolution by either party.
Article 8.
8.1
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
General Requirement.
8.1.1
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of its employees and those
of its Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors (and any personnel of Suppliers or others
on the Site) in connection with the Work, and shall comply with Current Laws regarding
worker health and safety and the prevention of accidents or injury to persons on or about
the Site (including the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 as amended, the
standards issued by the Secretary of Labor at 29 CFR Part 1926 and 29 CFR Part 1910
as amended, safety laws of the State of Colorado, and other safety laws and regulations).
8.1.2
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for safety of and shall provide reasonable
protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to (a) persons on or about the Site, (b) the
Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, and (c) other property at
the site or adjacent thereto such as, trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways,
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
26
Denver Public Schools
structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the
course of the performance of the Work.
8.1.3
Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times reasonable safeguards and
signage for the protection of workers and the public as required by the conditions and
progress of the Work. As between Contractor and Owner, Contractor shall be
responsible for initiating, maintaining, supervising and enforcing all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor's office on
the Site shall be equipped at all times with articles necessary for giving first aid in the
event of injury and illness. Contractor shall have standing arrangements for the
immediate removal and hospital treatment of any person who may be injured or who may
have become ill on the job.
8.1.4
Contractor shall notify Owner of any work related injuries that result in “loss of work days”
or require medical attention suffered by any employees of Contractor and any
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors (including any personnel of Suppliers or others
on the Site) within twenty four (24) hours of the occurrence of such injury, including a
written report of how the injury occurred and what, if any, corrective actions have been
implemented to prevent similar accidents from occurring on the Site in the future.
8.2
Underground Facilities. Contractor shall physically verify the location of all buried utilities within
twenty-five (25) feet of any excavation area before beginning excavation Work. The location of
such utilities shall be recorded by a registered professional land surveyor and a map showing the
precise locations of such utilities shall be provided to Architect and Owner in electronic (AutoDesk
DWG) format. Contractor shall provide such information to its Subcontractors and personnel
engaged in excavation work and shall be responsible to protect all such utilities from damage.
8.3
Public Ways. Contractor shall take all appropriate precautions when obstructing or partially
obstructing sidewalks, streets or other public ways, shall provide, erect and maintain barricades,
temporary walkways, roadways, trench covers, colored lights or danger signals and any other
devices necessary to assure the safe passage of pedestrians and automobiles, and shall obtain
all required permits for such obstructions and safety structures.
8.4
Safety Equipment. The Contractor shall provide all safety equipment necessary for Owner and
Owner’s consultants to inspect the Work in a safe manner, including harnesses, tie-offs and other
special equipment that may be necessary for safe access to and observation of the Work.
8.5
Site Security. Contractor shall take all appropriate measures to protect the Site, persons and
materials stored thereon from theft, vandalism and other intrusion or harassment and shall
comply with any standards, policies or directives of Owner with respect thereto, including:
8.5.1
Contractor shall not utilize any laborer, employee or subcontractor who has been
convicted of a violent or sexual crime, crime involving a minor, or any other crime of such
nature;
8.5.2
Contractor, its laborers, employees or subcontractors, shall not fraternize or otherwise
communicate with students except in cases of safety and/or emergencies;
8.5.3
Contractor shall not allow any laborer, employee or subcontractor to wear clothing that is
inappropriate for students to view (“Objectionable Clothing”) and ensure that its laborers,
employees and subcontractors maintain professional workmanlike attire. Owner, or its
on-site personnel, shall determine, in its sole judgment, whether clothing is Objectionable
Clothing;
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
27
Denver Public Schools
8.6
8.5.4
Contractor shall ensure that its laborers, employees and subcontractors do not use or
have in their possession any controlled substances on the Site including tobacco,
alcohol, and illegal drugs; and
8.5.5
Contractor shall ensure that its laborers, employees and subcontractors do not possess
any weapon.
Notice Requirements.
8.6.1
Whenever Owner’s personnel becomes aware of any noncompliance with these
requirements under this Article 8 or any condition which poses a serious or imminent
danger to the health or safety of the public, Owner’s staff or students, or other worksite
personnel, Owner’s Project Manager shall notify the Contractor orally, with follow up
written confirmation, and request immediate corrective action.
8.6.2
Notice delivered to Contractor or Contractor’s representative at the Site, either orally or in
written form, in accordance with Section 8.6.1 shall be deemed sufficient notice of the
noncompliance and that corrective action is required. After receiving such notice,
Contractor shall immediately take all appropriate corrective action to eliminate the
hazard.
8.6.3
If Contractor fails or refuses to promptly take proper corrective action, Owner may issue
an order stopping all or part of the Work until satisfactory corrective action has been
taken, and Contractor shall immediately comply with any such order. Owner’s failure to
issue such an order shall not relieve Contractor of the obligation to stop Work if
necessary to properly correct a hazard. Contractor shall not be entitled to any equitable
adjustment to the Contract Sum, Required Substantial Completion Date or Required Final
Completion Date on account of any order to stop Work issued under this Article. The
cure periods provided for Events of Default in Section 14.1 shall not be construed to limit
the Owner’s right to stop the Work in accordance with this paragraph.
Article 9.
PERMITS AND LICENSES; COMPLIANCE WITH CURRENT LAWS
9.1
Permits. Before commencing Construction Work, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all building
permits, applications, licenses and inspections required by the AHJ and any other government
agency with jurisdiction for the prosecution of the Work, including any applicable state mechanical
and electrical permits and City and County of Denver hotwork permits. Contractor shall pay all
applicable State of Colorado Electrical, Plumbing and Boiler Inspection fees. Without limiting the
generality of the foregoing sentence, Contractor shall, at its cost, obtain all required permits and
pay all building permit fees, water department system development fees, wastewater
management fees, sewer availability and metropolitan district fees, mechanical, electrical,
plumbing and boiler permit and inspection fees.
9.2
Licensed Trades. All Work shall be performed by licensed workers where such licenses are
required by law, including state-licensed plumbing and electrical trades and Denver Fire
Department licensed fire safety systems installers. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to
investigate whether licensing is required for the performance of a particular part of the Work. Fire
safety systems requiring licensing may include Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems, Fire Alarm and
Detection Systems, Special extinguishing systems (wet/dry chemical systems), Portable Fire
Extinguishers, Fire Pumps, Emergency Generators, Emergency Communications Systems and
Radio Signal Enhancement Systems.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
28
Denver Public Schools
9.3
Licensed Supervision. In the event Current Laws require that the Work or any part thereof be
supervised by a licensed supervisor, the Contractor shall provide a licensed on-Site supervisor to
supervise the execution of the Work or such part thereof, as applicable.
9.4
Worker Status. The Contractor shall certify the status of its and its Subcontractors’ workers as
provided herein.
9.4.1
All Contractors: Contractor agrees to the following terms and shall submit certification
thereof from time to time as required by Owner:
9.4.1.1 Contractor certifies that it has complied with and shall during any Work continue
to comply with the provisions of C.R.S. § 8-17.5-101, et seq. As further provided
in that statute, Contractor shall not knowingly employ or contract with an illegal
alien to perform work under the Contract or enter into a contract with a
Subcontractor that fails to certify to Contractor that the Subcontractor shall not
knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien to perform work under the
Contract.
9.4.1.2 Contractor represents, warrants, and agrees that Contractor:(i) through
participation in the “E-Verify” Program administered by the Social Security
Administration and Department of Homeland Security, has verified that it does
not employ any illegal aliens; and (ii) otherwise will comply with the requirements
of C.R.S. § 8-17.5-102(2)(b). Without limiting the generality of the foregoing
provisions:
(a) Contractor represents and warrants that it has confirmed the employment
eligibility of all employees who are newly hired for employment to perform
any part of the Work through either the “E-Verify” program or the Colorado
Department of Labor and Employment; and
(b) Contractor shall not use either the “E-Verify” program or the Colorado
Department of Labor and Employment program procedures to undertake
preemployment screening of job applicants while performing Work.
9.4.1.3 If Contractor obtains actual knowledge that a Subcontractor performing Work
knowingly employs or contracts with an illegal alien, Contractor shall:
(a) Notify the Subcontractor and Owner within three (3) days that the Contractor
has actual knowledge that the Subcontractor is employing or contracting with
an illegal alien; and
(b) Terminate the subcontract with the subcontractor if within three (3) days of
receiving such notice the Subcontractor does not stop employing or
contracting with the illegal alien; except that the Contractor shall not
terminate the contract with the Subcontractor if during such three (3) days
the Subcontractor provides information to establish that the Subcontractor
has not knowingly employed or contracted with an illegal alien.
9.4.1.4 Contractor shall cause each Subcontractor and all Sub-subcontractors to provide
to Contractor the certifications required by Section 9.4.1.1 above and to comply
with the provisions of Sections 9.4.1.2 through 9.4.1.5.
9.4.1.5 Contractor shall comply with all reasonable requests made in the course of an
investigation under C.R.S. § 8-17.5-102 by the Colorado Department of Labor
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
29
Denver Public Schools
and Employment. Contractor shall fully cooperate with any investigation to
determine if Contractor is in compliance with the provisions of C.R.S. § 8-17.5101 et seq., which may include on-site inspections, reviewing proof of citizenship
documentation of any person participating in the Work, or any other reasonable
and necessary measures to determine the Contractor’s compliance with such
law.
9.4.1.6 In the event of a violation of the provisions of this Section 9.4 by Contractor, in
addition to any other remedies Owner may have under the Contract, at law or in
equity, Owner shall be entitled to terminate the Contract and/or recover from
Contractor all of its direct and consequential damages resulting from such
violation, including without limitation all costs, attorneys’ fees, fines, penalties,
and other losses incurred by Owner in connection with such violation.
9.4.2
Sole Proprietorships: If Contractor is a sole proprietor or individual, Contractor agrees to
the following terms and shall execute a sworn or affirmed affidavit thereof from time to
time as required by Owner:
I, [Contractor] as a sole proprietor/individual, hereby swear and affirm under
penalty of perjury that I am [the Contractor] (i) a citizen of, or otherwise lawfully
present in the United States pursuant to federal law, and the provisions of CRS
§ 24-76.5-101 et seq, (ii) and as proof have submitted one of the required forms
of identification before the commencement of any work on this contract; and (iii)
have or have attempted to verified that my Subcontractor(s), employee(s), and
applicant(s) who is/(are) natural person eighteen years of age or older is/(are)
lawfully present in the United States pursuant to CRS § 24-76.5-103(4).
If Contractor is an individual or sole proprietor, Contractor shall also produce for review
and copying by Owner one of the following forms of identification before performing any
Work: (i) a valid Colorado driver's license or a Colorado identification card; (ii) United
States military card; (iii) a United States Coast Guard Merchant Mariner card; or (iv) a
Native American tribal identification document.
9.5
General Compliance With Current Laws. Contractor shall comply with, and the Work shall
conform to, all Current Laws. If Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at
variance with Current Laws in any respect, it shall promptly notify Architect and Owner in writing,
and any necessary changes shall be adjusted by appropriate modification of the Contract
Documents. If, during the performance of the Contract by Contractor, Contractor becomes aware
of any change in Current Laws that are directly applicable to the Work from those in force as of
the date hereof, Contractor shall give Architect and Owner written notice of such change promptly
after Contractor becomes aware of the promulgation of such new law or regulation or
interpretation thereof. Such notice shall include Contractor’s estimate of the impact (if any) of
such change on the Contract Sum, Required Substantial Completion Date and Required Final
Completion Date. An Agreed Change reflecting any such impact, including an increase or
decrease in the Contract Sum, if applicable, shall be made to account therefor. If Contractor
performs any Work under any circumstances where it knew or should have known that such Work
failed to comply with any Current Laws and failed to give notice thereof to Architect and Owner,
Contractor shall correct such Work at its cost or pay Owner for the correction thereof.
Article 10.
10.1
BONDS
Required Bond or Bonds. The Contractor shall furnish a contractor's performance and payment
bond on forms supplied by the Owner, executed by a corporate bonding company licensed to
transact such business in the State of Colorado and acceptable to the Owner, in the full amount
of the Contract Sum (or, if the Agreement is a CMGC Agreement, the Guaranteed Maximum
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
30
Denver Public Schools
Price). The bond shall contain terms that comply with all the requirements of C.R.S. § 38-26-105
and -106 and any greater requirements imposed by this Contract. If at any time a surety on such
a bond becomes irresponsible or loses its right to do business in the State of Colorado, the
Owner may require another surety acceptable to the Owner, which the Contractor shall furnish
within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice to do so. The term of the performance bond
shall commence on the effective date of the Contract and shall not be withdrawn until the end of
the Warranty Period as specified herein unless the Owner, in its sole and absolute discretion,
approves the substitution of a warranty bond during the Warranty Period.
Article 11.
WARRANTY
11.1
Correction of Defective Work on Building and Infrastructure. If, within the Warranty Period,
any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents or is found to be defective in workmanship or materials, Contractor shall correct it
promptly after receipt of written notice from Architect or Owner to do so unless Owner has
previously expressly accepted such condition in writing. Deficiencies which impair the safety or
habitability of a building shall be considered emergencies, and work to correct the same shall be
commenced immediately upon notification of the deficiency and promptly, continuously and
diligently pursued to completion. As used herein, (“Warranty Period”) shall mean the period of
twenty-four (24) months after the date of Final Completion of the Work, as extended by terms of
any longer applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents.
11.2
Warranty Inspections. Contractor, Owner and Architect shall make at least three (3) complete
inspections of the Work after Final Completion. One such inspection shall be made
approximately three (3) months after Final Completion of the Work, the second at twelve (12)
months and the third at twenty-three (23) months after Final Completion. Contractor shall be
responsible to coordinate such inspections. At each such inspection, Contractor and Architect
shall thoroughly examine the Work to confirm that all portions thereof are in accordance with the
Construction Documents.
11.3
Public Improvements. If the Work includes any public improvements, Contractor shall correct
all such portions of the Work which are found to be defective as required by the applicable
governmental authorities for the acceptance into maintenance of such public improvements by
such governmental authorities until the same have been accepted into maintenance by the
applicable governmental authority and Owner has been released from responsibility for correcting
defects or repairing damage to such public improvements; provided, however, that Contractor
shall not be responsible for any damage thereto caused by the operations of Owner or its
successors.
11.4
Self-Help. If Contractor does not proceed with correction of nonconforming Work within a
reasonable time after written notification from Architect or Owner, and in any event within fourteen
(14) days (unless Owner in writing approves a longer period of time), Owner may correct it,
including the removal and disposition of any portion thereof which Owner replaces in connection
with such correction. Owner may dispose of any salvable portion of such removed materials in
any manner Owner determines; provided that any proceeds from the disposition thereof shall be
credited to Contractor’s obligations under this Section. Contractor shall promptly pay to Owner
one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of Owner’s out-of-pocket costs of correcting such Work.
11.5
Longer Warranties. Extended warranties for such longer period(s) of time as may be prescribed
by the terms of any applicable special guarantee(s) required by the Contract Documents shall be
provided by the applicable manufacturer, vendor, or Subcontractor as required by the Contract
Documents. Owner shall be required to perform routine and appropriate regular maintenance
during the Warranty Period.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
31
Denver Public Schools
11.6
No Limitations Created. Nothing contained in this Article 11 shall be construed to establish a
period of limitation with respect to other obligations which Contractor might have under the
Contract Documents. Establishment of the time periods specifically provided in this Article shall
relate only to the obligations of Contractor specifically provided in this Article and shall have no
relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be
sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish
Contractor’s liability with respect to Contractor’s obligations other than as specifically provided in
this Article.
11.7
Survival. The obligations of Contractor under this Article 11 shall survive acceptance of the
Work under the Contract and termination of the Contract.
Article 12.
12.1
INSURANCE; RISK OF LOSS
Contractor’s Insurance – CGL, Auto, Workers’ Compensation, Property. Contractor shall
maintain in force during the performance of all Work and all warranty work under the Contract the
following insurance coverages:
12.1.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance, written on an “occurrence” form and not a
“modified occurrence” or “claims made” form, covering bodily injury, property damage
and personal injury with a limit of liability not less than $1,000,000 combined single limit
per occurrence and $2,000,000 general aggregate. The aggregate limit of liability is to
apply separately to the Contract. Such insurance coverage shall include (a) premises
and operations, (b) products/completed operations, and (c) explosion, collapse and
underground (XCU). All such coverage shall extend to all operations by or on behalf of
Contractor (including those of any Subcontractor). Such policy shall provide that costs of
defense are covered in addition to and not as part of the limits of liability.
12.1.2 Business automobile liability coverage for liability arising from any automobile (including
owned, hired, and non-owned automobiles) with minimum limits of $1,000,000 combined
single limit each accident.
12.1.3 Workers’ compensation insurance with at least the coverages and limits required by state
law and including occupational disease coverage, and employer’s liability insurance with
minimum limits of $1,000,000 bodily injury for each accident, $1,000,000 per employee
for disease, and $1,000,000 disease aggregate.
12.1.4 Property insurance covering the full replacement cost of any property of Contractor that
may be used in connection with the Work, including without limitation any property that
may be brought on the Site.
12.1.5 Each Commercial General Liability policy and automobile liability policy shall include an
Additional Insured Endorsement issued to all of the Owner Parties, with such additional
insured coverage provided on a primary and non-contributory basis. The Additional
Insured Endorsement to the Commercial General Liability policy shall include completed
operations coverage.
12.1.6 Each policy carried by Contractor and its Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors shall
include a waiver of subrogation endorsement for the benefit of Owner Parties.
12.1.7 Umbrella or Excess Following Form Insurance with limits of liability not less than those
provided on Exhibit A to the Agreement, providing excess commercial general liability,
auto liability and employer’s liability. Such umbrella or excess policy shall be endorsed to
name the Owner Parties as additional insured on a primary and non-contributory basis.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
32
Denver Public Schools
12.2
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors. Unless otherwise agreed in writing by Owner,
Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to maintain the same insurance coverages to be
provided under Section 12.1 above except as to umbrella and excess liability coverage. Each
liability policy the Contract Documents require to be carried by Contractor shall include coverage
for liability arising out of the activities of Contractor’s Subcontractors in the scope of their
engagement as Subcontractors.
12.3
Builder’s Risk.
12.3.1 Unless Owner elects at its sole option to obtain builder’s risk insurance for the Project,
Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance on the entire Work for the
full insurable replacement cost of the Work, on a completed value basis, with permissible
deduction of the cost of excavations, foundations below the lowest basement floor,
underground flues, underground pipes, underground wiring, sidewalk, driveways, curbs
and gutters, street improvements, and fences. Such coverage shall be in force before
the commencement of Construction Work and shall remain in effect until Final
Completion of the Project and include permission to occupy the Site. The builder’s risk
policy shall not include a coinsurance clause, and any deductible amounts under such
insurance policy shall be the responsibility of Contractor. Such insurance shall insure
against “all risk” of physical loss or damage including coverage for theft, vandalism,
malicious mischief, collapse, debris removal (including demolition occasioned by
enforcement of any applicable legal requirements), loss resulting from faulty
workmanship, faulty materials or error in design, and offsite storage and transit
exposures, and shall also cover reasonable compensation for any plans and
specifications, services, and expenses required because of such insured loss.
12.3.2 The builder’s risk policy shall name the Owner as the Insured, and any loss shall be
payable to the Owner, as trustee, except to the extent that it may be necessary to permit
payment of all or a portion of such insurance to a lessor or mortgagee as its interests
may appear. Insurance for loss caused by flood, surface waters, and earthquake shall
not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
12.3.3 Contractor shall provide Owner copies of documents evidencing the cost to Contractor of
the insurance required by this Section 12.3. Owner may, at its option, directly obtain the
insurance required by this Section 12.3, in which event (i) Contractor shall be named as
an additional insured under such policy and (ii) if the Contract Sum included
reimbursement of the costs of such coverage, it shall be reduced by the amount the
Contractor would have had to pay for such coverage.
12.3.4 If Owner engages separate contractors to perform work in the Building, Owner may
require the value of such third-party work to be included in the coverage under the
builder’s risk policy; provided, however, that Owner shall be responsible to reimburse
Contractor for the incremental costs of such additional coverage and such reimbursement
shall not be credited against the Contract Sum.
12.4
Pollution Coverage. If requested by Owner, Contractor shall purchase and maintain contractor’s
pollution liability coverage covering third-party injury and property damage claims, including
cleanup costs incurred as a result of pollution conditions arising from Contractor’s operations and
completed operations. Such completed operations coverage shall remain in effect for no less
than three (3) years following Final Completion. Such policy shall be in force and have an
effective date before the commencement of Construction Work. The Owner Parties shall be
named as an additional insured under such policy. The limits of such pollution liability coverage
shall be at least $1,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate, unless Exhibit A to the
Agreement provides for higher limits. If Owner requests that Contractor carry such insurance, the
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
33
Denver Public Schools
costs thereof shall be included in Soft Costs and the Contract Sum shall be increased if
necessary to include such costs.
12.5
Certificates of Insurance. A certificate of insurance reasonably satisfactory to Owner
evidencing each policy to be maintained by Contractor pursuant to this Article or, at Owner’s
request, a copy of each such policy shall be delivered to Owner before the commencement of
Work. Such certificates shall provide that such insurance will not be cancelled without thirty (30)
days prior written notice to Owner (ten (10) days in the event of non-payment of premiums).
Contractor shall provide certificates of insurance evidencing replacement or renewal policies that
conform to the requirements of this Section 12.5 at least fifteen (15) days before Contractor’s
then existing policies expire and from time to time upon request of Owner. Upon request,
Contractor shall provide Owner complete copies of the insurance policies required by the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall obtain certificates of insurance and monitor policies of
insurance maintained by Subcontractors as is necessary to assure that Subcontractors all carry
the insurance required hereby.
12.6
Additional Insured Endorsements. All “additional insured” coverage required under the
Contract Documents shall be evidenced by proper endorsements to the respective policies of
insurance. Identification of a party as “additional insured” on a certificate of insurance shall not
satisfy Contractor’s obligations to obtain such endorsements and furnish the same to Owner.
12.7
Other General Requirements.
12.7.1 Each of the policies of insurance required by the Contract Documents shall, in addition to
the provisions specifically required herein, include the minimum coverages, terms and
conditions of Insurance Services Office forms of policies and endorsements.
12.7.2 All insurance policies required by this Article 12 shall be written by companies licensed to
write insurance in Colorado with an A.M. Best rating of at least A-/VIII and otherwise
reasonably satisfactory to Owner.
12.7.3 All insurance coverage carried by Contractor shall be primary, and any insurance
coverage carried by Owner Parties shall be only excess coverage.
12.8
Failure to Insure. In the event Contractor or any Subcontractor fails to maintain any insurance
required by this Article 7, such failure shall be a default of the Contract, and, in addition to
Owner’s other remedies under the Contract, at law or in equity, Owner may procure such
additional insurance for the benefit of itself and/or Contractor as Owner reasonably deems
necessary to protect its interests and Contractor shall be liable to reimburse Owner for one
hundred fifteen percent (115%) of its costs of such insurance.
12.9
Waiver of Subrogation. Owner waives all rights against Contractor and its Subcontractors,
agents and employees, and Contractor waives all rights against the Owner Parties, for damages
caused by perils covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to the Contract or other
applicable property insurance to the extent of such coverage, except such rights as they have to
proceeds of such insurance. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors to provide similar
waivers in writing each in favor of all other parties identified in this Section 12.9. Owner and
Contractor shall cause their respective insurers to waive all rights of subrogation, and the policies
shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement if an endorsement is required.
Article 13.
13.1
INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor’s Indemnification. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner Parties
from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
34
Denver Public Schools
and costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work (collectively and individually,
“Claims”), provided, however, that Contractor shall be obligated to indemnify and defend Owner
Parties from and against Claims arising out of death or bodily injury to persons or damage to
property only to the extent of the degree or percentage of negligence or fault attributable to the
acts or omissions of Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, anyone directly or
indirectly employed or engaged by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. Such
obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights to obligations
otherwise undertaken by Contractor pursuant to the terms of this Contract. In the event that any
term or provision of this paragraph is void under applicable law, the terms and provisions of this
paragraph shall be limited to the extent necessary to render this paragraph valid, and as so
limited, the terms and provisions of this paragraph shall be given full force and effect.
13.2
Limitations Not Applicable. In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Article
13 by an employee of Contractor, a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly
or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification
obligation under this Article 13 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, or
Supplier under worker’s or workmen’s compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other
employee benefit acts.
13.3
Employee Benefits. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend
(with counsel acceptable to Owner) and hold harmless the Owner Parties from any Claims with
respect to any Employee Benefits for the benefit of Contractor and/or any of its employees,
Subconsultants, agents, or anyone else acting on behalf of or at the request of the Contractor,
that may be asserted against or imposed on the Owner Parties (except to the extent such Claims
arise from a separate direct relationship between the claimant and an Owner Party unrelated to
the Services or the Contract). Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for any award, judgment or
fine against the Owner based on any claim that has as an element the proposition that Contractor
or any of its employees, Subconsultants, agents, or anyone else acting on behalf of or at the
request of the Contractor became entitled to Employee Benefits by virtue of activities undertaken
in connection with the provision of Services under the Contract.
Article 14.
14.1
DEFAULTS, REMEDIES AND TERMINATION
Default by Contractor. Time is of the essence of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract.
Contractor shall be in default under the Contract upon the occurrence of any of the following:
14.1.1 Contractor fails, except in cases of Excused Delay, to commence the Work in accordance
with the Milestone Schedule.
14.1.2 Contractor fails, except in cases of Excused Delay, to make progress on the Work
substantially in accordance with the Milestone Schedule.
14.1.3 Contractor fails, except in cases of Excused Delay, to prosecute the Work to Substantial
Completion and Final Completion in a diligent, efficient, workmanlike, skillful, and careful
manner in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents.
14.1.4 Contractor fails, except in cases of Excused Delay, to supply an adequate amount of
properly skilled workers, materials, or equipment to complete the Work in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
14.1.5 Contractor ceases or suspends Work other than in accordance with the express terms of
the Contract Documents.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
35
Denver Public Schools
14.1.6 Contractor fails to make payment to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or others in accordance
with Contractor’s agreements with such parties or the provisions of the Contract
Documents, whichever is more stringent.
14.1.7 Contractor fails to comply with any Current Laws.
14.1.8 Contractor fails to comply with any other material or substantial provision of the Contract
Documents.
If a default continues uncured for seventy-two hours (or as otherwise agreed to by Owner in
writing) after Owner gives notice of such default to Contractor, such failure to cure shall be
deemed an “Event of Default” entitling Owner to exercise its remedies provided in Section 14.2
below. In addition, if Contractor becomes insolvent, makes an assignment for the benefit of
creditors, or becomes the subject of a bankruptcy proceeding (unless the same is an involuntary
proceeding against Contractor and is dismissed within forty-five (45) days after it has been
commenced), the same shall also be an Event of Default.
14.2
Owner’s Remedies.
14.2.1 Upon the occurrence of an Event of Default, Owner may, in addition to any other remedy
which may be provided in the Contract Documents or which is otherwise available at law
or in equity, terminate the engagement of Contractor made under the Contract and may
(i) take possession of the Site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction
equipment and machinery thereon owned by Contractor; (ii) accept assignment of such
subcontracts and contracts with Supplier as Owner may from time to time elect; and
(iii) finish the Work by whatever reasonable method Owner may deem expedient. Any
such act by Owner shall not be deemed a waiver of any right or remedy of Owner, and
Owner shall have all rights and remedies available at law or in equity.
14.2.2 If after exercising any such remedy, the reasonable cost to Owner of the performance of
the balance of the Work is in excess of that part of the Contract Sum that has not
theretofore been paid to Contractor hereunder, Contractor shall be liable for and shall
reimburse Owner for such excess within thirty (30) days of its receipt from Owner of an
invoice detailing such excess cost.
14.2.3 If Owner terminates the Contract as permitted by this Section 14.2, Contractor shall not
be entitled to receive any further payment hereunder; provided that, if Owner is able to
have the Project finished for less than the Contract Sum, Owner shall pay to Contractor
the amount, if any, necessary to pay Subcontractors of Contractor for the Work they
performed in a satisfactory manner prior to such termination, but only to the extent that
such payment will not cause Owner to have expended, for all costs of the Project, an
amount in excess of the Contract Sum.
14.2.4 The remedies provided to Owner pursuant to this Article shall be in addition to all other
remedies of any kind and nature which Owner may have, either at law or in equity, for
any breach hereof or failure to perform by Contractor, including the liquidated damages
provided herein. All remedies of Owner shall be cumulative, and the exercise of one or
more remedies by Owner hereunder shall not preclude the simultaneous exercise or
subsequent exercise of other or additional remedies.
14.3
Default by Owner. Time is of the essence in Owner’s performance of its obligations to
Contractor hereunder. Owner shall be in default of its obligations under the Contract upon the
occurrence of any of the following:
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
36
Denver Public Schools
14.3.1 Failure to pay Contractor any Progress Payment when it is due (not including any
payment or portion thereof to which Owner has timely made objection in the manner
provided in the Contract Documents).
14.3.2 Failure to perform any other material obligation under the Contract Documents in the time
permitted thereby.
Owner’s failure to cure any such default within thirty (30) days after receiving written notice
thereof from Contractor with respect to a non-monetary default (or so long thereafter as Owner is
using commercially reasonable efforts to cure such default) or within fifteen (15) business days
after receiving notice from Contractor of failure to make a Progress Payment (not including any
payment or portion thereof to which Owner has timely made objection in the manner provided in
the General Conditions of the Contract) shall be an Event of Default by Owner.
14.4
Contractor’s Remedies. In the event that an Event of Default by Owner occurs and is then
continuing, (i) Contractor may cease all or any portion of the Work, and Owner shall be
responsible for all increased costs arising out of such delay, which delay shall be an Owner
Delay, but only to the extent that the Work is actually delayed as is necessary to be an Owner
Delay under Section 13.2 of the General Conditions of the Contract or (ii) in the alternative,
Contractor may terminate the Contract, remove any materials, equipment, and tools from the Site,
and recover from Owner payment for all Work executed and any loss or damage sustained by
Contractor by reason of the termination; provided that in no event shall Contractor be entitled to
recover from Owner more than the remainder obtained when the (a) sum of (i) the costs of
completing the Work Contractor avoids by the termination plus (ii) the amounts already paid by
Owner to Contractor hereunder are subtracted from (b) the Contract Sum.
14.5
Attorneys’ Fees. In the event any dispute related to the Contract is made the subject of
litigation, the party prevailing on the more substantial part of its claims and defenses in such
litigation shall be entitled to recover its attorneys’ fees and costs reasonably incurred in
connection with such litigation.
14.6
Suspension by Owner for Convenience. Owner may, without cause, order Contractor in
writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as
Owner may determine. An equitable adjustment by Agreed Change shall be made for increases
in the Contract Sum, Required Substantial Completion Date and Required Final Completion Date
on account of any such suspension, delay or interruption. If the suspension of the Work by
Owner for convenience exceeds ninety (90) days, Contractor may terminate the Contract, and
Owner shall pay Contractor in accordance with the provisions of Section 14.7. During any period
of suspension, Contractor shall store all materials to prevent them from becoming damaged in
any way or becoming an obstruction, and shall take all appropriate precautions to prevent
damage to or deterioration of the Work, provide suitable drainage and erect temporary structures
where necessary, provided that Contractor shall first notify the Owner and Architect of the
measures the Contractor proposes to take and the anticipated costs thereof.
14.7
Termination by Owner Without Cause. For purposes hereof, “Commencement of
Construction” shall be deemed to have occurred on the earliest of (i) date on which Contractor,
with the consent of Owner, moves the first equipment onto the Site, (ii) the date on which
Contractor, with the consent of Owner, makes an order for materials that cannot be canceled
without payment of a cancellation fee, loss or deposit, or similar cost, or (iii) otherwise, with the
consent of Owner, takes action to commence construction that cannot be terminated without cost.
14.7.1 Prior to Commencement of Construction. If the Agreement is a CMGC Agreement,
Owner may at any time prior to Commencement of Construction, at will and without
cause, terminate the Contract by notice to Contractor. In the event of such termination,
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
37
Denver Public Schools
Contractor shall immediately stop the Pre-Construction Work, and, to the extent Owner
has not already paid such amounts to Contractor, Owner shall pay Contractor the portion
of the Pre-Construction Fee applicable to Pre-Construction Work already performed,
including an equitable portion of the installment of the Pre-Construction Fee applicable to
the then-current Design Phase based on the proportion of the Pre-Construction Work for
that Design Phase (including consultations) that has been completed.
14.7.2 After Commencement of Construction.
14.7.2.1
Owner may, at any time on or after Commencement of Construction, at
will and without cause, terminate all or any part of the Work and any subcontract
or any contract with a Supplier pertaining to the same by giving written notice to
Contractor specifying the part of the Work or subcontract or any contract with a
supplier to be terminated and the effective date of the termination. In case of a
termination of a portion of the Work, Owner will execute an Agreed Change
making any required adjustment to the Required Substantial Completion Date,
Required Final Completion Date and/or the Contract Sum necessitated by such
termination. Contractor shall submit its claim for the amounts of such
adjustments in writing within ten (10) days after the first to occur of the
resumption of the Work or the termination of the Contract. For the remainder of
the Work, if any, the Contract Documents shall remain in full force and effect.
Contractor shall continue to prosecute the Work not terminated, if any.
14.7.2.2
If any part or all of the Work is so terminated or if Contractor terminates
the Contract pursuant to Section 14.6, Contractor shall be entitled to payment for:
(i) Work properly executed in accordance with the Contract Documents; (ii) the
full amount of Soft Costs incurred through the date of termination; (iii) the portion
of the Contractor Fee applicable to the portion of the Work completed; (iv) costs
directly related to the termination of the Contract or to Work thereafter performed
by Contractor in terminating such Work, including costs of demobilization; and (v)
materials specially fabricated for the Work prior to the time when the Contractor
gives or received notice of such termination and not incorporated in the Work
prior to termination.
14.7.2.3
If any materials specially fabricated for the Work are not fully prepared
when the Contractor gives or receives notice of termination of the Agreement,
Contractor shall, immediately upon giving or receiving such notice, (i) notify the
applicable Suppliers to stop work and wait for further instructions, and (ii) notify
Owner and Architect that such materials are partially fabricated and that the
suppliers thereof are awaiting further instructions. The Owner shall, within ten
(10) days from the date it receives Contractor’s notice, notify Contractor whether
to have the work on such materials or other items completed. Contractor shall
cancel all orders for materials or other items which the Owner does not wish to
have completed. Contractor shall make a settlement with each such material
supplier reasonably satisfactory to Owner, the costs of which shall be reimbursed
by the Owner.
14.7.2.4
Owner shall be entitled to purchase from the Contractor any of the
materials and other items obtained by the Contractor for the Work, but not
incorporated in the work prior to termination, for the cost thereof to the
Contractor.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
38
Denver Public Schools
Article 15.
15.1
CONCEALED CONDITIONS
Concealed Conditions.
15.1.1 In the event Contractor encounters subsurface or otherwise concealed physical
conditions that differ materially from those conditions reasonably inferable from
observations of the exposed surfaces of the Site and reports, surveys, assessments,
record drawings and other information furnished by Owner or obtained by Contractor,
Contractor shall provide Architect and Owner notice thereof within two (2) business days
after first discovering the same and shall suspend those portions of the Work that conflict
with such conditions until receipt of further directions from Owner.
15.1.2 Contractor and Owner shall inspect and evaluate such conditions, and Owner shall cause
the Architect, if necessary, to prepare appropriate supplemental drawings or instructions
to address or accommodate the conditions discovered.
15.1.3 Delay resulting from the suspension of Work pending the investigation of unforeseen
concealed conditions shall be an Owner Delay, but only to the extent that the same
causes actual delay in the critical path to complete the Work that satisfies all the
requirements necessary to be an Owner Delay under Section 3.4.1 and all the
requirements of Section 15.1.5 below.
15.1.4 If the actions necessary to address such conditions of the Site increase the Cost of Work
or adversely impact the critical path to completion of the Work, Contractor may request
that an Agreed Change or Change Directive be issued for changes in the Work reflected
in the supplemental drawings or instructions prepared to address such conditions, subject
to the provisions of Section 15.1.5 below.
15.1.5 Costs.
15.1.5.1
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary provided herein, Contractor
shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Sum or extension of the
Milestone Schedule, nor shall any Owner Delay be deemed to have occurred, on
account of any condition of the Site that was indicated in or reasonably inferable
from (i) observations of the exposed surfaces of the Site and reports, surveys,
assessments, record drawings and other information furnished by Owner or
obtained by Contractor, (ii) a thorough inspection of the Site prior to the
commencement of the Work (regardless of whether such thorough inspection
was actually conducted), or (iii) other information and documents furnished to
Contractor by Owner or others.
15.1.5.2
If the Agreement is a GMGC Agreement, increases in the Cost of Work
(and any associated Construction Fee and General Conditions fee, if applicable)
in connection with any Agreed Change or Change Directive under Section 15.1.4
shall be charged to the Contingency, and an increase in the Guaranteed
Maximum Price shall be allowed, if at all, only to the extent that such costs
exceed the balance of the Contingency.
15.1.6 Any dispute as to whether Contractor is entitled to receive an increase in the Contract
Sum or extension of the Milestone Schedule on account of concealed conditions of the
Site shall be a Dispute and shall, at the request of either Contractor or Owner, be
submitted to Dispute Resolution.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
39
Denver Public Schools
Article 16.
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
16.1
Hazardous Substances. “Hazardous Substances” include any substance identified as a
hazardous substance pursuant to any federal, state or local law or regulation regulating
substances by reason of threats posed to public health and safety, including the Comprehensive
Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, the Resource Conservation and
Recovery Act, the Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, the
Hazardous Substances Transportation Act, the Solid Waste Disposal Act, the Clean Water Act,
the Clean Air Act, the Toxic Substances Control Act, the Safe Drinking Water Act, the
Occupational Safety and Health Act, and the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act, all as
amended.
16.2
Existing Facilities – Hazardous Substances May Exist. Contractor acknowledges that most
existing structures owned or operated by Owner contain asbestos-containing materials, and the
Site may also contain other Hazardous Substances. Contractor and any Subcontractors, Subsubcontractors or other personnel who may come into contact with asbestos-containing materials
shall review and become familiar with Owner’s plan under the Asbestos Hazard Emergency
Response Act, currently titled the “Denver Public Schools General Asbestos Management Plan”
and the AHERA Asbestos Management Plan and Hazardous Materials Information book for each
existing facility comprising part of the Project, as each may be revised from time to time. All
persons acting for Contractor under the Contract shall be responsible to perform the
responsibilities of “Vendors” as defined in those Plans.
16.3
No Introduction of Hazardous Substances. Contractor, its contractors, its Subcontractors, its
Sub-subcontractors, its Suppliers, and their respective agents, representatives and employees
shall not introduce or cause the introduction of Hazardous Substances to the Project. Except as
provided below as to Ordinary Course Materials, in the event that Contractor, its contractors, its
Subcontractors, its Suppliers, or their respective agents, representatives and employees
introduce or cause the introduction of Hazardous Substances to the Project, Contractor shall pay
for removal of all such substances and shall indemnify Owner and its successors as owners of
the Property for all liability resulting from the introduction of such Hazardous Substances to the
Project.
16.4
Suspected Hazardous Substances. Contractor acknowledges that other Hazardous
Substances may exist in building materials, soils, or equipment used on the Site. Contractor shall
not be primarily responsible to identify Hazardous Substances existing on the Site; provided that
Contractor shall be responsible to comply with all recommendations and requirements of
environmental consultants furnished to Contractor in writing. Except as provided above and
except for Ordinary Course Materials, if Contractor encounters what Contractor reasonably
believes may be Hazardous Substances, Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area
affected and immediately report the condition to Architect and Owner in writing. If, in fact, the
materials are Hazardous Substances, the Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be
resumed, except by written agreement of Owner and Contractor, until the Hazardous Substances
have been removed or rendered safe by Owner in accordance with all applicable laws at Owner’s
expense, and Owner has provided reasonable evidence thereof to Contractor. The Work in the
affected area shall be resumed in the absence of Hazardous Substances, when any Hazardous
Substances have been rendered harmless, or when the conditions in the preceding sentence
have been satisfied. Unless such materials were introduced to the Project by Contractor or its
contractors, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, Suppliers, or their respective agents,
representatives and employees, Owner shall be responsible for all reasonable costs related to
any testing, removal, encapsulation, or remediation of any such substances or materials, and any
additional cost of the Work arising out of any delay in the Work caused thereby. Except as to
such materials introduced to the Project by Contractor or its contractors, Subcontractors, Subsubcontractors, Suppliers, or their respective agents, representatives and employees, any delays
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
40
Denver Public Schools
arising out of such testing, removal, encapsulation, or remediation shall be an Owner Delay, but
only to the extent that the same causes actual delay in the Work that satisfies all the
requirements necessary to be an Owner Delay under Section 3.4.1; provided, however, that if the
Agreement is a GMGC Agreement, any increases in the Cost of Work (and any associated
Construction Fee and General Conditions fee, if applicable) in connection with any such Owner
Delay shall be charged to the Contingency, and an increase in the Guaranteed Maximum Price
shall be allowed, if at all, only to the extent that such amounts exceed the balance of the
Contingency.
16.5
Ordinary Course Materials. Nothing contained herein shall be deemed to preclude Contractor
from using and bringing onto the Property materials and substances (which are otherwise
Hazardous Substances) used in the ordinary course of commercial construction in quantities
typically and safely used for such purposes (“Ordinary Course Materials”). Contractor shall use
all Ordinary Course Materials in accordance with all Current Laws and shall make sure that none
of the Ordinary Course Materials are released or otherwise permitted to contaminate the Property
or render the Property contaminated. Contractor shall defend and indemnify Owner against any
claim, cost, loss, or damage resulting from the use of the Ordinary Course Materials in connection
with the Project or resulting from the introduction of Hazardous Substances onto the Property in a
manner not specifically permitted hereby. In the event Contractor recognizes any improper
handling or storage of Hazardous Substances on the Site, including Ordinary Course Materials,
or observes circumstances which contractor actually knows may result in the release or discharge
of Hazardous Substances, whether or not by someone for whose acts Contractor is responsible,
Contractor shall immediately notify Owner thereof.
Article 17.
17.1
ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
General Requirements. Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and such costs shall
be part of the Cost of Work. Contractor shall, at its own cost and not as part of the Cost of Work,
defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights relating to equipment or materials
incorporated in the Work and shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from loss on account
thereof, except that Owner shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design process
or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified by Owner; provided that,
if Contractor has been notified or otherwise has reason to know that the use of a required design,
process, or product is an infringement of a patent, Contractor shall be responsible for such loss,
at its own cost and not as part of the Cost of Work, unless such information is promptly furnished
to Architect and Owner.
Article 18.
DRAWINGS, DETAIL AND INSTRUCTIONS
18.1
Clarifications and Additional Instructions. In the event Contractor observes that the
Construction Documents contain ambiguities or omissions, or are inconsistent with existing
conditions on the Site, Contractor shall promptly submit to Architect a written request for
clarification or additional instructions. Contractor shall do no Construction Work without adequate
drawings and instructions describing the Work in sufficient detail for the proper execution thereof.
18.2
Details Schedule. If detail drawings or other instructions are to be prepared by Architect during
the course of the Work, Contractor and Architect shall jointly prepare a schedule for the Architect
to provide such Work Product, and Contractor shall incorporate such schedule into the Project
Schedule.
18.3
Copies of Construction Documents. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
Architect will furnish the Contractor with all copies of Construction Documents reasonably
necessary for the execution of the Work.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
41
Denver Public Schools
18.4
Ownership of Work Product. Contractor acknowledges that the Work Product and the
copyright interest therein are owned either by Architect or by Owner, in accordance with the terms
of the agreement between Architect and Owner. Contractor shall not be entitled to use the Work
Product in connection with any construction other than the Project, and upon the completion of
the Work or the termination of the Contract, Contractor shall return to Architect, at its request, all
copies of the Work Product except one (1) signed record set of Construction Documents. Any
models shall be the property of the Owner.
Article 19.
ROLE OF THE ARCHITECT
19.1
Limited Agent. Architect is the agent of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract
Documents and Architect’s agreement with Owner. When in special instances the Architect is
authorized to act on Owner’s behalf, the Architect shall, upon request, provide the Contractor
copies of the documents that establish such authority.
19.2
Primary Interpreter of Construction Documents.
19.2.1 The Architect shall be the primary interpreter of the meaning and intent of the
Construction Documents and shall be, in the first instance, the judge of the performance
of the Contract. Architect will visit the site at appropriate intervals to become familiar with
its progress and quality and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in
such a manner that it will, when fully completed, be in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
19.2.2 Architect shall, in a timely manner, evaluate and issue written determinations resolving
any claims or disputes submitted to the Architect for review under the Contract.
Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and
reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents. The Architect’s decisions on matters
relating to aesthetic effect shall be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the
Contract Documents. In exercising its authority to make such determinations, Architect
shall exercise independent professional judgment based on the Contract Documents and
shall not favor Contractor or Owner. All such determinations shall be subject to judicial
review, provided, however, that any matters designated as Disputes under the Contract
shall be submitted to Dispute Resolution in accordance with the Agreement before being
made the subject of litigation unless the Agreement specifically provides otherwise.
19.3
Communications. Contractor shall furnish both Owner and Architect copies of all notices
Contractor gives to either Architect or Owner under the Contract relating to Applications for
Payment, Change Directives, Proposed Changes, Change Orders, Progress Payments, or claims
for adjustment in the Contract Sum, Required Substantial Completion Date or Required Final
Completion Date. Such duplicate notice shall also be given as to other matters requested in
writing by Owner or Architect.
Article 20.
SUBMITTALS
20.1
Schedule of Submittals. Within thirty (30) days after the date of this Contract, Contractor and
Architect shall jointly prepare a schedule for submittals of shop drawings, samples, schedules
and other submittals to be made by the Contractor, the review thereof by Architect, and
responses and resubmittals by Contractor based on the Architect’s review. Contractor shall
incorporate such schedule into the Project Schedule.
20.2
Scope of Architect’s Review. Architect shall review Contractor’s submittals of shop drawings,
samples, schedules and other documents related to items to be incorporated in the Work for
aesthetic effect. Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that such submittals conform to the
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
42
Denver Public Schools
Contract Documents, and the approval of such submittals by Architect shall not relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for any deviation of such submittals from the Contract Documents
unless the Contractor gives the Architect specific written notice of such deviation together with
such submittal, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors and omissions
contained in such submittals.
20.3
Review Process. The review of Contractor’s submittals shall be conducted in accordance with
the provisions of the specifications contained in the Construction Documents. Such specifications
will be based on the Standards.
Article 21.
21.1
NOTICES
How Notice May Be Given. All notices required or permitted to be given under the Contract shall
be in writing and shall be delivered by (i) certified or registered mail, postage prepaid, return
receipt requested, (ii) commercial courier, (iii) hand delivery, or (iv) successful and confirmed
facsimile transmission. All such notices shall be delivered to the parties at the addresses
provided in the Agreement or at such other address as Contractor, Owner or Architect may
determine for itself by notice given to the other parties. Each notice shall be deemed effective
when actually delivered to the address for the party or delivery at such address is tendered and
refused or, if the party has multiple addresses, when either actually delivered to, or delivery is
tendered and refused at, each of the addresses for the party. Notwithstanding anything to the
contrary herein, meeting notes and minutes prepared by Contractor shall not constitute notice of
any fact regarding which notice is permitted or required to be given under the Contract,
regardless of how such notes and minutes are delivered.
Article 22.
INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR.
22.1
Status. The parties intend that Contractor shall have the status of an independent contractor,
and the Contract Documents shall not be construed to render Contractor or any employee,
Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor of Contractor, or any of their employees, officers or agents,
an employee or partner of Owner.
22.2
Employee Benefits. Neither Contractor nor any of its employees, officers, agents,
Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, or other contractors or consultants shall be entitled to any
employee benefits from the District, including, but not limited to, any employer withholding or
liability for any of the following: taxes; FICA contributions; other Social Security, Medicare or
Medicaid contributions or withholding; medical or disability insurance; vacation or leave; pension
contributions; unemployment insurance or worker’s compensation insurance (collectively,
“Employee Benefits”). Contractor shall be responsible to pay all taxes due on account of any
payments to Contractor by Owner under the Contract. Except to the extent, if any, that such a
waiver and release may be expressly prohibited by applicable laws, Contractor waives and
releases all claims against Owner for any Employee Benefits.
Article 23.
23.1
NO WAIVER
No Waiver. No inspection by the Architect or any other person acting on the Owner's behalf, nor
any order, measurement, estimate or certificate by the Architect, nor any order by the Owner for
the payment of money, nor any payment for or acceptance of any Work, nor any extension of
time, nor any possession taken by the Owner, shall operate as a waiver of any right of Owner
arising out of or related to the Contract. No waiver of any breach of the Contract shall be
construed as a waiver of any other or subsequent breach thereof.
General Conditions of the Contract
01/2012
43
Denver Public Schools
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Article 1.
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION ................................................................................ 1
1.1 Definitions. ...................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Interpretation. .................................................................................................................................. 5
Article 2.
PAYMENTS............................................................................................................................. 5
2.1 Schedule of Values ......................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Progress Payments ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.3 Time for Progress Payment ............................................................................................................ 8
2.4 Owner’s Ability to Withhold Payment .............................................................................................. 8
2.5 Payment upon Final Completion .................................................................................................... 9
2.6 Final Settlement – Subcontractor and Supplier Claims ................................................................ 10
2.7 Appropriations ............................................................................................................................... 10
2.8 Taxes; Direct Purchase Option ..................................................................................................... 11
2.9 Discounts ...................................................................................................................................... 12
2.10
Adjustments .............................................................................................................................. 12
Article 3.
COMPLETION, TIME, AND DELAYS IN CONSTRUCTION ............................................... 12
3.1 Time of the Essence ..................................................................................................................... 12
3.2 Substantial Completion ................................................................................................................. 12
3.3 Final Completion ........................................................................................................................... 12
3.4 Excused Delay .............................................................................................................................. 13
3.5 Guarantee of Required Substantial Completion Date and Required Final Completion Date Date
15
3.6 Extraordinary Measures ............................................................................................................... 16
Article 4.
PROJECT AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT ........................................................... 16
4.1 General Scope .............................................................................................................................. 16
4.2 Project Schedule........................................................................................................................... 16
4.3 Supervision and Construction Procedure. .................................................................................... 17
4.4 Books and Records ...................................................................................................................... 17
4.5 Site Investigation; Field Verification. ............................................................................................. 17
4.6 Use of Site .................................................................................................................................... 18
4.7 Cleaning Up .................................................................................................................................. 18
4.8 Coordination with Owner’s Consultants........................................................................................ 19
4.9 Drawings and Specifications at Site ............................................................................................. 19
4.10
Manufacturers’ and Subcontractors’ Warranties; Manuals ....................................................... 19
4.11
Unsuitable Conditions ............................................................................................................... 19
4.12
Owner’s Separate Work ............................................................................................................ 19
4.13
Quality Control .......................................................................................................................... 20
4.14
Issue Tracking ........................................................................................................................... 20
4.15
Self-Work .................................................................................................................................. 20
4.16
Project Manager and Superintendents ..................................................................................... 20
4.17
Federally Funded Projects ........................................................................................................ 20
4.18
Extra Inspections....................................................................................................................... 21
Article 5.
CHANGES IN THE WORK ................................................................................................... 21
5.1 Change Directive. ......................................................................................................................... 21
5.2 Proposed Changes. ...................................................................................................................... 21
5.3 Changes not Requiring a Change Order ...................................................................................... 22
5.4 Determination of the Cost or Savings Attributable to a Change Directive .................................... 22
5.5 Change Pricing ............................................................................................................................. 22
5.6 Change Orders ............................................................................................................................. 23
-i-
5.7
Tracking ........................................................................................................................................ 23
Article 6.
SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND PERSONNEL. ................................................... 23
6.1 Terms of Subcontracts.................................................................................................................. 23
6.2 Equal Opportunity ......................................................................................................................... 24
6.3 Discipline; Sufficiency of Skilled Workers; Removal. ................................................................... 24
6.4 Colorado Labor. ............................................................................................................................ 25
Article 7.
INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION OF DEFECTS .................................................................... 25
7.1 Inspections .................................................................................................................................... 25
7.3 Notice of Defect ............................................................................................................................ 25
7.4 Warranty and Correction of Work During Construction ................................................................ 25
7.5 Uncovering Work .......................................................................................................................... 26
7.6 Failure to Correct Defect .............................................................................................................. 26
7.7 Acceptance of Defective Work ..................................................................................................... 26
Article 8.
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY ................................................................ 26
8.1 General Requirement ................................................................................................................... 26
8.2 Underground Facilities .................................................................................................................. 27
8.3 Public Ways .................................................................................................................................. 27
8.4 Safety Equipment ......................................................................................................................... 27
8.5 Site Security.................................................................................................................................. 27
8.6 Notice Requirements. ................................................................................................................... 27
Article 9.
PERMITS AND LICENSES; COMPLIANCE WITH CURRENT LAWS ............................... 28
9.1 Permits .......................................................................................................................................... 28
9.2 Licensed Trades ........................................................................................................................... 28
9.3 Licensed Supervision.................................................................................................................... 28
9.4 Worker Status ............................................................................................................................... 28
9.5 General Compliance With Current Laws ...................................................................................... 30
Article 10. BONDS .................................................................................................................................. 30
10.1
Required Bond or Bonds ........................................................................................................... 30
Article 11. WARRANTY.......................................................................................................................... 30
11.1
Correction of Defective Work on Building and Infrastructure .................................................... 30
11.2
Warranty Inspections ................................................................................................................ 31
11.3
Public Improvements ................................................................................................................ 31
11.4
Self-Help ................................................................................................................................... 31
11.5
Longer Warranties .................................................................................................................... 31
11.6
No Limitations Created ............................................................................................................. 31
11.7
Survival ..................................................................................................................................... 31
Article 12. INSURANCE; RISK OF LOSS ............................................................................................. 31
12.1
Contractor’s Insurance – CGL, Auto, Workers’ Compensation, Property................................. 31
12.2
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors .................................................................................. 32
12.3
Builder’s Risk ............................................................................................................................ 32
12.4
Pollution Coverage .................................................................................................................... 33
12.5
Certificates of Insurance ........................................................................................................... 33
12.6
Additional Insured Endorsements ............................................................................................. 34
12.7
Other General Requirements .................................................................................................... 34
12.8
Failure to Insure ........................................................................................................................ 34
12.9
Waiver of Subrogation .............................................................................................................. 34
Article 13. INDEMNIFICATION .............................................................................................................. 34
13.1
Contractor’s Indemnification ..................................................................................................... 34
13.2
Limitations Not Applicable ......................................................................................................... 34
13.3
Employee Benefits .................................................................................................................... 35
- ii -
Article 14. DEFAULTS, REMEDIES AND TERMINATION ................................................................... 35
14.1
Default by Contractor ................................................................................................................ 35
14.2
Owner’s Remedies .................................................................................................................... 36
14.3
Default by Owner ...................................................................................................................... 36
14.4
Contractor’s Remedies ............................................................................................................. 37
14.5
Attorneys’ Fees ......................................................................................................................... 37
14.6
Suspension by Owner for Convenience ................................................................................... 37
14.7
Termination by Owner Without Cause ...................................................................................... 37
Article 15. CONCEALED CONDITIONS ................................................................................................ 38
15.1
Concealed Conditions ............................................................................................................... 38
Article 16. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES.............................................................................................. 39
16.1
Hazardous Substances ............................................................................................................. 39
16.2
Existing Facilities – Hazardous Substances May Exist ............................................................ 39
16.3
No Introduction of Hazardous Substances ............................................................................... 40
16.4
Suspected Hazardous Substances ........................................................................................... 40
16.5
Ordinary Course Materials ........................................................................................................ 40
Article 17. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS ............................................................................................... 41
17.1
General Requirements .............................................................................................................. 41
Article 18. DRAWINGS, DETAIL AND INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................... 41
18.1
Clarifications and Additional Instructions .................................................................................. 41
18.2
Details Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 41
18.3
Copies of Construction Documents .......................................................................................... 41
18.4
Ownership of Work Product ...................................................................................................... 41
Article 19. ROLE OF THE ARCHITECT ................................................................................................ 41
19.1
Limited Agent ............................................................................................................................ 41
19.2
Primary Interpreter of Construction Documents ....................................................................... 41
19.3
Communications ....................................................................................................................... 42
Article 20. SUBMITTALS ....................................................................................................................... 42
20.1
Schedule of Submittals ............................................................................................................. 42
20.2
Scope of Architect’s Review ..................................................................................................... 42
20.3
Review Process ........................................................................................................................ 42
Article 21. NOTICES............................................................................................................................... 42
21.1
How Notice May Be Given ........................................................................................................ 42
Article 22. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR .......................................................................................... 43
22.1
Status ........................................................................................................................................ 43
22.2
Employee Benefits .................................................................................................................... 43
Article 23. NO WAIVER .......................................................................................................................... 43
23.1
No Waiver ................................................................................................................................. 43
- iii -
DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS
SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. 1 IN THE CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER
AND STATE OF COLORADO
SPECIFICATIONS
PROJECT MANUAL
BID # 14-BS-2225
UPGRADES,
MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. EARLY COLLEGE
&
RACHEL B. NOEL MIDDLE SCHOOL
FOR
DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS
900 GRANT STREET
DENVER, COLORADO 80203
JRM ARCHITECTURE, INC.
ARCHITECTS AND PLANNERS
1860 BLAKE STREET, SUITE 170
DENVER, COLORADO 80202
JOB NUMBER: DPS 336
MARCH 13, 2014
SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
SEE: DOCUMENT 00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000
012300
013200
013300
015000
016000
017000
017310
017419
017700
017823
017839
SUMMARY
ALTERNATES (To follow)
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATIONS
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
CUTTING AND PATCHING
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
CLOSEOUT PROCEEDURES
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
024119
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
042000
UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 5 - METALS
054000
055000
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
061000
064116
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
079200
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
May 13, 2014
DPS, MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 1 of 3
081113
087100
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
DOOR HARDWARE
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
092900
095113
099123
GYPSUM BOARD
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
INTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
101100
102800
104416
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES (To follow)
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
220100
220500
220553
220719
221005
221006
221500
224000
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PLUMBING PIPING
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
230100
230500
230593
230713
233100
233300
233423
233700
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
DUCT INSULATION
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
HVAC EXHAUST FANS
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
260500
260519
260526
260529
260533
260553
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
LOW VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL
May 13, 2014
DPS, MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 2 of 3
260800
262726
265561
TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
WIRING DEVICES
THEATRICAL LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS
274100
PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS
May 13, 2014
DPS, MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Work covered by the Contract Documents.
Work phases.
Use of premises.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Specification formats and conventions.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Project Identification:
Denver Public Schools Martin Luther King Jr. Early College and Rachel B. Noel Middle School
1.
Project Location:
Martin Luther King Jr. Early College: 19535 E. 46th ave, Denver, CO. 80249
Rachel B. Middle School: 5290 Kittredge St. Denver, CO. 80239
B.
Owner: Denver Public Schools
C.
Architect: JRM Architecture, Inc. Architects and Planners, 1701 Wynkoop Street, Suite 200,
Denver, Colorado 80202
D.
The Work includes but is not limited to the following:
Various renovations and upgrades at Martin Luther King Jr. Early College and Rachel B. Noel
Middle School work including, but not limited to:
1.3
1.
Theatrical Upgrades
2.
Renovations to the Computer Lab a new Stem Lab at MLK
3.
Various accessibility upgrades
4.
Miscellaneous site work.
WORK PHASES
A.
The Work shall be conducted in one phase.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
011000-SUMMARY
Page 1 of 3
1.4
USE OF PREMISES
A.
1.5
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb
portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of the adjacent building areas and use by
the public.
2.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises
clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times.
Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period,
with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction
operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to
interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
1.6
Maintain access to existing walkways and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do
not close or obstruct walkways, driveways or other occupied or used facilities without
written permission from Owner.
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
CSI/CSC's "Master Format" numbering system.
1.
B.
Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in
the Specifications.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a.
May 13, 2014
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,
are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
011000-SUMMARY
Page 2 of 3
1.7
DOCUMENT FORMAT
a.
The organization of drawings and specifications is not to be used as a division of
work among trades or sub contractors. The General Contractor shall be responsible
for all of the work of all the construction documents. For example, electrical work
may be required in Architectural or mechanical drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
011000-SUMMARY
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Contractor's construction schedule.
Daily construction reports.
Field condition reports.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1.
2.
3.
Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project.
C.
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1.
1.3
Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1.
2.
B.
PDF electronic file.
Three paper copies, 11 x 17 Format.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
013200-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
Page 1 of 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final
completion.
1.
B.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Contract completion date shall not be changed, unless specifically authorized by Change
Order.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items, and
major items, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but
are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and re-submittal times indicated in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for punch list and final
completion.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Coordination with existing construction.
Limitations of continued occupancies.
Uninterruptible services.
Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
Use of premises restrictions.
Seasonal variations.
Environmental control.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work.
D.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E.
Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1.
May 13, 2014
Unresolved issues.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
013200-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
Page 2 of 4
2.
3.
4.
5.
Unanswered RFIs.
Rejected or unreturned submittals.
Notations on returned submittals.
Issues with upcoming work.
F.
Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by
which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.
G.
Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has
been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
1.
2.2
Utilize Microsoft Project, Primavera, Prolog or similar approved program. Schedules to
be submitted in PDF format.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A.
Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type,
Contractor's construction schedule within 5 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
B.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
2.3
REPORTS
A.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions
and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule at each regularly scheduled progress
meeting.
1.
2.
B.
See 2.1.E for “upcoming work summary”.
Provide detailed “three week look ahead” schedule at each weekly meeting.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, testing and
inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule
responsibility.
1.
2.
May 13, 2014
Post copies in temporary field office.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
013200-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
Page 3 of 4
END OF SECTION 013200
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
013200-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
B.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
May 13, 2014
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 1 of 7
2.
3.
Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title
block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Olympian High School Various Site Improvements Phase II, 12-2298-GP.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1)
i.
j.
k.
Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A).
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
D.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
E.
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal.
F.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals,
without review, or discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
G.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1.
2.
3.
Note date and content of previous submittal.
Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Reviewed” or “Furnish as Corrected” on the
Architect's action stamp."
H.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Reviewed” or Furnish as
corrected” taken by Architect.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 2 of 7
1.4
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES
A.
General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to
Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:
1.
All dimensions requiring field measurements are added to drawing prior to submittal by
the contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
4.
C.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Compliance with specified referenced standards.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
Number of Copies: Submit one electronic, PDF copy of Product Data, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return one electronic copy. Mark up and retain one paper copy
and one electronic as a Project Record Document.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted.
1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.
following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
May 13, 2014
Include the
Dimensions.
Identification of products.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 3 of 7
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.
3.
D.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 11 by
17 inches (280 by 432 mm).
Number of Copies: Submit one electronic, PDF format copy of each submittal. Architect
will return one copy.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1.
2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
1.
F.
Generic description of Sample.
Product name and name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a.
E.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
Shop work manufacturing instructions.
Templates and patterns.
Schedules.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
Number of Copies: Submit one electronic PDF copy of product schedule or list, unless
otherwise indicated. Architect will return one copy.
LEED Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Sustainable
Design Requirements."
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 4 of 7
1.
2.2
Number of Copies:
otherwise indicated.
Submit one electronic PDF copy of LEED submittals, unless
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1.
2.
Number of Copies: Submit one electronic PDF copy of each submittal, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications (Paper copies are required): Provide a notarized statement
that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and
certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign
documents on behalf of that entity.
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Construction Progress Documentation."
C.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
D.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include
names of firms and personnel certified.
E.
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
F.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
G.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
H.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
I.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
J.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 5 of 7
K.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project.
L.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
M.
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
N.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
O.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
P.
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
Q.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer.
R.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
S.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
T.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to
Architect.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 6 of 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D.
Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 013300
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B.
See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
C.
See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements
for products in those Sections.
1.2
USE CHARGES
A.
Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering
and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as
required for construction operations.
B.
Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use
without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of
services as required for construction operations.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Exterior: Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 9-gage, galvanized steel,
chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 8 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts;
minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull
posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized steel bases for
supporting posts.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
015000-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
Page 1 of 4
B.
2.3
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
C.
Use of owner’s electrical power is allowed. Design and installation of power is the contractors
responsibility.
3.2
TEMPORARY FACILITY INSTALLATIONS
A.
Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
B.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
C.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
3.3
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of
water.
1.
See SECTION 312319 – DEWATERING foe additional requirements.
2.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
015000-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
Page 2 of 4
B.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning
requirements.
C.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1.
3.4
Truck cranes, lifts and similar devices used for hoisting materials and personnel are
considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
B.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties, streets, and
walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and
around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from
heavy rains.
D.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
E.
Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction begins, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a
manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
1.
Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.
F.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
G.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
H.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241 and 2010 CFC, Chapter 14.
1.
2.
May 13, 2014
Prohibit smoking on School Campus.
Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
015000-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
Page 3 of 4
3.5
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in clean and good operating condition until removal.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 015000
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
015000-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.
C.
See Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless
explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. Products identified as
“District Standards” are to be provided as specified. No substitutions will be considered.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
016000 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 4
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.4
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Storage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.
2.
B.
Manufacturer's Warranty:
Preprinted written warranty published by individual
manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to
Owner.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide
more rights for Owner.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
016000 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 4
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using appropriate form properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
See specifically Products in Section 115200. Otherwise:
Product: Where Specifications identify a single product and manufacturer as “district
standard”, provide the named product that complies with requirements.
Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of
manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,
and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in
Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the
other named manufacturers.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that
complies with other specified requirements.
a.
b.
May 13, 2014
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern,
density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium
items.
Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
016000 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 4
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
016000 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
1.2
Construction layout.
General installation of products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels,
and final cleaning.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
B.
Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting
the Work.
1.
May 13, 2014
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection to
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017000-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 5
C.
Acceptance of Conditions before and during construction: Examine substrates, areas, and
conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record
observations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
B.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
C.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include
a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations solving the
problem.
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
C.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
3.4
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017000-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 5
1.
2.
3.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.5
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily. Coordinate progress cleaning where more
than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
May 13, 2014
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017000-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 5
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
work area daily.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.6
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
Remove
017000-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Page 4 of 5
3.7
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.8
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017000
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017000-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 017310 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B.
See Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio except as specifically detailed.
B.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following:
1.
C.
1.3
Existing utilities & systems.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1.
May 13, 2014
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017310 CUTTING AND PATCHING
Page 1 of 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
D.
Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
3.3
PERFORMANCE
A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
May 13, 2014
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017310 CUTTING AND PATCHING
Page 2 of 3
C.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections.
1.
2.
D.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence
of patching and refinishing.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION 017310
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017310 CUTTING AND PATCHING
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
2.
1.2
Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B.
Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D.
Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in
preparation for reuse.
E.
Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
F.
Salvage and Reuse:
Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
1.3
PERFORMANCE GOALS
A.
1.4
Salvage/Recycle Goals: Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous
demolition and construction waste as possible.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to
individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
B.
Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017419 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Page 1 of 3
C.
Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
D.
Landfill Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills facilities
licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
E.
Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
F.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for
recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that
recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician
and date refrigerant was recovered.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications:
program.
Certified by EPA-approved certification
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A.
3.2
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A.
Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until installation.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and
equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to
make items functional for use indicated.
Salvaged Items for Owner's Use:
1.
2.
3.
4.
May 13, 2014
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017419 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Page 2 of 3
5.
3.3
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A.
General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 017419
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017419 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.2
Substantial Completion procedures.
Final completion procedures.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
2.
Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,
Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.
3.
Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for the Work in those Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
May 13, 2014
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final
completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys,
property surveys, and similar final record information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Page 1 of 5
12.
13.
14.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.3
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor
of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
1.4
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
May 13, 2014
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Page 2 of 5
2.
3.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a.
1.5
PDF electronic file.
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
(215-by-280-mm) paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package
into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item.
Provide table of contents at beginning of document.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1.
May 13, 2014
Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use
products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC
levels.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Page 3 of 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1)
m.
May 13, 2014
Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification,
including mechanical and electrical nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Page 4 of 5
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
C.
Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
END OF SECTION 017700
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.2
Emergency manuals.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes,
systems and equipment.
See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manual: Submit two copies of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final
inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.
1.
Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's and Owner’s comments.
Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of comments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUALS, GENERAL
A.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents.
B.
Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
May 13, 2014
Olympian High School Various Site Improvements Phase II, 12-2298-GP.
Address of Project.
Subject matter included in manual.
Name and address of Owner.
Date of submittal.
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect.
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017823 – OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Page 1 of 4
C.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
D.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with
clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside
covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a.
2.
3.
4.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
b.
2.2
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
EMERGENCY MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for type of emergency, emergency
instructions, and emergency procedures.
B.
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component for
fire, power failure and equipment failure.
C.
Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D.
Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type
of emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits, and
required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017823 – OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Page 2 of 4
2.3
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating
procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements.
B.
Descriptions: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
2.4
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal
shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and
required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Color, pattern, and texture.
Material and chemical composition.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection
procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and
maintenance, and repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017823 – OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Page 3 of 4
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
B.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
D.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
E.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
F.
Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017823
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017823 – OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.2
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents
of the Work in those Sections.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:
a.
b.
Initial Submittal: Submit one color paper copy set of marked-up record prints.
Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information
recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.
Final Submittal: Submit two color paper copies and 2 PDF electronic files of
marked-up record prints. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and
additional information were recorded.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit two paper copies and 2 annotated PDF electronic files of
Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit two paper copies and one annotated PDF electronic files and
directories of each submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017839-PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Page 1 of 4
1.
Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect and Russell Decker. When
authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the
original Contract Drawings.
Format: DWG, Version 2005, operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.
Format: Annotated PDF electronic file [with comment function enabled].
Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect and Russell Decker for resolution.
Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for
use in recording information.
Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files
that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
identification. Include identification in each digital data file.
Identification: As follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
May 13, 2014
Olympian High School Various Site Improvements Phase II, 12-2298-GP
Date.
Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017839-PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Page 2 of 4
2.2
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.3
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copies and one scanned PDF electronic file(s) of
marked up paper copy of Specifications.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
Format: Submit record Product Data as two paper copies and one scanned PDF electronic
file(s) of marked up paper copy of Product Data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 017839
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
017839-PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Page 3 of 4
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
2.
Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
B.
See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of demolished
materials.
C.
See Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade
improvements.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage:
Owner ready for reuse.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3
Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to
SUBMITTALS
A.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Include in Construction and Look Ahead
schedules.
B.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of wastes by a landfill facility licensed to
accept such wastes.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
024119-SELECTIVE STRUCTURE
DEMOLITION
Page 1 of 4
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
C.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
D.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of the site adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective
demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under
a separate contract.
E.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
024119-SELECTIVE STRUCTURE
DEMOLITION
Page 2 of 4
E.
3.2
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs.
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
B.
Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
Engage a locator service to locate existing utilities.
2.
3.
Arrange any shut off indicated with utility companies.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass
area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other
buildings.
Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
4.
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
B.
3.4
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction to the extent indicated. Use methods
required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Do not use cutting torches.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
Removed and Salvaged Items:
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
024119-SELECTIVE STRUCTURE
DEMOLITION
Page 3 of 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
3.5
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site
and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
024119-SELECTIVE STRUCTURE
DEMOLITION
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Concrete masonry units (CMU's).
Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets
installed in masonry joints.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to
perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with
specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140
for compressive strength.
Mortar Test (Property Specification):
For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength [, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and
ASTM C 91 for air content].
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780
for compressive strength.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete
Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit and colored mortar.
D.
Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include
material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
E.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
May 14, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
042000 UNIT MASONRY
Page 1 of 11
1.
2.
1.4
Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water
retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Masonry Standard:
Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Regional Materials: Provide CMUs that have been manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of
Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
B.
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints,
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
C.
Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water repellent
admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength for exposed units NOT TO RECEIVE
GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
D.
ACM Chemistries; RainBloc.
BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block.
CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1.
May 14, 2014
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 1900 psi.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
042000 UNIT MASONRY
Page 2 of 11
2.
2.3
Density Classification: Medium weight.
CONCRETE LINTELS
A.
General: Provide one of the following:
B.
Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification;
and with shape and reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive
strength not less than CMUs.
2.4
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Regional Materials: Provide aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime that have been
extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of
Project site.
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
C.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
D.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing
no other ingredients.
E.
Masonry Cement: As indicated in drawings..
F.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of
satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
G.
Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.
Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1.
2.
3.
For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing
the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce
required mortar color.
H.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
I.
Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as
pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and approved for such use by manufacturer
May 14, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
042000 UNIT MASONRY
Page 3 of 11
of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's colors.
J.
Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
K.
2.5
ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar.
BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar
Admixture.
Water: Potable.
REINFORCEMENT
A.
2.6
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60
(Grade 420).
TIES AND ANCHORS
A.
Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.7
Hot-Dip
Galvanized,
Carbon-Steel
Wire:
ASTM A 82/A 82M;
with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M,
Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat
washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions
indicated.
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" and as indicated:
B.
Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded between 2
layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
a.
May 14, 2014
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
042000 UNIT MASONRY
Page 4 of 11
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
2.8
Advanced Building Products Inc.; [Copper Fabric Flashing] [Copper
Sealtite 2000].
Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric ThruWall Flashing.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing.
Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper.
Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing.
York Manufacturing, Inc.; Multi-Flash 500.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.
B.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from [styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying
with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805] [or] [PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287,
Type PVC-65406] and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in
masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
2.9
MASONRY CLEANERS
A.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by
cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.10
A.
Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
EaCo Chem, Inc.
ProSoCo, Inc.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
May 14, 2014
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
042000 UNIT MASONRY
Page 5 of 11
B.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
1.
D.
For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and
natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1.
2.
Mix to match Architect's sample.
Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following
units:
a.
E.
Decorative CMUs.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1.
Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2.
Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day
compressive strength indicated, but not less that 2000 psi. (14MPa).
3.
Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to279 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install
cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
B.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
3.2
TOLERANCES
A.
Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1.
May 14, 2014
For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12
mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
042000 UNIT MASONRY
Page 6 of 11
2.
3.
B.
Lines and Levels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6
m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6
mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in
3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
Joints:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).
For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.
For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).
For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8
inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch (3 mm).
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
C.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D.
Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
May 14, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
042000 UNIT MASONRY
Page 7 of 11
3.4
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.
Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B.
Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.5
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a
minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1.
2.
3.
Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and
parapet walls.
Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous
reinforcement.
B.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D.
Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.6
ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE
A.
Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or
concrete to comply with the following:
1.
2.
May 14, 2014
Provide an open space not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide between masonry and
structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar
and other rigid materials.
Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
042000 UNIT MASONRY
Page 8 of 11
3.
3.7
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36
inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.
FLASHING
A.
General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to
downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B.
Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.8
Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into
masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and
turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.
Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to
top of metal drip edge.
Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A.
Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1.
2.
Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during
construction.
B.
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
1.
2.
May 14, 2014
Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 12.00 ft. The construction of high
lift grouting shall comply with DSA IR 21-2 and CBC Section 2103A.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
042000 UNIT MASONRY
Page 9 of 11
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to
perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified
requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B.
Inspections: Special inspections according to the Table 1704A.5.1 of the CBC.
1.
2.
3.
Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared mortar.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C.
Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D.
Testing Frequency: One set of tests (minimum of two core tests)for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq.
m) of wall area or portion thereof.
E.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for
compressive strength.
F.
Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to
ASTM C 780.
G.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test
mortar for compressive strength.
H.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
3.10
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1.
2.
3.
3.11
A.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes.
Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner.
Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed.
May 14, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
042000 UNIT MASONRY
Page 10 of 11
1.
B.
Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 042000
May 14, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
042000 UNIT MASONRY
Page 11 of 11
SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
1.2
Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design
loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal
framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
1.
For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Qualification data.
E.
Product test reports.
F.
Research/evaluation reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating
steel sheet complies with requirements.
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding
Code--Sheet Steel."
C.
AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the
Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions."
May 14, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Page 1 of 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel
products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not
less than 25 percent.
B.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
coating weight as follows:
1.
2.
2.2
Grade: ST50H (ST340H).
Coating: G90 (Z275).
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A.
Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated.
Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).
B.
Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched,
with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs.
C.
Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward
and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical
attachment to stud web.
D.
Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched,
with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement,
with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads.
E.
Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting
of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
2.3
FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A.
Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural
Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members,
unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
C.
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
May 14, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Page 2 of 5
D.
Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10
times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
E.
Mechanical Fasteners:
steel drill screws.
1.
2.4
ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping
Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
B.
Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404.
Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for
placement and hydration.
C.
Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.
D.
Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and
the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface
on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
B.
Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
B.
Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
C.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths.
D.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
May 14, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Page 3 of 5
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
E.
Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.
Independently frame both sides of joints.
F.
Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior
framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are
inaccessible on completion of framing work.
G.
Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard
punched openings.
H.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1.
3.3
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from
plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A.
Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to
supporting structure as indicated.
B.
Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as
follows:
1.
Stud Spacing: 16” O, C..
C.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D.
Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical
loads while providing lateral support.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Install single deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.
Install double deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.
Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to primary building structure.
Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not
more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1.
May 14, 2014
Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12
inches (305 mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet
straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and
thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to
stud webs or flanges.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Page 4 of 5
2.
3.
4.
F.
3.4
Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of
punched studs.
Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to
stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip
angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable
curtain-wall-framing system.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D.
Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
E.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.5
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 054000
May 14, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
Prefabricated building columns.
Shelf angles.
Metal ladders.
Ladder safety cages.
Metal floor plate[ and supports].
Structural-steel door frames.
Miscellaneous steel trim.
Metal bollards.
[Pipe] [Downspout] guards.
Abrasive metal [nosings] [treads] [and] [thresholds].
Loose bearing and leveling plates.
Loose steel lintels.
Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated
to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders[, including landings,] shall
withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in
ANSI A14.3.
C.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.
March 1, 2014
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
METAL
FABRICATIONS
Page 1 of 12
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
C.
Prefabricated building columns.
Metal nosings and treads.
Paint products.
Grout.
Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation
indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For primers, documentation indicating that
products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department
of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
D.
Samples: For each type and finish of extruded [nosing] [and] [tread].
E.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
FERROUS METALS
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than [25] <Insert number> percent.
B.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, [Type 304] [Type 316L].
D.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate:
ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
E.
Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
March 1, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
METAL
FABRICATIONS
Page 2 of 12
F.
Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate [with abrasive granules rolled into surface] [or]
[with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel].
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide
one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
IKG Industries, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac.
SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a W. S. Molnar company; SlipNOT.
<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.
G.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
H.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.
1.
2.
3.
J.
2.3
Size of Channels: [1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm)] [As indicated] <Insert size>.
Material:
Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, [commercial steel, Type B]
[structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230)], with G90 (Z275) coating; [0.108-inch (2.8mm)] [0.079-inch (2-mm)] [0.064-inch (1.6-mm)] nominal thickness.
Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, [commercial steel, Type B]
[structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230)]; [0.0966-inch (2.5-mm)] [0.0677-inch (1.7mm)] [0.0528-inch (1.35-mm)] minimum thickness; [unfinished] [coated with rustinhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel] [hot-dip galvanized after fabrication].
Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M.
NONFERROUS METALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.
B.
Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
C.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
D.
Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).
E.
Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400
(leaded semired brass).
F.
Nickel Silver Castings:
bronze).
2.4
ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide [Type 304] [Type 316] stainless-steel fasteners
for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.
March 1, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
METAL
FABRICATIONS
Page 3 of 12
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
B.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
C.
Post-Installed Anchors: [Torque-controlled expansion anchors] [or] [chemical anchors].
1.
2.
D.
2.5
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy [Group 1
(A1)] [Group 2 (A4)] stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts,
ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying
with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or
studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with
temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply
with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
B.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with [Section 099113 "Exterior Painting"and
Section 099123 "Interior Painting."] [Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."]
[Section 099113 "Exterior Painting,"Section 099123 "Interior Painting," and
Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."]
C.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
D.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide
one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
March 1, 2014
<Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name; product name or
designation>.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
METAL
FABRICATIONS
Page 4 of 12
E.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
F.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
G.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
H.
Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normalweight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20
MPa).
2.6
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections
that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction.
C.
Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes
indicated.
March 1, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
METAL
FABRICATIONS
Page 5 of 12
1.
D.
2.8
Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes
at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel
baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and
connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as
pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.
PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS
A.
General: Provide prefabricated building columns consisting of load-bearing structural-steel
members protected by concrete fireproofing encased in an outer non-load-bearing steel shell.
Fabricate connections to comply with details shown or as needed to suit type of structure
indicated.
B.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide prefabricated building columns listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for ratings indicated, based
on testing according to ASTM E 119.
1.
2.9
Fire-Resistance Rating: [4 hours] [3 hours] [2 hours] [As indicated].
SHELF ANGLES
A.
Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more
than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
B.
For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and
concrete.
C.
Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
D.
Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with [zinc-rich primer.] [primer specified in
Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."]
E.
Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-inplace concrete.
2.10
A.
METAL LADDERS
General:
1.
2.
B.
Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.
For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
Steel Ladders:
1.
March 1, 2014
Space siderails [16 inches (406 mm)] [18 inches (457 mm)] apart unless otherwise
indicated.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
METAL
FABRICATIONS
Page 6 of 12
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Space siderails of elevator pit ladders 12 inches (300 mm) apart.
Siderails: Continuous, [3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (9.5-by-64-mm)] [1/2-by-2-1/2-inch (12.7by-64-mm)] steel flat bars, with eased edges.
Rungs: [3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter] [3/4-inch- (19-mm-) square] [1-inch- (25-mm) diameter] [1-inch- (25-mm-) square] steel bars.
Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
Provide nonslip abrasive surfaces on top of each rung.
Galvanize [exterior ]ladders, including brackets and fasteners.
Prime [exterior ]ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with [zinc-rich primer.]
[primer specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."]
Aluminum Ladders:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
2.11
ACL Industries, Inc.
Alco-Lite Industrial Products.
Halliday Products.
O'Keeffe's Inc.
Precision Ladders, LLC.
Royalite Manufacturing, Inc.
Thompson Fabricating, LLC.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
Space siderails [16 inches (406 mm)] [18 inches (457 mm)] apart unless otherwise
indicated.
Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches
(64 mm) deep, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick.
Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep and not less than
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with ribbed tread surfaces.
LADDER SAFETY CAGES
A.
Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with
stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet (6 m) o.c.
Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. between
primary hoops.
C.
Galvanize steel ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners.
D.
Prime steel ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners, with [zinc-rich primer.]
[primer specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."]
March 1, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
METAL
FABRICATIONS
Page 7 of 12
2.12
A.
METAL FLOOR PLATE
Fabricate from [rolled-steel floor] [rolled-stainless-steel floor] [rolled-aluminum-alloy
tread] [abrasive-surface floor] plate.
1.
Thickness: [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)] [3/16 inch (4.8 mm)] [1/4 inch (6.4 mm)] [5/16 inch (8
mm)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)] [As indicated].
B.
Provide [steel] [stainless-steel] [aluminum] angle supports as indicated.
C.
Provide flush [steel] [stainless-steel] [aluminum] bar drop handles for lifting removable
sections, one at each end of each section.
2.13
A.
STRUCTURAL-STEEL DOOR FRAMES
Fabricate structural-steel door frames from steel shapes fully welded together, with 5/8-by-11/2-inch (16-by-38-mm) steel channel stops. Plug-weld built-up members and continuously
weld exposed joints. Reinforce frames and drill and tap as necessary to accept finish hardware.
1.
Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for securing door frames into adjoining
concrete or masonry.
B.
Galvanize [exterior ]steel frames.
C.
Prime [exterior ]steel frames with [zinc-rich primer.] [primer specified in Section 099600
"High-Performance Coatings."]
2.14
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible.
B.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
other work.
C.
Galvanize [exterior ]miscellaneous steel trim.
D.
Prime [exterior ]miscellaneous steel trim with [zinc-rich primer.] [primer specified in
Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."]
2.15
A.
METAL BOLLARDS
Fabricate metal bollards from [Schedule 40 steel pipe] [Schedule 80 steel pipe] [1/4-inch (6.4mm) wall-thickness rectangular steel tubing] [steel shapes, as indicated].
1.
March 1, 2014
Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
METAL
FABRICATIONS
Page 8 of 12
B.
Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab.
Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchor bolts.
C.
Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel [pipe] [or] [tubing] with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm) thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve.
D.
Prime bollards with [zinc-rich primer.] [primer specified in Section 099600 "HighPerformance Coatings."]
2.16
[PIPE] [DOWNSPOUT] GUARDS
A.
Fabricate [pipe] [downspout] guards from 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick by 12-inch- (300-mm-)
wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe
with 2-inch (50-mm) clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch
(19-mm) anchor bolts.
B.
Galvanize [pipe] [downspout] guards.
C.
Prime [pipe] [downspout] guards with [zinc-rich primer.] [primer specified in
Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."]
2.17
A.
ABRASIVE METAL [NOSINGS] [TREADS] [AND] [THRESHOLDS]
Cast-Metal Units: Cast [iron] [aluminum] [bronze (leaded red or semired brass)] [nickel
silver (leaded nickel bronze)], with an integral-abrasive, as-cast finish.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
American Safety Tread Co., Inc.
Balco Inc.
Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc.
Granite State Casting Co.
Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc.
Wooster Products Inc.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
Extruded Units: [Aluminum] [Bronze], with abrasive filler in an epoxy-resin binder.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
March 1, 2014
ACL Industries, Inc.
American Safety Tread Co., Inc.
Amstep Products.
Armstrong Products, Inc.
Balco Inc.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
METAL
FABRICATIONS
Page 9 of 12
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
Granite State Casting Co.
Wooster Products Inc.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above
aluminum extrusion.
Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs.
C.
Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard
with manufacturer.
D.
Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate holes not more than 4 inches (100 mm)
from ends and not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.
E.
Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units.
F.
Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units.
2.18
A.
2.19
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A.
Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B.
Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
C.
Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with [zinc-rich primer.] [primer specified in
Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."]
2.20
A.
2.21
STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
March 1, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
METAL
FABRICATIONS
Page 10 of 12
2.22
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
B.
Shop prime iron and steel items[ not indicated to be galvanized] unless they are to be
embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with [SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."] [SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."] [requirements
indicated below:]
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Shop prime with [universal shop primer] [primers specified in Section 099113
"Exterior Painting"Section 099123 "Interior Painting"] unless [zinc-rich primer is]
[primers specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" are] indicated.
Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
March 1, 2014
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
METAL
FABRICATIONS
Page 11 of 12
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
3.2
INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A.
Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before
installing.
B.
Anchor bollards to existing construction with [expansion anchors] [anchor bolts] [through
bolts]. Provide four 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Anchor bollards in concrete [with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete] [in
formed or core-drilled holes]. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout.
D.
Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for
consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
E.
Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
3.3
INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A.
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have
been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
C.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055000
March 1, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
METAL
FABRICATIONS
Page 12 of 12
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.2
Framing with dimension lumber.
Framing with engineered wood products.
Shear wall panels.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
Wood furring and grounds.
Wood sleepers.
Plywood backing panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
1.
2.
1.3
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
B.
Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
March 1, 2014
Wood-preservative-treated wood.
Fire-retardant-treated wood.
Engineered wood products.
Shear panels.
Power-driven fasteners.
Powder-actuated fasteners.
Expansion anchors.
Metal framing anchors.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS GP
061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 1 of 8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Certified Wood: Materials shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an
FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and
Criteria for Forest Stewardship and for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Dimension lumber framing.
Laminated-veneer lumber.
Parallel-strand lumber.
Prefabricated wood I-joists.
Rim boards.
Miscellaneous lumber.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and
provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)
thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) unless otherwise
indicated.
D.
Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1.
2.2
Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1.
March 1, 2014
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS GP
061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 2 of 8
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in
crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame
spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with
the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at
any time during the test.
1.
2.
Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for
fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
C.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
D.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing
agency.
E.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
March 1, 2014
Framing for raised platforms.
Framing for stages.
Concealed blocking.
Framing for non-load-bearing partitions.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS GP
061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 3 of 8
5.
6.
7.
2.4
Framing for non-load-bearing exterior walls.
Roof construction.
Plywood backing panels.
DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A.
Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.
1.
2.
Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing.
Species:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: No. 1 grade.
1.
2.
C.
Application: Framing other than interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing.
Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom
from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance,
including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane.
1.
2.
2.5
Application: Framing other than interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing.
Species:
a.
Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
b.
Douglas fir-south; WWPA.
c.
Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.
Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Any species and grade with a
modulus of elasticity of at least 1,500,000 psi (10 350 MPa) and an extreme fiber stress in
bending of at least 1000 psi (6.9 MPa) for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and 12-inch
nominal (286-mm actual) width for single-member use.
1.
D.
Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
Northern species; NLGA.
Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
Application: Exposed exterior framing indicated to receive a stained or natural finish.
Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type.
ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A.
Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
B.
Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain
primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and
manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
March 1, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS GP
061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 4 of 8
1.
2.
C.
Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural
composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges.
Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established
and monitored according to ASTM D 5055.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or
DOC PS 2, Exposure 1.
Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those
indicated.
Provide units complying with APA PRI-400, factory marked with APA trademark
indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and
compliance with APA standard.
Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists
at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists.
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2250 psi (15.5 MPa) for 12-inch nominal(286-mm actual-) depth members.
Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,800,000 psi (12 400 MPa).
Material: Product made from any combination solid lumber, wood strands, and veneers.
Thickness: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board grade,
factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with
APA standard.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Blocking.
Nailers.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Cants.
Furring.
Grounds.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.
C.
For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the
following species and grades:
1.
Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.7
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
March 1, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS GP
061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 5 of 8
1.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M] [of Type 304 stainless steel.
B.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.8
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements and valid ICC Evaluation
Report, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
KC Metals Products, Inc.
2.
Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
3.
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
4.
USP Structural Connectors.
C.
Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published
values shall be determined from ICC Evaluation Report.
D.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet:
Hot-dip, zinc-coated
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1.
E.
sheet
complying
with
Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), highstrength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B
(HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)
thick.
1.
2.9
steel
Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill
sealer; 1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
B.
Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
March 1, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS GP
061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 6 of 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing
agency exposed to view.
E.
Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
G.
Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
I.
Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
J.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and TwoFamily Dwellings.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B.
Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes
sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
March 1, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS GP
061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 7 of 8
END OF SECTION 061000
March 1, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS GP
061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 8 of 8
SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative
laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
C.
Samples:
1.
2.
1.3
Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
1.5
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
May 13, 2014
DPS, MLK 6 - 12 and Noel MS
064116 – PLASTIC-LAMINATEFACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
Page 1 of 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1.
Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that
woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
B.
Grade: Premium.
C.
Regional Materials: Plastic-laminate cabinets shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km)
of Project site.
D.
Certified Wood: Plastic-laminate cabinets shall be made from wood products certified as "FSC
Pure" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and
FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."
E.
Type of Construction: Face frame.
F.
Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
G.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1.
H.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
I.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Formica Corporation.
b.
Lamin-Art, Inc.
c.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
May 13, 2014
Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3,
Grade VGS.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge
banding.
Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.
DPS, MLK 6 - 12 and Noel MS
064116 – PLASTIC-LAMINATEFACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
Page 2 of 5
J.
Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and
drawers unless located directly under tops.
K.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following
categories:
a.
2.2
Solid colors with core same color as surface, matte finish.
WOOD MATERIALS
A.
Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
2.3
Wood Moisture Content: 4 to 9 percent.
Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced
quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
2.
Particleboard: NOT ALLOWED.
3.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.
4.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.
5.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused,
melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of
NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated,
use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing
identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
1.
B.
Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of
qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that
will be concealed from view after installation.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less
when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion
when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more
than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
May 13, 2014
DPS, MLK 6 - 12 and Noel MS
064116 – PLASTIC-LAMINATEFACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
Page 3 of 5
1.
2.4
Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and
15 percent, respectively.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive
Specification)."
B.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type):
opening, self-closing.
C.
Pulls: Semi-recessed ABS plastic door and drawer pulls with 2 screw interior attachment.
D.
Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
E.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.
F.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
1.
2.
BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of
Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-platedsteel ball-bearing slides.
For drawers provide Grade 1HD-100.
G.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121, match district keying..
H.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041, match district keying.
I.
Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
J.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1.
2.5
Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
B.
Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
May 13, 2014
DPS, MLK 6 - 12 and Noel MS
064116 – PLASTIC-LAMINATEFACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
Page 4 of 5
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
B.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work,
and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to
produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and
burrs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B.
Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
C.
Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates as detailed.
Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing.
D.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
END OF SECTION 064116
May 13, 2014
DPS, MLK 6 - 12 and Noel MS
064116 – PLASTIC-LAMINATEFACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Silicone joint sealants.
Urethane joint sealants.
Latex joint sealants.
Preformed joint sealants.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.
C.
Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
Joint-sealant formulation.
Joint-sealant color.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product test reports.
B.
Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion test reports.
C.
Preconstruction field-adhesion test reports.
D.
Field-adhesion test reports.
E.
Warranties.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing
indicated.
B.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
079200 – JOINT SEALANTS
Page 1 of 5
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants:
Sealants and sealant primers used inside the
weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B.
Low-Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing
system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C.
Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
1.
Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints
that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone
testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water,
unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous
substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
E.
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
2.2
SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
May 13, 2014
BASF Building Systems.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
079200 – JOINT SEALANTS
Page 2 of 5
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
2.3
Dow Corning Corporation.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones.
May National Associates, Inc.
Pecora Corporation.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.
Tremco Incorporated.
Type: Single component (S).
Grade: nonsag (NS).
URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
3.
2.4
BASF Building Systems.
Bostik, Inc.
Lymtal, International, Inc.
May National Associates, Inc.
Pacific Polymers International, Inc.
Pecora Corporation.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.
Tremco Incorporated.
Type: Single component (S).
Grade: Nonsag (NS).
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Latex Joint Sealant:
Grade NF.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
May 13, 2014
Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
BASF Building Systems.
Bostik, Inc.
May National Associates, Inc.
Pecora Corporation.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
Tremco Incorporated.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
079200 – JOINT SEALANTS
Page 3 of 5
2.5
JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance.
B.
Bond-Breaker Tape:
manufacturer.
2.6
Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
079200 – JOINT SEALANTS
Page 4 of 5
B.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
C.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
D.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
F.
Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written
recommendations.
G.
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
END OF SECTION 079200
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
079200 – JOINT SEALANTS
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned elevations including field measurements including
undercuts, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and
other details.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
E.
Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Mesker Door Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet:
applications.
B.
Frame Anchors:
ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
May 13, 2014
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
081113-HOLLOW METAL DOORS
AND FRAMES
Page 1 of 6
1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
C.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
D.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
E.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.
F.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.
2.3
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A.
General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.
2.
Design: Flush panel.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.
3.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50
mm).
Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush top and inverted bottom 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm) thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
4.
5.
B.
Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1.
Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).
C.
Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
2.4
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A.
General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
B.
Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1.
2.
C.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
081113-HOLLOW METAL DOORS
AND FRAMES
Page 2 of 6
2.5
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
B.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick,
and as follows:
1.
2.6
Masonry Type: As detailed.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
HOLLOW METAL PANELS
A.
2.7
Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for
adjoining hollow metal work.
STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A.
2.8
Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16
mm) high unless otherwise indicated.
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.9
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
FABRICATION
A.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
B.
Hollow Metal Doors:
C.
1.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in
top edges of doors against water penetration.
2.
Exterior Doors: Provide inverted channel flush top edge of same material and thickness
as door face.
Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or
angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1.
2.
3.
May 13, 2014
Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
081113-HOLLOW METAL DOORS
AND FRAMES
Page 3 of 6
4.
5.
6.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
7.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.
a.
D.
3.
A.
Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware (new and existing) according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished
as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1.
2.
2.10
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1)
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
2)
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high.
3)
Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
STEEL FINISHES
Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1.
Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
May 13, 2014
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
081113-HOLLOW METAL DOORS
AND FRAMES
Page 4 of 6
c.
d.
2.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a.
3.
4.
Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.2
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch (19 mm).
Install and fit hollow metal doors with all hardware. Adjust fit then remove all hardware
for finish painting. Reinstall hardware after finish painting.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
C.
Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 081113
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
081113-HOLLOW METAL DOORS
AND FRAMES
Page 5 of 6
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a.
b.
B.
1.2
Swinging doors.
Overhead Doors.
Door Hardware Schedule notes:
1.
The Door Hardware Schedule lists existing hardware that is to be removed from existing
doors scheduled for replacement and reinstalled in the new doors and frames. This
information is based on records from the original project and must be field verified
during submittal preparation.
2.
The Door Hardware Schedule lists new hardware that is to be installed in the new doors
and frames where the specific item of hardware from the existing door is not to be reused.
(These include but are not limited to exit devices and locksets where the security function
is to be changed, hinges, overhead stops/holders and closers.) These items must be
coordinated with other hardware and field verified during submittal preparation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
C.
Other Action Submittals:
1.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing
fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
a.
b.
Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as
in the Contract Documents.
Content: Include the following information for new hardware:
1)
2)
May 13, 2014
Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each
door and frame.
Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor
plans and to door and frame schedule.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 1 of 13
3)
c.
Content: Include the following information for existing hardware to be reused:
1)
2)
3)
2.
1.3
Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,
function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.
Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size and material of each
door and frame.
Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor
plans and to door and frame schedule.
Confirmation of size, function and finish of each existing door hardware
product to be removed from existing door and door frame and installed in
new door and frame. Include confirmation of field verification.
Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's
final keying instructions for locks. See 2.4 for details of lock cylinders.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved
by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the
course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and
keying.
B.
Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing
consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows:
1.
For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
C.
Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 5 lbf (67 N) to release the latch.
Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
D.
Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with
CBC 2010 edition Sections 1118B.2.1, 1133B.2.5.2 and 1008.1.9
1.
2.
Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N). Hardware shall be
centered between 30” and 44” above the floor. (Exit devices shall be centered between
36” and 44” above the floor.)
Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a.
3.
4.
May 13, 2014
Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.
Provide thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than
1/2 inch (13 mm) high and as detailed.
Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured
to the leading edge of the door.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 2 of 13
E.
1.4
Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
a.
Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
b.
Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A.
B.
Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article
to comply with requirements in this Section.
1.
Note: Schedule lists existing hardware items to be removed from existing doors and
frames to be installed in new doors and frames. Schedule also lists new hardware to be
furnished and installed in new doors and frames.
2.
Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named
manufacturers' products.
Manufacture’s abbreviations of listed hardware:
[BES] BEST
[PEM] PEMKO
[PRE] PRECISION
[TRI] TRIMCO
2.2
HINGES
A.
Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollowmetal doors and hollow-metal frames.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 3 of 13
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following to match existing hardware on this campus:
a.
b.
2.3
McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Extra Existing hinges from removed doors and frames to be salvaged . See sec
024119.1.2.B.
MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A.
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with
requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended
to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
B.
Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass
parts; Series 8200.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following to match the existing hardware at this campus:
a.
C.
2.4
BEST.
Extra existing Locksets and Latches removed from door to be removed and to be salvaged see
024119.1.2.B.
EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS
A.
Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following to match the existing hardware at this campus:
a.
2.5
PRECISION
LOCK CYLINDERS
A.
Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel
silver.
1.
Product: Provide product indicated on schedule or to match existing at this campus by
the following:
a.
B.
Best
Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.
Provide 10 construction master keys.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 4 of 13
2.6
KEYING
A.
Keying System:
Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28,
Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.
1.
Existing System:
a.
b.
B.
Keys: Nickel silver alloy.
1.
Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include
the following notation:
a.
2.
3.
Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." Other Information to be furnished by Owner.
Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:
a.
2.7
Grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.
Key way to match existing, AB 247358 bitting.
Cylinder Change Keys: Three.
Final keying by district locksmith.
SURFACE CLOSERS
A.
Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and
latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door,
exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable
to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following to match existing at this campus:
a.
B.
2.8
LCN
Coordinate relocated closers with new surface mounted OH stops/closers and provide new arms
configured to allow required clearance.
DOOR GASKETING
A.
Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu.
m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to
ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily
available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
1.
May 13, 2014
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on schedule to match existing on this campus by the following:
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 5 of 13
a.
2.9
Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
THRESHOLDS
A.
Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on schedule to match existing on this campus by the following:
a.
2.10
A.
METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick
stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on schedule to match existing at this campus by the following:
a.
2.11
A.
Trimco.
FABRICATION
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared
for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially
recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not
permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door
hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.12
Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means
of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door
and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
FINISHES
A.
Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 6 of 13
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated on Drawings and to comply
with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1.
B.
Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install
surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1.
2.
3.
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
See requirements for removal and reinstallation in 081113 Hallow Metal Doors and
Frames.
C.
Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than
the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
D.
Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction
period.
1.
Furnish permanent cores to Owner for keying and installation.
E.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
F.
Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
G.
Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
H.
Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as
intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent
Inspector to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 7 of 13
3.3
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A.
B.
C.
D.
Door Hardware Set No. 1 (All new Hardware)
1.
Locations: Doors 1, 4, 5, and 9
Qty
Item
Product
Finish
4 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 SET
1 EA
1 EA
Hinge
Entry Lock
Perm Mort Cyl
Pull
Closer/Stop/HLDR
Seal
Sweep
Threshold
T4A3386-4.5 X4.5-NRP
8205-LNL (KA) (Less Keys) (ANSI F04)
41 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
1096HA (SARG 8200-LNL-2 ¾” BS)
351-CPSH
315CR-36” X 94”
18062CNB-36”
158A-FHSL25-36”
626 MCK
626 SAR
626 SAR
630 TRI
689 SAR
628 PEM
628 PEM
719 PEM
Door Hardware Set No. 2 (All new Hardware)
1.
Locations: Doors 2 and 6
Qty
Item
Product
Finish
4 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 SET
1 EA
1 EA
Hinge
Storeroom Lock
Perm Mort Cyl
Pull
Seal
Sweep
Threshold
T4A3386-4.5 X4.5-NRP
8206-LNL (KA) (Less Keys)
41 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
1096HA (SARG 8200-LNL-2 ¾” BS)
315CR-36” X 94”
18062CNB-36”
158A-FHSL25-36”
626 MCK
626 SAR
626 SAR
630 TRI
628 PEM
628 PEM
719 PEM
Door Hardware Set No. 3
1.
Locations: Doors 3, 7, and 8
Qty
Item
Product
Finish
1 SET
Weatherseals
New by original door manufacture (see also section 083323)
Door Hardware Set No. 4
1.
Locations: Door D.1, D.2 and D.4
Qty
Item
Product
Finish
a.
Existing hardware to be removed from existing door and frame and installed in new door
and frame:
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
May 13, 2014
Holdback Lock
Perm Mort Cyl
Perm Mort Cyl
Push Plate
Pull
Closer
36-8292-LNL (KA) (Less Keys)
41 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
41-13-0665 (AB Keyway-‘1’ Bitted)
1001-11-SHS
1096HA-SHS (SARG 8200-LNL-2 ¾” BS)
36-351-P10
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
626 SAR
626 SAR
626 SAR
630 TRI
630 TRI
689 SAR
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 8 of 13
(Provide new Covers for Closers at D.1 and D.2)
1 EA
Kick Plate
K0050-SHS-10” x 34”
1 SET Seal
315CR-36” X 94”
1 EA
Sweep
18062CNB-36”
1 EA
Threshold
158A-FHSL25-36”
1 EA
Sign
754 – Girls (at D.1 & D.2)
1 EA
Sign
753 – Boys (at D.3)
1 EA
Drip Cap
346C-40” (at D.1)
b.
630 TRI
628 PEM
628 PEM
719 PEM
Blu TRI
Blu TRI
628 PEM
New Hardware to be provided and installed as part of Set 4:
1 SET
Anchor Hinge
TA 392 – 5 x 4.5 (Hand to Suit)
Includes anchor hinge and (2) 5 x 4.5 full mortise hinges.
626 MCK
1 EA
OH Stop / Holder
689 SAR
36*1793H (Template @ 90 Deg)
Also provide and install at Door D.4:
1 EA
1 EA
E.
Sweep
OH Stop / Holder
628 PEM
626 SAR
Door Hardware Set No. 5
1.
Locations: Door D.3
Qty
a.
Item
Product
b.
1 EA
Finish
Existing hardware to be removed from existing door and frame and installed
3(of4)EA Hinge
1EA
Storeroom Lock
1 EA
Perm Mort Cyl
1 EA
Closer / Stop
1 SET Seal
1 EA
Threshold
1 EA
Sign
F.
18062 CNB-36”
36* 698H (template @ 90 Deg0
T4A3386-4.5 X4.5-NRP
8204-LNL (KA) (Less Keys)
41 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
351 CPS
316APK-36” X 84”
271A-FHSL25-36”
753-Boys
626 MCK
626 SAR
626 SAR
689 SAR
719 PEM
719 PEM
Blu TRI
New Hardware to be provided and installed as part of set 5:
Anchor Hinge
TA 392 – 5 x 4.5 (Hand to Suit)
Includes anchor hinge and (2) 5 x 4.5 full mortise hinges.
626 MCK
Door Hardware Set No. 6 (and 6A as noted)
1.
Locations for Hardware Set No. 6: Doors D.11,D.12,
2.
Locations for Hardware Set No. 6A: Doors D.6, D.7, D.8, D.9, D.21(sim) and D.22 (sim).
Qty
Item
Product
Finish
Existing hardware to be removed from existing door and frame and installed
6(of 8)EA Hinge
May 13, 2014
T4A3786-5 X4.5-NRP
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
652 MCK
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 9 of 13
1EA
1EA
Exit Device
43-12-NB8710J (94” / 37 “ AFF)
630 SAR
Exit Device
43-12-NB8713J –ETL (94”/ 37“AFF) (KA) 630 SAR
(Reinstall existing exit devices at Hardware Set No. 6. Provide new exit device per below
at Hardware Set 6A.)
1 EA
Perm Mort Cyl
41 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
2EA
Closer
351-P10
689 SAR
2EA
Kick Plate
K0050-10” x 37”
630 TRI
1 SET MTG Stile Seal/AST 2/18061CP-94”
628 PEM
1 SET Seal
316APK-76” X 94”
719 PEM
1 EA
Threshold
276AX276A (weld to 12”)- FHSL25-NO DRI 719 PEM
New Hardware to be provided and installed as part of set 6 and 6A:
2 EA
Anchor Hinge
TA 392 – 5 x 4.5 (L and R Hand)
2EA
OH Stop
1793S (Template @ 90 Deg)
652 MCK
689 SAR
Also provide and install the following at the door indicated HW Set 6 or 6A:
D.7, New exit device on passive leaf
D.9, New O.H. Stop
D.10, New Seals
D.21, New mtg. Stile seals
D.22, New mortise cylinder (inside existing is broken)
At HW Set 6A provide new exit devices with security function:
1EA
Exit Device
43-12-NB8966J –ETL (94”/ 37“AFF) (KA)
G.
630 SAR
Door Hardware Set No. 7
1.
Locations for Hardware Set 7: Doors D.10, D.13, D,14, D.17,
2.
Locations for Hardware Set 7A: D.5(sim), D.15(sim), and D.16(sim)
Qty
Item
Product
Finish
Existing hardware to be removed from existing door and frame and installed:
6(of 8)EA Hinge
T4A3386-5 X4.5-NRP
652 MCK
1EA
REM Mullion
L980S-94” (KA) (Less Keys)
600 SAR
1EA
Mull Storage Brkt 98-2579
SAR
1EA
Exit Device
43-16-8804J-Less Trim (KA) (Less Keys)
630 SAR
1EA
Exit Device
43-16-8810J (KA) (Less Keys)
630 SAR
(Reinstall existing exit devices at Hardware Set No. 7. Provide new exit device per below
at Hardware Set 7A.)
1EA
Temp Rim Cyl
34 (KA) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
1 EA
Perm Rim Cyl
34 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
1 EA
Perm Mort Cyl
41 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
2 EA
Perm Mort Cyl
41 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
1EA
Pull
1097HA-SP (SARG 8800-3 1/8” BS)
630 TRI
1EA
Pull
1097HA-SP-NC (SARG 8800-3 1/8” BS)
630 TRI
2EA
Closer
351-P10
689 SAR
2EA
Kick Plate
K0050-10” x 36”
630 TRI
2 SET
Seal
315CR-38” X 94”
628 PEM
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 10 of 13
2EA
1EA
1 EA
Sweep
Drip Cap
Threshold
18062CNB-38”
346C-80”
158A-FHSL25-76”
628 PEM
628 PEM
719 PEM
New Hardware to be provided and installed as part of HW Set 7 and HW Set 7A:
2 EA
Anchor Hinge
TA 392 – 5 x 4.5 (L and R Hand)
652 MCK
2EA
OH Stop/Holder 1793H (Template @ 90 Deg)
689 SAR
Also provide and install at the door indicated as part of HW Set 7 and HW Set 7A:
D.5, New Sweeps and Seals
D.17, New Seals
At HW Set 7A provide new exit device with security function:
1EA
Exit Device
43-16-8966J-Less Trim (KA) (Less Keys)
H.
630 SAR
Door Hardware Set No. 8
1.
Locations: Door D.23
Qty
Item
Product
Finish
Existing hardware to be removed from existing door and frame and installed:
8EA
1EA
1EA
1EA
1EA
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
1EA
1EA
2EA
2EA
2 SET
2EA
1EA
1 EA
Hinge
REM Mullion
Mull Storage Brkt
Exit Device
Temp Rim Cyl
Perm Rim Cyl
Perm Mort Cyl
Perm Mort Cyl
Pull
Pull
Closer
Kick Plate
Seal
Sweep
Drip Cap
Threshold
T4A3386-5 X4.5-NRP
L980S-94” (KA) (Less Keys)
98-2579
43-16-8810G (KA) (Less Keys)
34 (KA) (Less Keys)
34 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
41 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
41 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
1097HA-SP (SARG 8800-3 1/8” BS)
1097HA-SP-NC (SARG 8800-3 1/8” BS)
351-P10
K0050-10” x 46”
315CR-48” X 94”
18062CNB-48”
346C-100”
158A-FHSL25-96”
652 MCK
600 SAR
SAR
630 SAR
626 SAR
626 SAR
626 SAR
626 SAR
630 TRI
630 TRI
689 SAR
630 TRI
628 PEM
628 PEM
628 PEM
719 PEM
New Hardware to be provided and installed as part of set 8:
2 EA
2EA
1EA
I.
Anchor Hinge
OH Stop/Holder
Exit Device
TA 392 – 5 x 4.5 (L and R Hand)
1793H (Template @ 90 Deg)
43-16-8966J-Less Trim (KA) (Less Keys)
652 MCK
689 SAR
630 SAR
Door Hardware Set No. 9
1.
Locations: Door D.24
Qty
Item
Product
Finish
Existing hardware to be removed from existing door and frame and installed
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 11 of 13
4EA
1EA
1 EA
1 EA
1EA
1EA
1EA
1EA
Hinge
T4A3386-4.5 X 4.5-NRP
652 MCK
Temp Rim Cyl
34 (KA) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
Perm Rim Cyl
34 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
Perm Mort Cyl
41 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
Pull
1096HA-SP (SARG 8800-2 3/4” BS)
630 TRI
Closer/Holder
351-P10
689 SAR
Kick Plate
K0050-10” x 34”
630 TRI
Floor Stop
1209HA
630 TRI
(Note existing floor stops to remain if not in conflict with the work.)
1SET
Seal
315CR-36” X 94”
628 PEM
1EA
Sweep
18062CNB-36”
628 PEM
1 EA
Threshold
158A-FHSL25-36”
719 PEM
1 EA
Anchor Hinge
TA 392 – 5 x 4.5 (Hand to suit)
652 MCK
New Hardware to be provided and installed as part of set 9:
1 EA
Anchor Hinge
TA 392 – 5 x 4.5 (Hand to suit)
1EA
Exit Device
43-16-8966J-Less Trim (KA) (Less Keys)
J.
652 MCK
630 SAR
Door Hardware Set No. 10
1.
Locations: Door D.20, Door D.18 (sim.) and Door D.19 (sim.)
Qty
Item
Product
Finish
Existing hardware to be removed from existing door and frame and installed
3(of 4)EA Hinge
14A3386-4.5 X 4.5-NRP
626 MCK
1EA
Temp Rim Cyl
34 (KA) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
1 EA
Perm Rim Cyl
34 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
1 EA
Perm Mort Cyl
41 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
1EA
Pull
1096HA-SP (SARG 8800-2 3/4” BS)
630 TRI
1EA
Closer/Holder
351-P10
689 SAR
1EA
Kick Plate
K0050-10” x 34”
630 TRI
1EA
Floor Stop
1209HA
630 TRI
(Note existing floor stops to remain if not in conflict with the work.)
1SET
Seal
315CR-36” X 94”
628 PEM
1EA
Sweep
18062CNB-36”
628 PEM
1 EA
Drip Cap
346C-40”
628 PEM
1 EA
Threshold
158A-FHSL25-36”
719 PEM
New Hardware to be provided and installed as part of set 10:
1 EA
Anchor Hinge
TA 392 – 5 x 4.5 (Hand to suit)
1 EA
Sweep
18062CNB-36”
Replace missing screws in exit device.
652 MCK
628 PEM
At Doors D.18 and D.19: OH Stop, Not Floor Stop:
1EA
K.
OH Stop/Holder
1793H (Template @ 90 Deg)
689 SAR
Door Hardware Set No. 11
1.
Locations: Door D.25
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 12 of 13
Qty
Item
Product
Finish
Existing hardware to be removed from existing door and frame and installed
3(of 4)EA Hinge
T4A3386-4.5 X 4.5-NRP
626 MCK
1 EA
Perm Mort Cyl
41 (AB Keyway- ‘1’ Bitted) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
1 EA
Perm Mort Cyl
41-13-0665(AB Keyway-‘1’Bitted)(Less Keys) 626 SAR
1EA
Pull
1096HA-SP (SARG 8200-LNL-2 3/4” BS)
630 TRI
1EA
Closer/Holder
351-P10
689 SAR
1EA
Kick Plate
K0050-10” x 34”
630 TRI
1EA
Floor Stop
1209HA
630 TRI
1SET
Seal
315CR-36” X 94”
628 PEM
1EA
Sweep
18062CNB-36”
628 PEM
1 EA
Threshold
158A-FHSL25-36”
719 PEM
1 EA
Anchor Hinge
TA 392 – 5 x 4.5 (Hand to suit)
652 MCK
New Hardware to be provided and installed as part of set 11:
1 EA
Anchor Hinge
TA 392 – 5 x 4.5 (Hand to suit)
652 MCK
1 EA
Holdback Lock
36-8241-LNL (KA) (Less Keys)
626 SAR
END OF SECTION 087100
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
087100-DOOR HARDWARE
Page 13 of 13
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Interior gypsum board.
Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
Texture finishes.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C.
Low Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.2
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km)
of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
C.
Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km)
of Project site.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
Page 1 of 4
2.3
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
C.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
2.4
American Gypsum.
CertainTeed Corp.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
PABCO Gypsum.
Temple-Inland.
USG Corporation.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.5
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.6
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
Page 2 of 4
B.
2.7
Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
TEXTURE FINISHES
A.
Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B.
Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture.
National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray EM Texture.
USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture.
Texture: Orange Peel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these
locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
D.
Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used
for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
F.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1.
Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated] .
a.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."
G.
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove
from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise
damaged during drywall application.
H.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
Page 3 of 4
May 13, 2014
END OF SECTION 092900
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1.
Concrete masonry units (CMU).
2.
Steel.
3.
Galvanized metal.
4.
Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
5.
Wood.
6.
Gypsum board.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
D.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
E.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F.
Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G.
Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
May 13, 2014
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, including printed statement of
VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For paints and coatings, documentation
indicating that they meet the testing and product requirements of the California
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
Page 1 of 5
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C.
Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
D.
Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products
List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.4
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.5
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
b.
2.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category
indicated.
B.
Products: Provide 100% acrylic products.
2.2
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
Page 2 of 5
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
C.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and,
for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of
colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
D.
Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
E.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including premium colors.
BLOCK FILLERS
A.
Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Frazee Paint: 262 Acrylic Block Filler
Dunn Edwards: EFF-Stop Select ESSL00
Sherwin-Williams: S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25
METAL PRIMERS
A.
2.5
Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based:
1.
Frazee Paint: Ultra Tech C-309
2.
Dunn Edwards: Bloc-Rust BRPR00-1
3.
Sherwin-Williams: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Primer, B66-310 Series.
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A.
Latex, Interior, Gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees):
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
Page 3 of 5
1.
2.
3.
B.
Frazee Paint: 143 Mirroglide GL
Dunn Edwards: Spartashield SSHL60
Sherwin-Williams: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Gloss, B21-10200.
Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5).
1.
Frazee Paint: 131 Endurable S/G
2.
Dunn Edwards: Spartawall SWLL50
3.
Sherwin-Williams: S-W ProMar 200, B21-10200 Series.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Concrete: 12 percent.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
Wood: 15 percent.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
Plaster: 12 percent.
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
C.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
May 13, 2014
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
Page 4 of 5
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
B.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
B.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.5
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
1.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Steel Substrates:
1.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior.
Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5).
Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based.
Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss Level 6)
Gypsum Board Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior.
Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3).
END OF SECTION 099123
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Markerboards.
2.
Tackboards.
3.
Visual display conference units.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.3
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics and individual
panel weights for sliding visual display units.
Show locations of panel joints.
Include sections of typical trim members.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics.
C.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces and power-operated units to
include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units required for this Project.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 1 of 16
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
C.
1.6
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities.
Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.
Warranty Period: [50] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period: Life of the building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: ASTM A 424, enameling-grade steel, uncoated thickness
indicated; with exposed face and edges coated with primer, 1.7-to-2.5-mil- (0.043-to-0.064mm-) thick ground coat, and color cover coat; and with concealed face coated with primer and
1.7-to-2.5-mil- (0.043-to-0.064-mm-) thick ground coat.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide
one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:<Insert manufacturer's name; product
name or designation>.
a.
b.
B.
PolyVision Corporation, a Steelcase company; P3 ceramicsteel [Chalkboard]
[Markerboard].
<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.
Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet:
Porcelain-enamel-clad, ASTM A 463/A 463M, Type 1,
stretcher-leveled aluminized steel, with 0.024-inch (0.60-mm) uncoated thickness; with
porcelain-enamel coating fused to steel at approximately 1000 deg F (538 deg C).
1.
May 13, 2014
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide
one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 2 of 16
include, but are not limited to, the following]:<Insert manufacturer's name; product
name or designation>.
a.
b.
C.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.; [Vitracite Chalkboard] [LCS
Markerboard].
<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.
Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet with porcelain-enamel
coating fused to steel; uncoated thickness indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
D.
Melamine:
Thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with
LMA SAT-1.
E.
High-Pressure Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
F.
Natural Cork Sheet: Seamless, single-layer, compressed fine-grain cork sheet; bulletin board
quality; face sanded for natural finish[ with surface-burning characteristics indicated].
G.
Plastic-Impregnated Cork Sheet: Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting of
granulated cork, linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are mixed and calendared onto
fabric backing; with washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout[ with surface-burning
characteristics indicated].
H.
Vinyl Fabric: Mildew resistant, washable, complying with FS CCC-W-408D, Type II, [burlap
weave] <Insert texture or pattern>; weighing not less than 13 oz./sq. yd. (440 g/sq. m); with
surface-burning characteristics indicated.
I.
Polyester Fabric: Nondirectional weave, 100 percent polyester; weighing not less than 15
oz./sq. yd. (508 g/sq. m); with surface-burning characteristics indicated.
J.
Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered.
K.
Particleboard:
ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1[.][, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.][, that complies with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."]
L.
Fiberboard: ASTM C 208.
M.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.
N.
Laminating Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 3 of 16
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
2.2
CHALKBOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
Porcelain-Enamel Chalkboards:
Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated chalkboard
assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and [0.021-inch(0.53-mm-) thick,] [0.013-inch- (0.33-mm-) thick,] porcelain-enamel face sheet with matte
finish.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
A-1 Visual Systems.
AARCO Products, Inc.
ADP Lemco, Inc.
Aywon.
Bangor Cork Company, Inc.
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.
PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
Tri-Best Visual Display Products.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
Hardboard Core: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick; with [0.005-inch- (0.127-mm-) thick,
aluminum foil] [0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet] [0.0129-inch- (0.35mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet] backing.
Particleboard Core: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick; with [0.005-inch- (0.127-mm-) thick,
aluminum foil] [0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet] [0.0129-inch- (0.35mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet] backing.
Fiberboard Core: [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] thick; with [0.001-inch(0.025-mm-) thick, aluminum foil] [0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet]
[0.0129-inch- (0.35-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet] backing.
Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, with manufacturer's
standard moisture-barrier backing.
Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.
High-Pressure-Laminate Chalkboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated chalkboard
assembly of two-ply construction consisting of fiberboard core material and high-pressurelaminate writing surface.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
May 13, 2014
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 4 of 16
b.
c.
C.
Melamine Chalkboards: Fabricated from 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, sealed and primed hardboard
panels permanently bonded with melamine writing surface.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
Painted-Finish Chalkboards: Fabricated from[ two plies of] 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, treated,
tempered hardboard panels permanently surfaced with manufacturer's standard, heat-cured
organic coating formulated for chalk-receptive matte finish.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
AARCO Products, Inc.
Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard
assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and [0.021-inch(0.53-mm-) thick,] [0.013-inch- (0.33-mm-) thick,] porcelain-enamel face sheet with [high]
[low]-gloss finish.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
May 13, 2014
AARCO Products, Inc.
ADP Lemco, Inc.
Aywon.
Bangor Cork Company, Inc.
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Egan Visual Inc.
Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.
PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
Tri-Best Visual Display Products.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 5 of 16
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Hardboard Core: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick; with [0.005-inch- (0.127-mm-) thick,
aluminum foil] [0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet] [0.013-inch- (0.35mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet] backing.
Particleboard Core: [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] thick; with [0.005-inch(0.127-mm-) thick, aluminum foil] [0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet]
[0.013-inch- (0.35-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet] backing.
Fiberboard Core: [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] thick; with [0.001-inch(0.025-mm-) thick, aluminum foil] [0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet]
[0.013-inch- (0.35-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet] backing.
Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, with manufacturer's
standard moisture-barrier backing.
Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.
Melamine Markerboards: Fabricated from 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, sealed and primed
hardboard panels permanently bonded with melamine or another high-pressure-laminate writing
surface.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
High-Pressure-Laminate Markerboard Assembly: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated
chalkboard assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, fiberboard core
material, and high-pressure-laminate writing surface.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4
AARCO Products, Inc.
Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
EverProducts by Glenroy Inc.
Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
TACKBOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
May 13, 2014
A-1 Visual Systems.
AARCO Products, Inc.
ADP Lemco, Inc.
Aywon.
Bangor Cork Company, Inc.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 6 of 16
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Egan Visual Inc.
EverProducts by Glenroy Inc.
Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.
PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
Tri-Best Visual Display Products.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
B.
Natural-Cork Tackboard <Insert designation>: 1/16-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, natural cork sheet
factory laminated to [3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-)] [7/16-inch- (11-mm-)] thick fiberboard backing.
C.
Natural-Cork Tackboard <Insert designation>: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, natural cork sheet
factory laminated to 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick fiberboard backing.
D.
Natural-Cork Tackboard <Insert designation>: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, natural cork sheet
factory laminated to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick [hardboard] [particleboard] backing.
E.
Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Tackboard <Insert designation>: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, plasticimpregnated cork sheet factory laminated to 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick fiberboard backing.
F.
Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Tackboard <Insert designation>: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, plasticimpregnated cork sheet factory laminated to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick [hardboard]
[particleboard] backing.
G.
Vinyl-Fabric-Faced Tackboard <Insert designation>: Vinyl fabric factory laminated to [3/8inch- (9.5-mm-)] [7/16-inch- (11-mm-)] [1/2-inch- (13-mm-)] thick fiberboard backing.
H.
Vinyl-Fabric-Faced Tackboard <Insert designation>: 1/16-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, vinylfabric-faced cork sheet factory laminated to 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick fiberboard backing.
I.
Vinyl-Fabric-Faced Tackboard <Insert designation>: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, vinyl-fabricfaced cork sheet factory laminated to 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick fiberboard backing.
J.
Vinyl-Fabric-Faced Tackboard <Insert designation>: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, vinyl-fabricfaced cork sheet factory laminated to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick [hardboard] [particleboard]
backing.
K.
Polyester-Fabric-Faced Tackboard <Insert designation>: Polyester fabric factory laminated to
[3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-)] [1/2-inch- (13-mm-)] thick fiberboard backing.
L.
Polyester-Fabric-Faced Tackboard <Insert designation>:
1/16-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick,
polyester-fabric-faced cork sheet factory laminated to 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick fiberboard
backing.
M.
Polyester-Fabric-Faced Tackboard <Insert designation>: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, polyesterfabric-faced cork sheet factory laminated to 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick fiberboard backing.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 7 of 16
N.
Polyester-Fabric-Faced Tackboard <Insert designation>: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, polyesterfabric-faced cork sheet factory laminated to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick [hardboard]
[particleboard] backing.
O.
<Insert tackboard>.
2.5
SLIDING VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
A.
Horizontal-Sliding Visual Display Units: Factory-fabricated units consisting of extrudedaluminum tubular frame, fixed-rear visual display panel, aluminum-framed horizontal-sliding
panels, and extruded-aluminum fascia that conceals overhead sliding track; designed for
recessed mounting. Provide panels that operate smoothly without vibration or chatter.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
A-1 Visual Systems.
AARCO Products, Inc.
ADP Lemco, Inc.
Aywon.
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.
PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
Tri-Best Visual Display Products.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
Two-Track Units: Fabricate unit with fixed rear panel covering entire rear surface.
Provide two sliding panels, each equal to not less than one-half of overall length of unit.
Three-Track Units: Fabricate unit with fixed rear panel covering entire rear surface.
Provide three sliding panels, each equal to not less than [one-third] [one-half] of overall
length of unit.
Four-Track Units: Fabricate unit with fixed rear panel centered in and covering not less
than one-half of rear surface, and fixed front panel on each side of unit equal to not less
than one-quarter of overall length of unit. Provide four sliding panels, each equal to not
less than one-quarter of overall length of unit.
Sliding Panels: Fabricated from not less than [3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension>
thick, kraft-paper honeycomb core; designed to be rigid and to resist warpage.
Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, extruded-aluminum overhead track and channelshaped bottom guides; with two nylon ball-bearing carriers and two nylon rollers for each
sliding panel.
Vertical-Sliding Visual Display Units: Factory-fabricated units consisting of extrudedaluminum tubular frame, fixed-rear visual display panel, and aluminum-framed vertical-sliding
panels; designed for recessed mounting. Provide panels that operate smoothly without vibration
or chatter.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 8 of 16
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Type: Tubular frame on [four sides] [top and two sides, with sides extending to floor;
with kick panel to conceal sliding panels]. Unit shall be designed to support panels
independent of wall.
Two-Track Units: Fabricate unit with fixed rear panel covering entire rear surface.
Provide two sliding panels, each equal to not less than one-half of overall height of unit.
Three-Track Units: Fabricate unit with fixed rear panel covering entire rear surface.
Provide three sliding panels, each equal to not less than one-half of overall height of unit.
Four-Track Units: Fabricate unit with fixed rear panel centered in and covering not less
than one-half of rear surface. Provide four sliding panels, each equal to not less than onehalf of overall height of unit.
Sliding Panels: Fabricated from not less than [3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension>
thick, kraft-paper honeycomb core; designed to be rigid and to resist warpage.
a.
7.
8.
Fabricate sliding panels with 0.021-inch (0.53-mm) uncoated thickness, porcelainenamel face sheets.
Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, neoprene ball-bearing end rollers, four on each side
of each sliding panel. Counterbalance each sliding panel with lead counterweights
supported by steel aircraft cable over ball-bearing sheaves; with removable cover plate
for access to counterweights. Provide rubber bumpers at top and bottom for each sliding
panel.
Motorized Operation: Provide not less than one motor with gearhead reducers for each
sliding panel, mounted above visual display unit and connected to sliding panels with
steel aircraft cable. Provide removable cover plate for access to motor. Equip motors
with limit switches to automatically stop motor at each end of travel.
a.
b.
May 13, 2014
AARCO Products, Inc.
ADP Lemco, Inc.
Aywon.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.
PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
Tri-Best Visual Display Products.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
Electric Motors: UL approved or recognized, totally enclosed, complying with
NEMA MG 1, with thermal-overload protection; 1/15 hp, single phase, [110]
[220] V, 60 Hz.
Control Station: Three-position, [maintained] [momentary]-contact, switchoperated control station with open, close, and off functions; with NEMA ICS 6,
Type 1 enclosure. Provide [one] <Insert number> control station(s) for each
sliding panel unit.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 9 of 16
2.6
VISUAL DISPLAY CONFERENCE UNITS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Visual Display Conference Units: Factory-fabricated units consisting of hinged-door wood
cabinet with perimeter face frame, sides, and back; not less than 3-inch (75-mm) interior depth
and designed for surface wall mounting. Fabricate inside of cabinet and cabinet doors with
fixed visual display surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.7
A-1 Visual Systems.
AARCO Products, Inc.
ADP Lemco, Inc.
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Egan Visual Inc.
Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
Peter Pepper Products, Inc.
Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.
PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
Wood Cabinets: Fabricated from solid wood with integral, solid-wood markertray.
Fabricate hinged door panels with solid wood frame and wood-veneer exterior surface.
Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:
Cabinet and hinged door panels fabricated from
manufacturer's standard, high-pressure, plastic-laminate-finished panels; with integral
markertray.
Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, full-height continuous hinges[, wire door pulls,]
and door bumpers.
Projection Screens: Manufacturer's standard, pull-down, matte, white projection screen,
not less than 8 inches (200 mm) smaller in each direction than overall cabinet size, and
mounted above rear visual display surface.
Fluorescent Light: Manufacturer's standard, not less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, and
mounted above rear visual display surface.
[CHALKBOARD] [MARKERBOARD] [AND] [TACKBOARD] ACCESSORIES
A.
Aluminum Frames[ and Trim]: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) thick,
extruded aluminum; [standard size and shape] [slim size and standard shape] [of size and
shape indicated on Drawings] <Insert size and shape>.
1.
2.
B.
Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard, [snap-on trim with no visible screws or
exposed joints] [slip-on trim] [screw-on trim with Phillips flat-head screws].
Factory-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard.
Factory-Applied Wood Trim: [Red oak] [Walnut] [Manufacturer's standard species]
<Insert species>, not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick; [standard size and shape] [of size and
shape indicated on Drawings] <Insert size and shape>.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 10 of 16
C.
Field-Applied Wood Trim: Comply with requirements specified in [Section 062000 "Finish
Carpentry"] [Section 064023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork."]
D.
Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous.
1.
2.
E.
Map Rail: Provide the following accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.8
Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end
closures.
Solid Type: Extruded aluminum with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends.
Display Rail: Continuous and integral with map rail; fabricated from cork approximately
1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
End Stops: Located at each end of map rail.
Map Hooks: [Two] <Insert number> map hooks for every [48 inches (1219 mm)]
[1200 mm] <Insert dimension> of map rail or fraction thereof.
Map Hooks and Clips: [Two] <Insert number> map hooks with flexible metal clips for
every [48 inches (1219 mm)] [1200 mm] <Insert dimension> of map rail or fraction
thereof.
Flag Holder: [One] <Insert number> for each room.
Paper Holder: Extruded aluminum; designed to hold paper by clamping action.
FABRICATION
A.
Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and
backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible,
waterproof adhesive.
B.
Visual Display Boards: [Factory] [Field] assemble visual display boards unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
C.
Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and
accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual
display boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment.
Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate
with minimum number of joints, [balanced around center of board, as acceptable to
Architect] [as indicated on approved Shop Drawings].
Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint [spline] [H-trim] system between abutting
sections of [chalkboards] [markerboards].
Provide manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between [chalkboards]
[markerboards] [and] [tackboards] of combination units.
Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to
normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions
indicated.
Modular Visual Display Boards: Fabricated with integral panel clips attached to core material.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 11 of 16
E.
Aluminum Frames[ and Trim]: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to
a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure.
1.
2.9
Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual
display units at manufacturer's factory before shipment.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
B.
Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
C.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
2.10
A.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACE SCHEDULE
Visual Display Board <Insert drawing designation>: [Factory] [Field] assembled.
1.
Chalkboard: [Porcelain-enamel] [High-pressure laminate] [Melamine] [Paintedfinish] chalkboard assembly.
a.
2.
Markerboard: [Porcelain-enamel] [Melamine] [High-pressure-laminate] markerboard
assembly.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
May 13, 2014
Color: [White] [Beige] [Tan] [As indicated by manufacturer's designations]
[Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from full range of
industry colors].
Corners: [Square] [Rounded].
Width: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.
Height: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.
Mounting: [Wall] [Rail support system].
Mounting Height: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.
[Factory] [Field]-Applied Aluminum Trim: [Manufacturer's standard] <Insert
description> with [clear anodic] [color anodic] [baked-enamel] [powder-coat] finish.
a.
9.
Color: [Green] [Blue] [Brown] [Black] [As indicated by manufacturer's
designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from full
range of industry colors].
Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black] [As indicated
by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by
Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities].
[Factory] [Field]-Applied Wood Trim: <Insert species> with [opaque] [transparent]
finish.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 12 of 16
10.
11.
Factory-Applied Vinyl Trim: [Dark brown] [Black] [As indicated by manufacturer's
designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from full range
of industry colors].
Accessories:
a.
b.
B.
Chalktray: [Box] [Solid] type.
Map rail with [display rail] [end stops] [map hooks] [map hooks and clips]
[and] [flag holder].
Tackboard <Insert drawing designation>: [Factory] [Field] assembled.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tack Surface:
Tack Surface:
Tack Surface:
Tack Surface:
a.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's
sample] [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors].
Corners: [Square] [Rounded].
Width: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.
Height: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.
Mounting: [Wall] [Rail support system].
Mounting Height: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.
Edges: [Concealed by trim] [Wrapped with fabric].
a.
[Factory] [Field]-Applied Aluminum Trim: [Manufacturer's standard] <Insert
description> style, with [clear anodic] [color anodic] [baked-enamel] [powdercoat] finish.
1)
b.
C.
Natural-cork tackboard assembly <Insert designation>.
Plastic-impregnated-cork tackboard assembly <Insert designation>.
Vinyl-fabric-faced tackboard assembly <Insert designation>.
Polyester-fabric-faced tackboard assembly <Insert designation>.
Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black] [As
indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample]
[As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color
densities].
[Factory] [Field]-Applied Wood Trim:
[transparent] finish.
<Insert species> with [opaque]
Sliding Visual Display Unit <Insert drawing designation>:
1.
2.
Horizontal-Sliding Type: [Two-track unit] [Three-track unit] [Four-track unit]
[Four-track unit with two swinging doors].
Vertical-Sliding Type: [Two] [Three] [Four]-track unit with tubular frame on [four
sides] [top and two sides with kick panel].
a.
Fixed Rear Panel:
[Porcelain-enamel] [Painted-finish] [High-pressurelaminate] chalkboard assembly.
1)
May 13, 2014
Color: [Green] [Blue] [Brown] [Black] [As indicated by manufacturer's
designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from
full range of industry colors].
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 13 of 16
b.
Fixed Rear Panel: [Porcelain-enamel] [High-pressure-laminate] markerboard
assembly.
1)
c.
d.
e.
f.
Fixed Rear Panel: Natural-cork tackboard assembly <Insert designation>.
Fixed Rear Panel:
Plastic-impregnated-cork tackboard assembly <Insert
designation>.
Fixed Rear Panel: Vinyl-fabric-faced tackboard assembly <Insert designation>.
Fixed Rear Panel:
Polyester-fabric-faced tackboard assembly <Insert
designation>.
1)
g.
k.
l.
May 13, 2014
Color:
[White] [Beige] [Tan] [As indicated by manufacturer's
designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from
full range of industry colors].
Color:
[As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from full range of
industry colors].
Overall Width: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.
Overall Height: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.
Mounting Height: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.
[Factory] [Field]-Applied Aluminum Trim: [Manufacturer's standard] <Insert
description>.
a.
7.
[Porcelain-enamel] [High-pressure-laminate] markerboard
Sliding Panels: Natural-cork tackboard assembly <Insert designation>.
Sliding Panels:
Plastic-impregnated-cork tackboard assembly <Insert
designation>.
Sliding Panels: Vinyl-fabric-faced tackboard assembly <Insert designation>.
Sliding Panels: Polyester-fabric-faced tackboard assembly <Insert designation>.
1)
3.
4.
5.
6.
Color: [Green] [Blue] [Brown] [Black] [As indicated by manufacturer's
designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from
full range of industry colors].
Sliding Panels:
assembly.
1)
i.
j.
Color:
[As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from full range of
industry colors].
Sliding Panels: [Porcelain-enamel] [Painted-finish] [High-pressure-laminate]
chalkboard assembly.
1)
h.
Color:
[White] [Beige] [Tan] [As indicated by manufacturer's
designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from
full range of industry colors].
Finish: [Clear anodic] <Insert description>.
Accessories: [Chalktray] [Map rail] [Locks] [Easel pad clamps].
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 14 of 16
D.
Visual Display Conference Unit <Insert drawing designation>:
1.
2.
Cabinet Material: Solid [red oak] [walnut] [mahogany] <Insert species> with [natural
lacquered] [oiled] [stained] finish.
Cabinet Material: High-pressure plastic laminate.
a.
3.
Fixed Rear Panel:
assembly.
a.
4.
5.
6.
7.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
[Porcelain-enamel] [High-pressure-laminate] markerboard
Color: [White] [Beige] [Tan] [Match Architect's sample] [As indicated by
referencing manufacturer's designations] [As selected by Architect from full
range of industry colors].
Inside Surface of Doors: Natural-cork tackboard assembly <Insert designation>.
Inside Surface of Doors:
Plastic-impregnated-cork tackboard assembly <Insert
designation>.
Inside Surface of Doors: Vinyl-fabric-faced tackboard assembly <Insert designation>.
Inside Surface of Doors:
Polyester-fabric-faced tackboard assembly <Insert
designation>.
a.
8.
Color:
[Match Architect's sample] [As indicated by referencing
manufacturer's designations] [As selected by Architect from full range of
industry colors].
Color:
[Match Architect's sample] [As indicated by referencing
manufacturer's designations] [As selected by Architect from full range of
industry colors].
Inside Surface of Doors: [Porcelain-enamel] [High-pressure-laminate] markerboard
assembly, color to match fixed rear panel.
Corners: [Square] [Rounded].
Width: [48 inches (1219 mm)] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.
Height: [36 inches (914 mm)] [48 inches (1219 mm)] [72 inches (1829 mm)] [As
indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.
Mounting Height: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.
Accessories: [Flip-chart pad clamp] [Cylinder lock] [Pull-down projection screen]
[Fluorescent light].
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,
cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual
display surfaces and wall surfaces.
B.
General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on
Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 15 of 16
materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete
installation.
C.
Field-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate field-assembled units with grounds, trim,
and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.
1.
2.
Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate
with minimum number of joints, [balanced around center of board, as acceptable to
Architect] [as indicated on approved Shop Drawings].
Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint [spline] [H-trim] system between abutting
sections of [chalkboards] [markerboards].
D.
Visual Display Boards: Attach visual display boards to wall surfaces with [egg-size] <Insert
coverage> adhesive gobs at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c., horizontally and vertically.
E.
Visual Display Boards: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to
visual display boards with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Secure both top
and bottom of boards to walls.
1.
Field-Applied Aluminum Trim: Attach trim over edges of visual display boards and
conceal grounds and clips. Attach trim to boards with fasteners at not more than 24
inches (610 mm) o.c.
a.
2.
F.
Adjust panels to operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as
recommended by manufacturer.
Visual Display Conference Units: Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated
on Drawings, or if not indicated, at height indicated below. Attach to wall surface with
[fasteners through back of cabinet] [concealed brackets screwed to wall] [concealed wood
cleats screwed to wall].
1.
H.
Field-Applied Wood Trim: Install trim according to requirements in [Section 062000
"Finish Carpentry"] [Section 064023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork."]
Sliding Visual Display Units: Install units in recessed locations and at mounting heights
indicated. Attach to wall framing with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
1.
G.
Attach chalktrays to boards with fasteners at not more than 12 inches (300 mm)
o.c.
Mounting Height: [72 inches (1829 mm)] <Insert dimension> above finished floor to
top of cabinet.
Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one
cleaning label to visual display surface in each room. Cover and protect visual display surfaces.
END OF SECTION 101100
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
VISUAL DISPLAY
SURFACES
Page 16 of 16
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire
extinguishers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Operation and maintenance data.
C.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
1.4
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
May 13, 2014
Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Page 1 of 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
B.
2.2
Amerex Corporation.
Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.
Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
Fire End & Croker Corporation.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Moon-American.
Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc.
Potter Roemer LLC.
Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.
Instruction Labels:
Appendix B.
Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Clean-Agent Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 14-lb (6.4-kg) nominal capacity,
with HFC blend agent and inert material in enameled-steel container; with pressure-indicating
gage.
MOUNTING BRACKETS
A.
Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated
or red baked-enamel finish.
1.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the fire
extinguisher manufacturer.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1.
May 13, 2014
Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in
red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Page 2 of 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1.
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B.
Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
END OF SECTION 104416
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 220100 - BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
1.2
The General Conditions of the Contract and Supplementary Conditions of the General Contract
apply to work under this Division.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The design for this project is based on specific manufacturers and equipment as scheduled on
the drawings and listed in these Division 22 Specifications with specific model number
identifiers. Acceptable substitute manufacturers of equipment are listed in these specifications.
If any acceptable substitute manufacturer's equipment is used, the cost of any change in design
or construction required by their use shall be borne by the contractor. Contractor shall document
and submit all changes to design plans and schedules as a result of the use of substituted
equipment.
B.
If manufacturer's material or equipment is listed in Schedules or on Drawings, they are types to
be provided for establishment of size, capacity, grade, and quality. If other acceptable
manufacturers are used, cost of any change in construction required by their use shall be borne
by Contractor.
C.
Equipment shall conform to State and/or local Energy Conservation Standards.
D.
Execute and test all work per Underwriters, state and local codes, rules, and regulations
applicable to trade affected. Included are recommendations of NFPA, OSHA, and ASHRAE.
References to standards are latest revision of standard specified.
E.
All equipment and materials used in the distribution of domestic potable water shall be
approved and tested for such application with documented listings and labeling in accordance
with the latest edition of the [International Plumbing Code, Public Law 111-380 and
ANSI/NSF-61, Annex G].
1.3
INTENT AND INTERPRETATIONS
A.
It is the intent of these Drawings and Specifications to result in a complete plumbing installation
in complete accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances.
B.
Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required pipe,
offset, transition, etc. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specification or noted on the
Drawings, but which are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be
included.
C.
Drawings and specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for in either is binding as
though called for in both. The more stringent requirements shall govern.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220100-BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 8
D.
Drawings shall not be scaled for rough-in measurements or used as shop drawings. Where
drawings are required for these purposes or have to be made from field measurements, take the
necessary measurements and prepare the drawings.
E.
Symbols used on the Drawings are defined in the Legend on the Drawings. All symbols
indicated on the Legend may not necessarily be required for the project.
F.
“Provide” shall mean “furnish and install.” “Accepted” or “acceptable” denotes the work or
equipment item is in conformance with the design concept of the project and, in general,
complies with the pertinent information given in the Contract Documents.
G.
Prior to ordering equipment, determine that equipment will adequately pass through building
openings and passageways providing unobstructed access to final equipment location.
Equipment shall be manufactured and shipped in sections for assembly in final equipment
location when inadequate building openings and passageways limit access. Shop drawings and
submittals shall indicate sectionalized manufacturing of equipment.
H.
Before any work is installed, determine equipment will properly fit the space, required
clearances can be maintained and equipment can be located without interferences between
systems, with structural elements, or with the work of other trades.
I.
If conflicts are discovered in Contract Documents as work progresses, submit a set of drawings
marked with red pencil showing recommended modifications to the Architect for approval prior
to installation.
J.
The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of system components. However,
rearrangement will not be permitted without specific approval prior to installation.
K.
Provide incidental equipment such as tools, scaffolding, consumable items, testing equipment,
appliances and the like whether listed or not.
L.
Provide labor, fees, licenses, start-up and checkout services.
M.
In the event that any discrepancies of any kind exist or required items or details have been
omitted, notify the Architect in writing of such discrepancy or omission at least five days prior
to bid date. Failure to do so shall be construed as willingness to supply all necessary materials
and labor required for the proper completion of this work.
1.4
JOB CONDITIONS B
A.
Location, size, and type of equipment and material shown as existing are taken from existing
drawings and limited field survey. Verify exact conditions in field prior to start of construction.
B.
Before submitting bid, examine premises and become familiar with all existing conditions
which may affect cost. No allowance will subsequently be made for not following this
procedure.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220100-BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 8
C.
Not all piping and offsets, transitions, and multiple connections required to install the new work
into the available space are shown on the drawings. Field measure for exact requirements and
install accordingly.
D.
Confer, cooperate, and coordinate work with other trades. Coordinate ceiling cavity space
carefully with all trades. In event of conflict, install mechanical and electrical systems within
cavity space in following order of priority.
1.
Plumbing waste and vent piping.
2.
Roof drain piping.
3.
Ductwork.
4.
Electrical conduit and lighting.
5.
Domestic hot cold water and gas piping.
6.
Fire sprinkler piping.
E.
Where locations of devices and equipment are not specifically mentioned in the Specifications
or indicated on the Drawings, verify locations with Architect or Owner prior to rough-in.
F.
Submit large scale coordinated composite layouts showing both plan and elevation, piping,
ducts, and conduits in areas that appear congested. Check routing of work prior to fabrication.
Report conflicts to Architect.
G.
Provide carpentry, masonry, concrete and metal work required for work of this Division where
not specifically called for under other Sections.
1.5
PERMITS AND FEES
A.
1.6
Arrange and pay for all inspections, permits, licenses, certificates, and fees required in
connection with work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Conform to requirements of Division 01 and following paragraphs.
B.
All electronic submittal data shall be provided in separate Portable Document Format (pdf)
folders for each individual Division 22 specification section.
C.
All submittal data shall bear a unique submittal number. Submittal number shall consist of three
sets of numeric values. Submittal number shall be in the 22XXXX-XXX-XX format with the
first set of numbers representing the specification section, the second set of numbers
representing the submittal number for that particular specification section, and the final two
numbers representing the submittal number for that particular item. Original submittals shall
bear 01 as the final set of numbers, and re-submittals shall begin with 02 and follow with each
re-submittal.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220100-BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 8
D.
Submittals not conforming with the formats outlined above will be returned at the contractors
expense for re-submittal conforming with the above.
E.
Submittals shall include catalog cut-sheets, manufacturer's data sheets, written descriptions, and
specification sheets detailing the associated product, item, and assembly. Reference the Division
22 Sections for additional information and requirements specific to those sections.
1.
Resubmittals shall include information required above, along with reference to original
submittal section tab being corrected.
F.
Prior to ordering equipment or beginning installation work, assemble, prepare, and furnish
submittals required for project. Furnish submittals as required by individual sections of
specifications.
G.
Contractor shall thoroughly check subcontractors' or vendors' submittals and, after approving
them, submit them for review. Submittals that do not bear Contractor's review stamp or that do
not comply with all of the above requirements will be returned “Not Reviewed.”
H.
The purpose of submittals is to ensure Contractor understands design requirements and
demonstrates understanding by indicating and detailing intended materials, methods, and
installation practices. Submittals are not a method of requesting substitutions or deviation from
Specifications. If discrepancies between submittals and Contract Documents are discovered
either prior to or after submittals are reviewed, requirements of Contract Documents shall take
precedence. Submittals which are submitted, but which are not required by Contract
Documents, will be returned Not Reviewed.
I.
Review of submittals and action recommended as result of review is courtesy extended to
Contractor by Owner's representative. This review is intended to minimize delivery to job site
and installation of materials and equipment that do not meet intent of Construction Documents.
Submission of material for review does not alter Contractor's obligation to follow intent of
Construction Documents, nor Contractor's responsibility to comply therewith.
J.
Submittals shall identify specific equipment with numbers or letters identical to those listed or
scheduled on the Drawings or Specifications.
K.
Each set of submittals submitted or re-submitted shall bear a unique Contractor's submittal
number. Submit minimum of seven copies. After review, submittals will be returned together
with Submittal Review Sheet which indicates comments on submittals and with specific actions
such as: No Exception Taken; Make Corrections Noted, Re-submittal Not Required; Make
Corrections Noted, Re-submittal Required; Rejected; Not Reviewed. Continue to re-submit
submittals until No Exception Taken or Make Corrections Noted, Re-submittal Not Required
action is indicated.
1.7
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Equipment scheduled on drawings and specifically called for in these specifications was used as
the basis of the mechanical systems design; modifications to the systems design to
accommodate a substituted piece of equipment shall be the responsibility of the installing
Contractor.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220100-BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
Page 4 of 8
B.
Coordinate all substituted equipment requirements with other trades prior to ordering
equipment.
C.
Submittals shall not be used for requesting approval for substitute equipment.
1.8
RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Keep in custody during entire period of construction, a current set of documents indication
changes that have been made to the Contract Documents. Changes to be noted on the documents
shall include but shall not be limited to piping installed more than 2'-0” from where shown on
Drawings, changes in pipe size, location of valves and cleanouts. Incorporate Addenda,
accepted Alternates, Change Orders, and other Document revisions which occurred after the
award of the General Contract or the start of construction activities into the Record Documents.
Notations and changes shall be done in a neat and legible manner in accordance with Architect's
instructions. Changes shall be noted in red, deletions in green, and notes in blue.
B.
Upon completion of work, submit the complete set of Record Documents to the Architect. The
Contract Documents set the standard for content and methods of presentation for the changes
shown.
C.
The Contract shall not be considered completed until these Record Documents have been
reviewed and accepted by the Architect.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING
A.
1.10
Provide delivery and safe storage of materials and equipment. Make provisions for introduction
into building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. Provide for hoisting of
equipment.
PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
A.
Protect materials and equipment from physical damage, construction dirt, and the elements from
time of shipment to time installation is accepted by Owner.
B.
Protect mechanical work against theft, injury, or damage from all causes.
1.11
GUARANTEE
A.
Guarantee materials, workmanship, and operation of equipment installed for period of one year
from date of acceptance of entire Work. Repair or replace any part of work which shows defect
during that time.
B.
Be responsible for damage to property of Owner or to work of other contractors during
construction and guarantee period.
C.
Warranties specified under individual Division 22 sections which extend beyond one (1) year
shall include payment for consequential damages due to faulty materials or workmanship
associated with those sections for full duration of extended warranty periods.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220100-BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
Page 5 of 8
D.
Furnish equipment warranties to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT WIRING AND CONNECTIONS
A.
3.2
Voltage characteristics shall be as in Electrical Division of Specifications and on Electrical
Drawings.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
3.3
Light, Heat, Power, Etc.: Provide temporary power supply or other facilities required for Work.
Arrange with proper parties to bring facilities from services to required location on premises.
INSPECTIONS
A.
3.4
Do not cover up or enclose work until inspected, tested, and approved. Any work enclosed or
covered up before such approval shall be uncovered, tested, and approved.
ACCESS DOORS
A.
Furnish hinged steel access doors with concealed latch, whether shown or not, in walls and
plaster or gypsum board ceilings for access to concealed valves, water hammer arresters, air
vents, balancing valves, or other operating devices requiring adjustment or servicing.
B.
Access door shall be size of equipment to be removed or 24” by 24” if used for service only.
C.
Furnish doors to trades performing work in which they are to be installed. Group valves,
devices, and other equipment, to permit use of minimum number of access doors.
D.
Doors shall be type compatible with finish in which they are to be installed.
3.5
SUPERVISION
A.
3.6
Supervise work to proceed in proper sequence without delay to other contractors. Keep
supervisor on premises at all times to ensure intent of Drawings and Specifications is being
followed.
INSTALLATION
A.
Workmanship shall be first quality. Appearance of work shall be of equal importance to its
mechanical operation. Lack of quality workmanship shall be reason for rejection of system in
part or in whole.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220100-BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
Page 6 of 8
B.
Install so all valves and equipment can be easily accessed and serviced by adequate clearance,
installation of access doors, unions in piping, or other methods.
C.
Complete installation shall function smoothly and noiselessly.
D.
Install equipment and materials per manufacturers' recommendations and local codes or
regulations.
E.
Flush pipes free of foreign substances before installing valves or making final connections.
Notify the Owner 7 days in advance of final flushing so the Owner can verify the cleanliness of
the pipe. Clean all piping and equipment.
3.7
LUBRICATION OF EQUIPMENT
A.
3.8
Lubricate equipment before operation and before turning over to Owner.
TESTING
A.
All tests specified herein and/or called for by authorities having jurisdiction shall be witnessed
by Architect or Owner. Reference other Division 22 Sections for additional requirements
specific to those sections.
B.
Upon completion of the work, deliver certificates of inspection and final approval to Owner.
3.9
COMPLETION
A.
Instruct Owner in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems. Minimum participants
shall include mechanical contractor.
B.
After tests and adjustments have been made and systems pronounced satisfactory for permanent
operation, refinish damaged finish and leave everything in proper working order and
appearance.
C.
On completion of work, remove tools, scaffolding, debris, etc., from grounds and leave
premises clean.
3.10
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
A.
Upon written notice from the Contractor certifying the work is complete and ready for
inspection, Engineer will prepare punchlist of items determined to be incomplete or otherwise
not incompliance with intent of Contract Documents.
B.
When required, subsequent visit to review completion of punchlist work will be made after
receipt of written statement from Contractor indicating punchlist work is complete. Include
copies of intermediate observation reports and final punchlists with individual items initialed by
Contractor to attest that individual work items are completed.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220100-BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
Page 7 of 8
C.
3.11
A.
Contractor shall pay Engineer's costs at the billing rates in effect at the time the services are
performed for subsequent punch list visits required due to lack of completion of previous punch
list.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS, AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Prior to completion of project, submit three (3) sets of maintenance manuals covering operation
and maintenance of mechanical equipment with moving or movable parts. Instructions shall be
in pamphlet or typewritten form in three ring binders. Instructions for each unit shall be
indicated by separate tab.
1.
Maintenance manuals submitted in electronic form shall be provided in separate Portable
Document Format (pdf) folders for each system or item of equipment installed.
B.
Include valve tag list.
C.
Include name, address, telephone number of party to be contacted for 24-hour service for each
item of equipment.
D.
Include starting, stopping, lubrication, preventative maintenance schedule, and adjustment
information for each piece of equipment.
E.
Include guarantees and warranties of all equipment.
F.
Provided three (3) sets of As Built drawings
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220100-BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
Page 8 of 8
SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following:
1.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2.
Escutcheons.
3.
Plumbing demolition.
4.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
All equipment and materials used in the distribution of domestic potable water shall be
approved and tested for such application with documented listings and labelings in accordance
with the latest edition of the [International Plumbing Code, Public Law 111-380 and
ANSI/NSF-61, Annex G].
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220500-COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Page 1 of 5
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for plumbing installations.
B.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
B.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated
finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PLUMBING DEMOLITION
A.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective
Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to
be removed.
1.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug
remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
3.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220500-COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Page 2 of 5
4.
C.
3.2
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and
quality.
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B.
All piping systems installed with ceiling plenum spaces shall meet the requirements of and be
listed in compliance with ASTM E-84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.
C.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
D.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
E.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
F.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
G.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
H.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
I.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
J.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
L.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
M.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1.
May 13, 2014
New Piping:
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220500-COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Page 3 of 5
a.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
c.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
f.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.
g.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw or
spring clips.
h.
Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.
N.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
O.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
P.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
3.3
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220500-COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Page 4 of 5
3.4
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
C.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220500-COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Tags.
B.
Pipe Markers.
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
Division 09 section on identification painting.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
A.
Piping: Pipe markers.
B.
Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.
2.2
TAGS
A.
Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth
edges.
B.
Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
2.3
PIPE MARKERS
A.
Comply with ASME A13.1.
B.
Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing
and printed markings.
C.
Color code as follows:
1.
Potable Water: Green with white letters.
2.
Compressed Air: Blue with white letters.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220553-IDENTIFICATION FOR
PLUMBINGPIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Page 1 of 2
2.4
LAY-IN CEILING LABELS.
A.
Description: Self adheasive type paper or laminate plastic tape. 3/4 inch wide and 1-1/2 inch
long with pre-printed identification.
B.
Color: White background with black lettering.
C.
Label Information: Provide identification of equipment, valve, control device, or similar
equipment above lay-in ceiling. Label shall include identification as noted on contract
documents, or clear identification of unit above ceilng.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B.
Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch
Identify service, flow direction. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate
identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each
valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
C.
Provide ceiling tacks or ceiling labels to locate vav boxes, control panels, valves or dampers
above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220553-IDENTIFICATION FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Page 2 of 2
SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Piping insulation.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Division 07 for firestopping.
B.
Division 09 for painting insulation jacket.
C.
Section 221005 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2013.
B.
ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
C.
ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;
2013.
D.
ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012.
E.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
F.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2012.
G.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
H.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Division 01 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220719-PLUMBING PIPING
INSULATION
Page 1 of 4
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in
this section with minimum 5 years of experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and
thickness.
B.
Protect stored insulation materials from damage or moisture penetration, discard and replace
damaged materials upon discovery.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B.
Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
A.
2.2
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
GLASS FIBER
A.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
2.
Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3.
Manson Insulation Inc: www.isolationmanson.com.
4.
Owens Corning Corp; Model Fiberglas 25 (Basis of Design): www.owenscorning.com.
5.
CertainTeed Corporation;: www.certainteed.com.
Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1.
'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F.
3.
Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220719-PLUMBING PIPING
INSULATION
Page 2 of 4
C.
Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film with
factory applied, pressure sensitive self-sealing lap; moisture vapor transmission when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M of 0.02 perm-inches.
D.
Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
E.
Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1.
Compatible with insulation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
C.
Verfiy adequate space allowance has been provided for proper insulation material application.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C.
Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1.
Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing
longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward
clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
2.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as
adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
E.
For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at
equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
F.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1.
Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied.
Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.
Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.
2.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as
adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220719-PLUMBING PIPING
INSULATION
Page 3 of 4
G.
Inserts and Shields:
1.
Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
2.
Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
3.
Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining
insulation; may be factory fabricated.
4.
H.
3.3
a.
180 degree insert for standard pipe hanger support locations.
b.
360 degree insert for trapeze or other clamped support locations.
Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation material suitable for the planned
temperature range.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, supports and other pipe penetrations.
Finish at protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Division 07.
SCHEDULES
A.
Plumbing Systems: Refer to Pipe Insulation Schedule on drawings.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
220719-PLUMBING PIPING
INSULATION
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 221005 - PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for the following piping systems:
1.
Sanitary building drainage and vent.
2.
Domestic water.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 220548 - Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B.
Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
C.
Section 220719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.
D.
Section 220516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).
B.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
C.
ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.
D.
ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings DWV; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012.
E.
ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011
(ANSI/ASME B31.9).
F.
ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2013a.
G.
ASTM A888 - 09 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.
H.
ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
I.
ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2010.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221005-PLUMBING PIPING
Page 1 of 11
J.
ASTM B75/B75M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube; 2011.
K.
ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
L.
ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV); 2013.
M.
ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings;
2012.
N.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
O.
AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005
(ANSI/AWWA C651).
P.
CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and
Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2009.
Q.
CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil
Pipe Institute; 2011
R.
MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,
Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry, Inc.; 2009.
S.
MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2010.
T.
ANSI / NSF 61 G - Drinking Water System Components Health Effects.
U.
Public Law 111-380 - Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.
V.
NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2012.
W.
NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Division 01 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.
B.
Perform Work in accordance with State of Colorado, codes and standards.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221005-PLUMBING PIPING
Page 2 of 11
C.
Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
D.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor
regulations.
E.
Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME (BPV IX).
F.
Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification,
potable water certification, water pressure rating and Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute labeling.
G.
Perform Work in accordance with State of Colorado International Plumbing and Fuel Gas
Codes.
H.
All equipment and materials used in the distribution of domestic potable water shall be
approved and tested for such application with documented listings and labelings in accordance
with the latest edition of the International Plumbing Code, Public Law 111-380 and ANSI/NSF61, Annex G.
I.
Conform to applicable codes and regulations for installation of backflow prevention devices.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
D.
Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SANITARY BUILDING DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF
BUILDING
A.
2.2
Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A888 or CISPI 301, hubless.
1.
Fittings: ASTM A888 or CISPI 301, cast iron.
2.
Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies.
SANITARY BUILDING DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.
Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74, service weight.
1.
May 13, 2014
Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets.
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221005-PLUMBING PIPING
Page 3 of 11
B.
2.3
Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
1.
Fittings: Cast iron.
2.
Joints: CISPI 310, heavy duty neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield
assemblies for piping 4 inch and larger, Husky SD 4000.
WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.
General: All water distribution piping and fittings shall comply with NSF 61 Annex G and
Public Law 111-380.
B.
Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H).
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
2.
Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 lead free solder.
3.
a.
ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95/Ag5 for piping 2-inches and larger.
b.
ASTM B 32, brazed using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with
AWS A5.8 for piping 2-inches and larger.
Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved or
certified, utilizing EPDM, non toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements.
a.
2.4
Manufacturers:
1) Viega LLC: www.viega.com.
FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A.
General: All water distribution piping and fittings shall comply with NSF 61 Annex G and
Public Law 111-380.
B.
Copper Press Fittings:
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Viega, North America.
2.
Copper press fittings shall conform to material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18
or ASME B16.22.
3.
O-rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221005-PLUMBING PIPING
Page 4 of 11
2.5
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General: All water distribution piping and fittings shall comply with NSF 61 Annex G and
Public Law 111-380.
B.
Dielectric Connections: Galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water
impervious isolation barrier.
2.6
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
B.
C.
Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1.
If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate
type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2.
Refer to Section 220548 for sway bracing requirements.
3.
Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers.
4.
Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.
5.
Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.
6.
Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture attachment.
Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
1.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split
ring.
2.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
3.
Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete
pier or steel support.
4.
Copper Pipe Support: Copper plated.
Plumbing Piping - Water:
1.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split
ring.
2.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
3.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221005-PLUMBING PIPING
Page 5 of 11
2.7
BALL VALVES
A.
General: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G and Public Law 111-380.
B.
Manufacturers:
C.
1.
Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.
2.
Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
3.
Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
4.
Kitz Corporation of America: www.kitz.com
Construction, 2 inches and Smaller: NSF-61, MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze,
two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, full port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out
proof stem, lever handle, solder ends with union.
1.
Provide valves with extended stems where installed within insulated piping systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C.
Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to
walls.
D.
Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.
E.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F.
Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 220719.
G.
Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access
doors with Division 08.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221005-PLUMBING PIPING
Page 6 of 11
H.
Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
I.
Install hubless coupling restraints on all hubless cast iron drainage piping 4 inches and larger at
all changes in direction and at all changes in diameter greater than two pipe sizes.
J.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
K.
Install valves with extended length stems to allow for valve operation without damage to
surrounding insulated surfaces, stem extension shall equal specified insulation thickness, refer
to Section 220719
L.
Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
M.
Install eccentric reducers in all natural gas piping systems.
N.
Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
2.
Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3.
Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent
work.
4.
Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
5.
Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
6.
Support vertical piping at every floor unless noted otherwise. Support riser piping
independently of connected horizontal piping.
7.
Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
8.
Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
9.
Provide padded hangers for plastic piping.
10. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Division 09. Hangers and supports
located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered
exposed.
11. Provide supports rigidly attached to building structure to brace against pipe sway for all
piping 4 inch and larger where change in direction of flow exceeds 45 degrees.
12. Anchor all drainage piping to building structure to prevent axial joint separation.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221005-PLUMBING PIPING
Page 7 of 11
a.
3.3
For drainage piping 4 inches and larger provide restraints as manufactured by Holdrite
or equivalent at all changes in direction and at all changes in diameter greater than two
pipe sizes.
APPLICATION
A.
Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
B.
Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
C.
Provide balancing valves in water recirculating systems where indicated.
3.4
TOLERANCES
A.
Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and
slope to drain at minimum of 1/8 inch per foot slope for piping 4 inches and larger; slope piping
3 inches and smaller at 1/4 inch per foot..
B.
Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Piping Inspections:
1.
Do not enclose, cover or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved
by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection
must be made. perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
3.
May 13, 2014
a.
Underground Inspection: Inspection shall be made after trenches or ditches are
excavated and bedded, piping installed, and before any backfill is put into place.
b.
Rough-In Inspection: Inspection shall be made following installation of the roof,
framing, fireblocking, draftstopping and bracing and all sanitary, storm and water
distribution piping is roughed-in, and prior to the installation of wall or ceiling
membranes.
c.
Final Inspection: Inspection shall be made after the building is complete, all plumbing
fixtures and appliances are in place and properly connected, and the structure is ready
for occupancy.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221005-PLUMBING PIPING
Page 8 of 11
4.
C.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by the authorities having
jurisdiction.
Piping Tests:
1.
All new piping systems, and portions of existing piping systems which have been altered
shall be tested utilizing a hydrostatic test, unless noted otherwise, at the pressures listed
below. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete
with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2.
Do not enclose, cover or put piping into operation until it has been tested and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.
Clean and flush systems and obtain approval from Owner's Project Manager that systems
are ready for testing prior to commencing tests.
4.
Notify Architect, Engineer, and Owner's Project Manager a minimum of 24 hours in
advance of each test.
5.
Isolate equipment and components which cannot withstand test pressures outlined below
from piping systems prior to commencing tests.
a.
Remove components which cannot be isolated and plug or cap openings to withstand
specified test pressures.
6.
Following testing, drain system, vent vessels and piping to prevent collapse by vacuum.
7.
Domestic Water Piping:
8.
a.
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.
b.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that
must be repaired.
Sanitary Drainage, Storm Drainage and Vent Piping:
a.
9.
Test drainage and vent piping on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping
system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 12-foot head of
water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water
level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
10. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. Include the following and
submit within 24 hours of each test:
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221005-PLUMBING PIPING
Page 9 of 11
a.
Date, time and place of test.
b.
Duration of test.
c.
Person responsible for testing.
d.
Results of test.
e.
Action taken to correct deficiency.
11. Notify Owner's Project Manager after successful test is completed.
3.6
DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A.
Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Division 33.
B.
Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
C.
Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda
ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
D.
Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to
obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
E.
Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15
percent of outlets.
F.
Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
G.
If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
H.
Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
I.
Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water
entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
3.7
SCHEDULES
A.
Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1.
May 13, 2014
Cast Iron Drainage Piping:
a.
Pipe Size: 1-1/2 inches to 4 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 5 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches.
b.
Maximum horizontal spacing may be increased to 10 ft. where 10-foot lengths of pipe
are installed.
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221005-PLUMBING PIPING
Page 10 of 11
c.
2.
Maximum Vertical Support Spacing: 10 ft.
Copper Piping:
a.
Pipe Size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches.
b.
Pipe Size: 1-1/2 inches and larger:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches.
c.
Maximum Vertical Support Spacing: 8 ft.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221005-PLUMBING PIPING
Page 11 of 11
SECTION 221006 - PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Floor drains.
B.
Cleanouts.
C.
Thermostatic mixing valves.
D.
Trap seal devices.
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 221005 - Plumbing Piping.
B.
Section 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2001 (R2007).
B.
ANSI / NSF 61 G - Drinking Water System Components Health Effects.
C.
Public Law 111-380 - Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Division 01 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
All equipment and materials used in the distribution of domestic potable water shall be
approved and tested for such application with documented listings and labelings in accordance
with the latest edition of the [International Plumbing Code, Public Law 111-380 and
ANSI/NSF-61, Annex G].
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221006-PLUMBING PIPING
SPECIALTIES
Page 1 of 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DRAINS
A.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.
2.
Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
3.
Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.: www.wadedrains.com
Floor Drain (FD-1):
1.
2.2
ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep
holes, reversible clamping collar, and square, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer.
CLEANOUTS
A.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.
2.
Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
3.
Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.: www.wadedrains.com
Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas (WCO-1):
1.
C.
2.3
Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round
stainless steel access cover secured with vandal resistant machine screw.
Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas (C.O.): Calked or threaded type. Provide
bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.
BARRIER TYPE TRAP SEAL PROTECTION DEVICES
A.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
SureSeal Manufacturing Co.
2.
Approved Equivalent.
Trap Guard (TG-1):
1.
May 13, 2014
ASSE 1072, neoprene diaphragm and sealing gasket with ABS plastic housing body for
insertion into gravity drain outlet connections of sizes 2, 3, and 4-inch diameter piping with
compression fit at 80 durometer.
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221006-PLUMBING PIPING
SPECIALTIES
Page 2 of 4
2.4
MIXING VALVES
A.
Thermostatic Mixing Valves (TMV-1):
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Bradley
2.
Valve: ASSE 1070, Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows,
integral temperature adjustment.
3.
Accessories:
a.
4.
Check valve on inlets.
Cabinet: 16 gage prime coated steel, for recessed mounting with keyed lock where
indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Size same as drainage piping up to 4-inch. Use 4-inch for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 135 degrees.
3.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping 4-inch and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C.
Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
D.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set drainage grates flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2.
Install individual traps for floor drains/floor sinks connected to sanitary building drain,
unless otherwise indicated.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221006-PLUMBING PIPING
SPECIALTIES
Page 3 of 4
3.
Position floor drains for ready access to allow for inspection and maintenance.
4.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage; set
with grates depressed according to the following radii:
a.
Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch
total depression.
E.
Install water mixing valves with check stops and shutoff valves on inlets.
F.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
G.
Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
B.
Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 22 Sections.
3.3
PROTECTION
A.
Protect specialties during construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to
prevent damage from traffic and other construction related work.
B.
Replace damaged specialties and components immediately at no additional cost to the owner.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221006-PLUMBING PIPING
SPECIALTIES
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 221500 - GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Identification of piping
system.
B.
Division 26 for electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASME (BPV) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2010.
B.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).
C.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
D.
ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012
(ANSI/ASME B31.1).
E.
ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
F.
ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
G.
MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2010.
H.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Division 01 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature with capacity, weight, and electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221500-GENERAL-SERVICE
COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 3
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and components. Modify
shop drawings to indicate final locations.
D.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept air compressors, refrigerated air dryer on site in factory fabricated containers with
shipping skids and plastic pipe end protectors in place. Inspect for damage.
B.
Protect piping and equipment from weather and construction traffic.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
See Division 01 for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A.
2.2
Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), drawn.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
2.
Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade Sn95.
VALVES
A.
Ball Valves:
1.
B.
MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball,
regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, solder
ends with union.
Air Outlets:
1.
Quick Connector: 3/8 inch brass, snap on connector with self closing valve, Style A.
a.
C.
Automatic-Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with O-ring or
gasket seal and stainless-steel or nickel-plated-steel operating parts.
Solenoid Valves:
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221500-GENERAL-SERVICE
COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 3
1.
2.3
2-inch and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and CSA International-listed bronze body and 125-psig
pressure rating.
UNIONS AND COUPLINGS
A.
Unions:
1.
Copper Tube and Pipe: 150 psi bronze unions with soldered joints.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install valved drip connections at low points of piping system.
C.
Install takeoffs to outlets from top of main, with shut off valve after take off. Slope take off
piping to outlets.
D.
Install compressed air couplings, female quick connectors, and pressure gages where outlets are
indicated.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Compressed Air Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test compressed air
piping in accordance with ASME B31.1.
B.
Repair or replace compressed air piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest to demonstrate
compliance.
C.
Cap and seal ends of piping when not connected to mechanical equipment.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
221500-GENERAL-SERVICE
COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sinks.
B.
Emergency plumbing fixtures.
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Division 07 - Joint sealers: Seal fixtures to walls and floors.
B.
Section 221005 - Plumbing Piping.
C.
Section 221006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties.
D.
Section 223000 - Plumbing Equipment.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI Z358.1 - American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment;
2009.
B.
ASHRAE Std 18 - Methods of Testing for Rating Drinking-Water Coolers with Self-Contained
Mechanical Refrigeration; 2008.
C.
ASME A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2002).
D.
ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2012.
E.
ASME A112.19.1M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2008 (R2011).
F.
ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008.
G.
ANSI / NSF 61 G - Drinking Water System Components Health Effects.
H.
Public Law 111-380 - Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Division 01 for submittal procedures.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
224000-PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 1 of 7
B.
Review millwork shop drawings, plans and details to confirm size, depth and clearance
requirements associated with fixtures to be provided, submit on required fixtures.
C.
Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes,
trim, and finishes.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B.
All equipment and materials used in the distribution of domestic potable water shall be
approved and tested for such application with documented listings and labelings in accordance
with the latest edition of the [International Plumbing Code, Public Law 111-380 and
ANSI/NSF-61, Annex G].
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.7
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B.
Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in
place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
Stainless Steel Sinks:
1.
Elkay Manfacturing Co.
2.
Just Manufacturing Co.
Emergency Plumbing Fixtures:
1.
C.
Haws Corporation.
Sink Faucets:
1.
Chicago Faucet
2.
Delta 100LF Series
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
224000-PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 2 of 7
D.
2.2
Protective Shielding Guards:
1.
Plumberex, Inc.
2.
TrueBro; IPS Corporation.
SINKS, COUNTER MOUNTED
A.
B.
C.
2.3
Double Compartment Bowl (S-1): ASME A112.19.3; 33 by 19 by 7-5/8 inch outside
dimensions 18 gage thick, Type 304 stainless steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge
back drilled for trim.
1.
Faucet: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with swing type shaped tube spout,
vandal proof water economy aerator with maximum 1.5 gpm flow, indexed canopy
handles.
2.
Accessories: Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm to wall with
escutcheon, wheel handle / loose key quarter turn stops, rigid supplies. Install loose key at
student areas only.
3.
Mixing Valve: Below deck thermostatic mixing valve complying with ASSE 1070 where
indicated.
Double Compartment Bowl (S-2): ASME A112.19.3; 33 by 19 by 6 inch outside dimensions 18
gage thick, Type 304 stainless steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge back drilled for
trim. Rear center drain at ADA counters.
1.
Faucet: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with swing type shaped tube spout,
vandal proof water economy aerator with maximum 1.5 gpm flow, indexed canopy
handles.
2.
Accessories: Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm to wall with
escutcheon, wheel handle / loose key quarter turn stops, rigid supplies. Install loose key at
student areas only.
3.
Mixing Valve: Below deck thermostatic mixing valve complying with ASSE 1070 where
indicated.
Accessories: Chrome plated 17 gage brass continuous waste, P-trap with clean-out plug and arm
with escutcheon, screwdriver or loose key 1/4 turn stops, rigid supplies.
PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A.
Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold- water supplies, traps
and drainage tubing.
1.
May 13, 2014
Tested in compliance with ASTM E-84, Class C with a 25 flame spread index and 450
smoke development index.
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
224000-PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 3 of 7
2.
2.4
Single or multi-piece design, non-absorbant, UV inhibited, anti-microbial and anti-fungal
surface with white finish; tamper resistant fastening system.
EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES
A.
Combination Emergency Shower and Eyewash (CSE-1):
1.
ANSI Z358.1; plumbed, accessible, freestanding type with emergency shower and eye/face
wash equipment.
2.
Piping: Stainless steel, 1-1/2-inch inlet connection from top or side, drain outlet at side
near bottom.
3.
4.
B.
a.
Shower Supply: 1-inch with flow regulator and stay-open control valve.
b.
Eye/Face Wash Supply: 1/2-inch with flow regulator and stay-open control valve.
Shower Capacity: Deliver potable water at rate not less than 20 gpm for at least 15
minutes.
a.
Control-Valve Actuator: Pull rod.
b.
Shower Head: 3.1-inch diameter engineered flow design, stainless-steel.
Eye/Face Wash Capacity: Deliver potable water at rate not less than 3.0 gpm for at least 15
minutes.
a.
Control-Valve Actuator: Paddle or push bar.
b.
Receptor: Chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel bowl.
Water Tempering Equipment:
1.
Factory-fabricated equipment including water thermostatic mixing valve designed to
provide 85 deg F potable water at emergency plumbing fixtures, to maintain temperature at
plus or minus 5 deg F throughout required 15-minute test period, and in case of unit failure
to continue cold-water flow, with union connections, controls, piping, corrosion-resistant
metal piping and enclosure.
2.
Manufacturers: Tempering equipment shall be supplied by same manufacturer as
emergency equipment supported.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
224000-PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 4 of 7
B.
3.2
Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top
sinks and lavatories.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture
rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.
INSTALLATION
A.
Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings and other components according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B.
Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
C.
Install chrome plated rigid supplies to fixtures with loose key 1/4 turn stops, reducers, and
escutcheons. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install
stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
D.
Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
E.
Install tubular waste piping on on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to
drainage system.
F.
Provide offset tailpiece drains for each accessible lavatory or counter mounted sink; install ptrap along back wall to maintain required accessible clearances.
G.
Install protective shielding guards at all lavatories and sinks designated to comply with ANSI
A117.1 accessibility guidelines, where piping is exposed below bowl.
H.
Install fixtures and components level and plumb.
I.
Install back outlet wall mounted fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports; install
bolt caps.
J.
Install wall mounted fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
K.
Install counter mounted fixtures in and attached to casework.
L.
Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with oscillating handle
mounted on wide side of fixture compartment; install other actuators in locations that are easy
for people with disabilities to reach.
M.
Install faucet flow control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns, if faucets are not
available with required rates and patterns include adapters.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
224000-PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 5 of 7
N.
Install polished chrome plated escutcheons at piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed
finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.Use deep pattern escutcheons if required to
fully conceal protruding fittings.
O.
Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Division 07, color to match
fixture.
3.4
INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A.
Prior to ordering fixtures to be set in countertop construction, review millwork shop drawings to
confirm size, depth and clearances required will be met.
B.
Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.
3.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other 22 sections, drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings and specialties.
B.
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, soil waste and vent piping. use size
fittings required to match fixture.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Verify that installed plumbing fixtures and trim are categories and types specified for locations
where installed.
B.
Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings and other specified
components.
C.
Inspect installed plumbing fixtures and trim for damage; replace damaged fixtures and
components.
D.
Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
3.7
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or
overflow.
B.
Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged or malfunctioning fixtures, fittings
and controls.
C.
Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and valves.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
224000-PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 6 of 7
3.8
CLEANING
A.
B.
3.9
Clean plumbing fixtures, faucets and other fittings with manufacturer's recommended cleaning
methods and materials.
1.
Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, reinstall strainers and
spouts.
2.
Remove sediment and debris from drain strainers.
After cleaning is completed, inspect factory finished fixtures, faucets and fittings, repair
damaged finishes.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.
B.
Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel.
C.
Repair or replace damaged products.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
224000-PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 230100 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
1.2
The General Conditions of the Contract and Supplementary Conditions of the General Contract
apply to work under this Division.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The mechanical design for this project is based on specific manufacturers and equipment as
scheduled on the drawings and listed in these Division 23 Specifications with specific model
number identifiers. Acceptable substitute manufacturers of equipment are listed in these
specifications. If any acceptable substitute manufacturer's equipment is used, the cost of any
change in design or construction required by their use shall be borne by the contractor.
Contractor shall document and submit all changes to design plans and schedules as a result of
the use of substituted equipment.
B.
If manufacturer's material or equipment is listed in Schedules or on Drawings, they are types to
be provided for establishment of size, capacity, grade, and quality. If other acceptable
manufacturers are used, cost of any change in construction required by their use shall be borne
by Contractor.
C.
Equipment shall conform to State and/or local Energy Conservation Standards.
D.
Execute and test all work per Underwriters, state and local codes, rules, and regulations
applicable to trade affected. Included are recommendations of NFPA, SMACNA, OSHA, and
ASHRAE. References to standards are latest revision of standard specified.
E.
Comply with rules and regulations of local utility companies. Include cost of valves, valve
boxes, meter boxes, meters, accessory equipment required for project.
1.3
INTENT AND INTERPRETATIONS
A.
It is the intent of these Drawings and Specifications to result in a complete mechanical
installation in complete accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances.
B.
Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required pipe,
offset, transition, etc. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specification or noted on the
Drawings, but which are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be
included.
C.
Drawings and specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for in either is binding as
though called for in both. The more stringent requirements shall govern.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230100-BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 8
D.
Drawings shall not be scaled for rough-in measurements or used as shop drawings. Where
drawings are required for these purposes or have to be made from field measurements, take the
necessary measurements and prepare the drawings.
E.
Symbols used on the Drawings are defined in the Legend on the Drawings. All symbols
indicated on the Legend may not necessarily be required for the project.
F.
“Provide” shall mean “furnish and install.” “Accepted” or “acceptable” denotes the work or
equipment item is in conformance with the design concept of the project and, in general,
complies with the pertinent information given in the Contract Documents.
G.
Prior to ordering equipment, determine that equipment will adequately pass through building
openings and passageways providing unobstructed access to final equipment location.
Equipment shall be manufactured and shipped in sections for assembly in final equipment
location when inadequate building openings and passageways limit access. Shop drawings and
submittals shall indicate sectionalized manufacturing of equipment.
H.
Before any work is installed, determine equipment will properly fit the space, required
clearances can be maintained and equipment can be located without interferences between
systems, with structural elements, or with the work of other trades.
I.
If conflicts are discovered in Contract Documents as work progresses, submit a set of drawings
marked with red pencil showing recommended modifications to the Architect for approval prior
to installation.
J.
The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of mechanical systems. However,
rearrangement will not be permitted without specific approval prior to installation.
K.
Provide incidental equipment such as tools, scaffolding, consumable items, testing equipment,
appliances and the like whether listed or not. Provide labor, fees, licenses, start-up and checkout
services also.
L.
In the event that any discrepancies of any kind exist or required items or details have been
omitted, notify the Architect in writing of such discrepancy or omission at least five days prior
to bid date. Failure to do so shall be construed as willingness to supply all necessary materials
and labor required for the proper completion of this work.
1.4
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Location, size, and type of equipment and material shown as existing are taken from existing
drawings. Verify exact conditions in field prior to start of construction.
B.
Before submitting bid, examine premises and become familiar with all existing conditions
which may affect cost. No allowance will subsequently be made for not following this
procedure.
C.
Owner supplied existing equipment may be installed. Become familiar with existing rough-in
requirements prior to installation. Report any difficulties or discrepancies to Architect prior to
start of work.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230100-BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 8
D.
Not all piping and ductwork offsets, transitions, and multiple connections required to install the
new work into the available space are shown on the drawings. Field measure for exact
requirements and install accordingly.
E.
Confer, cooperate, and coordinate work with other trades. Coordinate ceiling cavity space
carefully with all trades. In event of conflict, install mechanical and electrical systems within
cavity space in following order of priority.
1.
Plumbing waste and vent piping.
2.
Roof drain piping.
3.
Ductwork.
4.
Electrical conduit and lighting.
5.
Hydronic piping
6.
Domestic hot and cold water piping.
7.
Fire sprinkler piping.
F.
Where locations of devices and equipment are not specifically mentioned in the Specifications
or indicated on the Drawings, verify locations with Architect or Owner prior to rough-in.
G.
Provide carpentry, masonry, concrete and metal work required for work of this Division where
not specifically called for under other Sections.
1.5
PERMITS AND FEES
A.
1.6
Arrange and pay for all inspections, permits, licenses, certificates, and fees required in
connection with work.
SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Conform to requirements of Division 01 and following paragraphs.
B.
All shop drawings and submittal data shall be included in bound covers or three ring binders
with divider tabs for each individual Division 23 specification section.
C.
All electronic submittal data shall be provided in separate Portable Document Format (pdf)
folders for each individual Division 23 specification section.
D.
Product data submitted shall be unique to individual specification sections. Product data which
applies to multiple specification sections shall be submitted under each specification section tab.
Re-submittals, or submittals submitted independently of the original submittal package may be
submitted individually provided they are securely bound in accordance with the specification
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230100-BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 8
section they represent, new or updated divider tabs are included, and submittals have been prepunched for inclusion into the project submittal binder.
E.
All shop drawings and submittal data shall bear a unique submittal number. Submittal number
shall consist of three sets of numeric values. Submittal number shall be in the 23XXXX-XXXXX format with the first set of numbers representing the specification section, the second set of
numbers representing the submittal number for that particular specification section, and the final
two numbers representing the submittal number for that particular item. Original submittals
shall bear 01 as the final set of numbers, and re-submittals shall begin with 02 and follow with
each re-submittal.
F.
Submittals not conforming with the formats outlined above will be returned at the contractors
expense for re-submittal conforming with the above.
G.
Submittals shall include catalog cut-sheets, manufacturer's data sheets, written descriptions, and
specification sheets detailing the associated product, item, and assembly. Reference the Division
23 Sections for additional information and requirements specific to those sections.
1.
Resubmittals shall include information required above, along with reference to original
submittal section tab being corrected.
H.
Shop drawings shall include details, installation drawings, assembly drawings, fabrication
drawings, diagrams, and other information which show adaptation or installation of Contractorfurnished products or materials for overall project.
I.
Prior to ordering equipment or beginning installation work, assemble, prepare, and furnish
submittals and shop drawings required for project. Furnish submittals and shop drawings as
required by individual sections of specifications.
J.
Contractor shall thoroughly check subcontractors' or vendors' submittals and shop drawings
and, after approving them, submit them for review. Submittals and shop drawings that do not
bear Contractor's review stamp or that do not comply with all of the above requirements will be
returned “Not Reviewed.”
K.
The purpose of submittals and shop drawings is to ensure Contractor understands design
requirements and demonstrates understanding by indicating and detailing intended materials,
methods, and installation practices. Submittals and shop drawings are not a method of
requesting substitutions or deviation from Specifications. If discrepancies between submittals,
shop drawings, and Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after submittals and
shop drawings are reviewed, requirements of Contract Documents shall take precedence.
Submittals and shop drawings which are submitted, but which are not required by Contract
Documents, will be returned Not Reviewed.
L.
Review of submittals and shop drawings and action recommended as result of review is
courtesy extended to Contractor by Owner's representative. This review is intended to minimize
delivery to job site and installation of materials and equipment that do not meet intent of
Construction Documents. Submission of material for review does not alter Contractor's
obligation to follow intent of Construction Documents, nor Contractor's responsibility to
comply therewith.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230100-BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 4 of 8
M.
1.7
Submittals and shop drawings shall identify specific equipment with numbers or letters identical
to those listed or scheduled on the Drawings or Specifications.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Equipment scheduled on drawings and specifically called for in these specifications was used as
the basis of the mechanical systems design; modifications to the systems design to
accommodate a substituted piece of equipment shall be the responsibility of the installing
Contractor.
B.
Coordinate all substituted equipment requirements with other trades prior to ordering
equipment.
1.8
RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Keep in custody during entire period of construction, a current set of documents indication
changes that have been made to the Contract Documents. Changes to be noted on the documents
shall include but shall not be limited to piping or ductwork installed more than 2'-0” from where
shown on Drawings, changes in pipe and duct size, location of valves and cleanouts.
Incorporate Addenda, accepted Alternates, Change Orders, and other Document revisions which
occurred after the award of the General Contract or the start of construction activities into the
Record Documents. Notations and changes shall be done in a neat and legible manner in
accordance with Architect's instructions. Changes shall be noted in red, deletions in green, and
notes in blue.
B.
Upon completion of work, submit the complete set of Record Documents to the Architect. The
Contract Documents set the standard for content and methods of presentation for the changes
shown.
C.
The Contract shall not be considered completed until these Record Documents have been
reviewed and accepted by the Architect.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING
A.
1.10
Provide delivery and safe storage of materials and equipment. Make provisions for introduction
into building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. Provide for hoisting of
equipment.
PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
A.
Protect materials and equipment from physical damage, construction dirt, and the elements from
time of shipment to time installation is accepted by Owner.
B.
Protect work against theft, injury, or damage from all causes.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230100-BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 5 of 8
1.11
GUARANTEE
A.
Guarantee materials, workmanship and operation of equipment installed for period of two years
from date of acceptance of entire Work. Repair or replace any part of work which shows defect
during that time.
B.
Be responsible for damage to property of Owner or to work of other contractors during
construction and guarantee period.
C.
Furnish equipment warranties to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT WIRING AND CONNECTIONS
A.
3.2
Voltage characteristics shall be as in Electrical Division of Specifications and on Electrical
Drawings.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Light, Heat, Power, Etc.: Provide temporary power supply or other facilities required for Work.
Arrange with proper parties to bring facilities from services to required location on premises.
B.
Use of Existing Equipment for Temporary Heating or Cooling: Do not use building equipment
without written permission from Owner. If building equipment is used for temporary heating or
cooling, it shall be adequately maintained per manufacturer's instructions and protected with
filters, strainers, controls, reliefs, etc. Guarantee period shall not start until equipment is
accepted by Owner.
3.3
INSPECTIONS
A.
3.4
Do not cover up or enclose work until inspected, tested, and approved. Any work enclosed or
covered up before such approval shall be uncovered, tested, and approved.
ACCESS DOORS
A.
Furnish hinged steel access doors with concealed latch, whether shown or not, in walls and
plaster or gypsum board ceilings for access to concealed valves, air vents, motors, fans,
balancing valves, or other operating devices requiring adjustment or servicing.
B.
Access door shall be size of equipment to be removed or 24” by 24” if used for service only.
C.
Furnish doors to trades performing work in which they are to be installed. Group valves,
devices, and other equipment, to permit use of minimum number of access doors.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230100-BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 6 of 8
D.
3.5
Doors shall be type compatible with finish in which they are to be installed.
SUPERVISION
A.
3.6
Supervise work to proceed in proper sequence without delay to other contractors. Keep
supervisor on premises at all times to ensure intent of Drawings and Specifications is being
followed.
INSTALLATION
A.
Workmanship shall be first quality. Appearance of work shall be of equal importance to its
mechanical operation. Lack of quality workmanship shall be reason for rejection of system in
part or in whole.
B.
Install so all valves and equipment can be easily accessed and serviced by adequate clearance,
installation of access doors, unions in piping, or other methods.
C.
Complete installation shall function smoothly and noiselessly.
D.
Install equipment and materials per manufacturers' recommendations and local codes or
regulations.
E.
Flush pipes free of foreign substances before installing valves or making final connections.
Notify the Owner 7 days in advance of final flushing so the Owner can verify the cleanliness of
the pipe. Clean all piping and equipment.
3.7
TESTING
A.
All tests specified herein and/or called for by authorities having jurisdiction shall be witnessed
by Architect or Owner. Reference other Division 31 Sections for additional requirements
specific to those sections.
B.
Upon completion of the work, deliver certificates of inspection and final approval to Owner.
3.8
COMPLETION
A.
Replace air filters if units were operated during construction. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if
units were operated without filters during construction.
B.
Instruct Owner in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems. Minimum participants
shall include mechanical contractor and controls contractor representatives.
C.
After tests and adjustments have been made and systems pronounced satisfactory for permanent
operation, refinish damaged finish and leave everything in proper working order and
appearance.
D.
On completion of work, remove tools, scaffolding, debris, etc., from grounds and leave
premises clean.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230100-BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 7 of 8
3.9
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
A.
Upon written notice from the Contractor certifying the work is complete and ready for
inspection, Engineer will prepare punchlist of items determined to be incomplete or otherwise
not incompliance with intent of Contract Documents.
B.
When required, subsequent visit to review completion of punchlist work will be made after
receipt of written statement from Contractor indicating punchlist work is complete. Include
copies of intermediate observation reports and final punchlists with individual items initialed by
Contractor to attest that individual work items are completed.
C.
Contractor shall pay Engineer's costs at the billing rates in effect at the time the services are
performed for subsequent punch list visits required due to lack of completion of initial punch
list.
3.10
A.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Prior to completion of project, submit three (3) sets of maintenance manuals covering operation
and maintenance of mechanical equipment with moving or movable parts. Instructions shall be
in pamphlet or typewritten form in three ring binders. Instructions for each unit shall be
indicated by separate tab.
1.
Maintenance manuals submitted in electronic form shall be provided in separate Portable
Document Format (pdf) folders for each system or item of equipment installed.
B.
Include test and balance report.
C.
Include valve tag list.
D.
Include name, address, telephone number of party to be contacted for 24-hour service for each
item of equipment.
E.
Include starting, stopping, lubrication, preventative maintenance schedule, and adjustment
information for each piece of equipment.
F.
Include guarantees and warranties of all equipment.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230100-BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 8 of 8
SECTION 230500 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2.
HVAC demolition.
3.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
4.
Supports and anchorages.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.5
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2.
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics
may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting
electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum
energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230500-BASIC MECHANICAL
MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 1 of 3
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are
concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
HVAC DEMOLITION
A.
Refer to Division 01 Section for cutting and patching and Division 02 Section for selective
structure demolition for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be
removed.
1.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug
remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
3.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
4.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork
material.
5.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
6.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230500-BASIC MECHANICAL
MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 2 of 3
C.
3.2
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and
quality.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.3
PAINTING
A.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
B.
Under painting section: Refer to architectural drawings and specifications for mechanical
equipment and ductwork to be painted. Provide paint-lock ductwork for all ductwork to be
painted.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230500-BASIC MECHANICAL
MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B.
Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
1.2
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance
Council; 2002.
B.
ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building
Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2008.
C.
NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental
Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition.
D.
SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2002.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and
balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
1.
Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.
2.
Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final
copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
3.
Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of
calibration.
4.
Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report
format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.
5.
Units of Measure: Report data in I-P (inch-pound) units only.
6.
Include the following on the title page of each report:
a.
May 13, 2014
Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230593-TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Page 1 of 7
1.4
b.
Project name.
c.
Project location.
d.
Report date.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Pre-qualified Contractors:
1.
Checkpoint
2.
Finn & Associates
3.
TAB Services
4.
Griffith Engineering
5.
JPG Engineering
6.
Double T Balancing
B.
Mechanical contractor shall obtain approval in writing from balancing contractor for type and
size of balancing devices
C.
Qualifications
1.
Work under this section shall be executed under the direct supervision of a registered
professional engineer having an established professional office in the state of Colorado and
having an experience record of not less than five (5) years in the mechanical contracting
industry, engaged in testing, balancing and adjusting of air and hydronic mechanical
systems for not less than two years of thattime.
D.
Calibration and maintenance of instruments shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
standards and recommendations, and calibration histories for each instrument available for
examination
E.
Accuracy of measurements in accordance with the applicable measurement means as listed in
the chapter on measurement and instruments in the latest edition of ASHRAE Fundamentals
Handbook.
1.
The TAB Contractor shall have obtained CAD reduced-size drawings from Engineer for
the TAB report.
2.
The TAB shall return to the site to perform spot checks as directed by the DPS Project
Manger during the commissioning process. The TAB shall include a minimum of 2 days
on to provide spot checks as required by the commissioning agent.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230593-TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Page 2 of 7
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupancy partial areas of the site and existing building
during TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operatioins to minimize conflicts with
Owner's operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:
1.
NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems.
2.
SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
B.
Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work
prior to Substantial Completion of the project.
C.
TAB Agency Qualifications:
D.
3.2
1.
Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this
section.
2.
Certified by one of the following:
a.
NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org.
b.
TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy
Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org.
TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency.
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1.
B.
Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flowcontrol devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by
the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following
conditions:
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230593-TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Page 3 of 7
1.
Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2.
Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3.
Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4.
Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final
filters.
5.
Duct systems are clean of debris.
6.
Fans are rotating correctly.
7.
Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8.
Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9.
Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
C.
Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system
balance.
D.
Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1.
Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2.
Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
6.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access
to balancing devices is provided.
7.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230593-TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Page 4 of 7
B.
3.4
Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments
available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
B.
Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speedcontrol levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
3.5
ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES
A.
Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems
and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to
space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
3.6
RECORDING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
B.
Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings
to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C.
After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such
disruption has been rectified.
D.
Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing
doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
3.7
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A.
Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and
exhaust air quantities at site altitude.
B.
Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
C.
Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts
and noise.
D.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not
create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices
such as dampers and splitters.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230593-TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Page 5 of 7
E.
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required.
Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
F.
Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
G.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design
conditions.
H.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating,
economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake
horsepower.
3.8
INSPECTIONS
A.
3.9
Final Inspection:
1.
After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and
balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final
inspection be made by Owner.
2.
TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Owner.
3.
Owner shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked.
The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or
the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.
4.
If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
5.
If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
6.
TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report
and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.
7.
Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall
contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in
accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final
payment.
SCOPE
A.
Test, adjust, and balance the following:
1.
May 13, 2014
Terminal Heat Transfer Units
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230593-TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Page 6 of 7
3.10
A.
B.
C.
2.
Air Handling Units
3.
Fans
4.
Air Inlets and Outlets
MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED
Air Moving Equipment:
1.
Location
2.
Manufacturer
3.
Model number
4.
Air flow, specified and actual
5.
Return air flow, specified and actual
6.
Outside air flow, specified and actual
7.
Fan RPM
Exhaust Fans:
1.
Location
2.
Manufacturer
3.
Model number
4.
Air flow, specified and actual
5.
Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
6.
Fan RPM
Air Distribution Tests:
1.
Room number/location
2.
Design air flow
3.
Test (final) air flow
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230593-TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Duct insulation.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
B.
ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications; 2011.
C.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
D.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2012.
E.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
F.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's
identification, including product density and thickness.
B.
Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
damage, by storing in original wrapping.
1.5
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics,
and insulation cements.
B.
Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230713-DUCT INSULATION
Page 1 of 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
A.
2.2
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A.
B.
Manufacturer:
1.
Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
2.
Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
3.
Substitutions: See Division 01 for product requirements.
Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
1.
C.
'K' value: 0.31 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1.
Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:
C.
1.
Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2.
Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections,
and expansion joints.
Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:
1.
May 13, 2014
Provide with standard vapor barrier jacket.
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230713-DUCT INSULATION
Page 2 of 3
2.
Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of
insulation.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
230713-DUCT INSULATION
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 233100 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal ductwork.
B.
Duct cleaning.
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories.
B.
Section 233700 - Air Outlets and Inlets.
C.
Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2009.
B.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
C.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
D.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
E.
SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes
in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.
1.5
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers.
B.
Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
233100-HVAC DUCTS AND
CASINGS
Page 1 of 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type
B, with G90/Z275 coating.
B.
Galvanealed Steel for Paintable Ducts (Paintlock): of-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM
A653/A653M FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating, and alloyed for paint adherence
C.
Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.
1.
Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and
compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts.
2.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
D.
Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or
continuously threaded.
E.
All Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Low Pressure Supply (Heating Systems): 1 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.
G.
General Exhaust: 1 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.
H.
Hood Exhaust: 1 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.
2.2
DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and
as indicated.
B.
No variation of duct configuration or size permitted except by written permission. Size round
duct installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook Fundamentals.
C.
Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
D.
Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on
centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil
turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
E.
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
233100-HVAC DUCTS AND
CASINGS
Page 2 of 3
2.3
MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
A.
Flexible Ducts: Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire.
1.
UL labeled.
2.
Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with polyethylene vapor barrier film.
3.
Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG positive and 0.5 inches WG negative.
4.
Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
5.
Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 175 degrees F.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards.
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Flexible Ducts: Connect to metal ducts with mechanical fastener
D.
Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
E.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
F.
Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet maximum
length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.
3.2
CLEANING
A.
Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To
obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that could be harmed by
excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
233100-HVAC DUCTS AND
CASINGS
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Backdraft dampers - metal.
B.
Duct test holes.
C.
Flexible duct connections.
D.
Volume control dampers.
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Division 07 for firestopping.
B.
Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
B.
SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Division 01 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers.
Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C.
Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of access doors, test holes, and dampers.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - METAL
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
May 13, 2014
Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com.
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
233300-AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 1 of 3
2.
Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.
3.
Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.
4.
Greenheck: www.greenheck.com.
5.
Substitutions: See Division 01 for product requirements.
B.
Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving
Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction.
C.
Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: Galvanized steel, with
center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked
together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin;
adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2.2
DUCT TEST HOLES
A.
2.3
Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs,
threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com.
2.
Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.
3.
Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.
4.
Greenheck; www.greenheck.com
5.
Pottorff; www.pottorff.com
6.
Substitutions: See Division 01 for product requirements.
B.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as indicated.
C.
Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.
1.
Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.
2.
Blade: 24 gage, minimum.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
233300-AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 2 of 3
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A.
Duct Opening Closure Film: Mold-resistant, self-adhesive film to keep debris out of ducts
during construction.
1.
Thickness: 2 mils.
2.
High tack water based adhesive.
3.
UV stable light blue color.
4.
Elongation Before Break: 325 percent, minimum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Refer to Section 233100 for duct construction
and pressure class.
B.
Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
C.
Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
D.
Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are
taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct
take-off.
E.
Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of
whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
233300-AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 233423 - HVAC EXHAUST FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Wall exhausters.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.
B.
Division 26 for electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;
2010.
B.
AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans; 2005.
C.
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air
Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as
ANSI/ASHRAE 51).
D.
AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings
Program; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;
http://www.amca.org/certified/search/company.aspx.
E.
AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and
Control Association International, Inc.; 2008.
F.
AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air
Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Division 01
B.
Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified
operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts
list, and wiring diagrams.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
233423-HVAC EXHAUST FANS
Page 1 of 3
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Greenheck: www.greenheck.com.
B.
Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com.
C.
Twin City Fan; www.tcf.com
2.2
POWER VENTILATORS - GENERAL
A.
Static and Dynamically Balanced: AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
B.
Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA
Certified Rating Seal.
C.
Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bearing AMCA Certified Sound Rating
Seal.
D.
Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
E.
Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for
the purpose specified and indicated.
2.3
WALL EXHAUSTERS
A.
Fan Unit: V-belt driven with spun aluminum housing; resiliently mounted motor; 1/2 inch mesh,
0.062 inch thick aluminum wire bird screen.
B.
Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with
offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked, and line voltage motor drive, power open, spring
return.
C.
Sheaves: For V-belt drives, provide cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts
and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained
with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Provide sheaves required for final air balance.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
233423-HVAC EXHAUST FANS
Page 2 of 3
C.
Install backdraft dampers on inlet to wall exhausters.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
233423-HVAC EXHAUST FANS
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 233700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Diffusers.
B.
Registers/grilles.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as
to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets
showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
AIR DEVICE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com.
B.
Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com.
C.
Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.
D.
Substitutions: See Division 01 for product requirements.
2.2
RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A.
Type: Provide square, stamped, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in four way pattern.
B.
Connections: Round.
C.
Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish.
D.
Color: As scheduled.
2.3
CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A.
Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades set
at 45 degrees, vertical face.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
233700-AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Page 1 of 3
B.
Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and
aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel
finish.
C.
Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2.4
CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES
A.
Type: Egg crate style face consisting of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch grid core.
B.
Fabrication: Grid core consists of aluminum with mill aluminum finish.
C.
Color: As scheduled
D.
Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.
2.5
DUCT MOUNED EXHAUST REGISTERS
A.
Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with spring or
other device to set blades, vertical face.
B.
Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.
C.
Fabrication: Steel frames and blades, with factory baked enamel finish.
D.
Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable
from face.
2.6
DUCT MOUNTED SUPPLY DIFFUSERS
A.
Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch
maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face, double deflection.
B.
Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket for installation on round
ducts.
C.
Color: As shown on the drawings.
D.
Fabrication: Aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory
baked enamel finish.
E.
Accessories: Damper: Integral, gang-operated opposed blade type with removable key operator,
operable from face.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
233700-AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Page 2 of 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C.
Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D.
Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite
whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
END OF SECTION
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 & Noel MS
233700-AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PROJECT SCOPE
A.
Requirements for the electrical features being furnished and installed under these
Specifications shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Section.
B.
These Specifications, including the Drawings, outline the general requirements for the
electrical design and are based on proposed equipment ratings, locations, and conditions to
provide for estimated equipment loads and proposed power and lighting circuit ratings.
C.
The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all electrical installations and designs, and shall place the
electrical equipment accurately in position; level and plumb, connect, and adjust the electrical
equipment; and make the electrical installations ready for service.
D.
After the CONTRACTOR has selected the equipment and completed the equipment location,
outline and layout drawings, the electrical equipment ratings and power circuits shall be
checked, coordinated, and revised as needed.
E.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all materials and equipment and provide all labor
required and necessary to complete the work shown on drawings and/or listed below and all
other work and miscellaneous items, not specifically mentioned, but inferred for a complete
installation, including all accessories and appurtenances required for testing the system. It is
the intent of drawings and Specifications that all systems be complete and ready for operation.
F.
The CONTRACTOR shall perform electrical systems demolition, cutting and patching for
electrical construction, and provide touchup painting.
G.
The CONTRACTOR shall contact UNCC 1-800-922-1987 two full working days prior to any
digging to request utility system locates. Any system, wire, cable, or piping damaged during
the construction process shall be repaired or replaced to the Owner’s satisfaction without
additional cost to the Owner.
H.
The CONTRACTOR shall contact the District’s Project Manager to request owner system
locates (irrigation systems and/or other buried owner systems). Any system, wire, cable, or
piping damaged during the construction process shall be repaired or replaced to the Owner’s
satisfaction without additional cost to the Owner.
I.
The CONTRACTOR shall notify the Engineer and District’s Project Manager a minimum of 48
hours prior to any inspection as well as prior to covering up any work.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
The latest edition of the following standards and codes, standard publications of professional
organizations, and the State of Colorado are the minimum requirements for this work.
1.
May 13, 2014
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260500- COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 1 of 7
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.3
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC)
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA)
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70, The National Electrical Code (NEC-latest edition)
International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
State, City, and Local Authorities
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Section and Section
01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
All drawings and technical data are required to be furnished by the CONTRACTOR
shall be written in English, and all units of measurements shall be in the English system.
All drawings shall be made expressly for this Contract. Typical drawings are not
acceptable. The drawings and data shall be complete and accurate in their content.
Originals and all copies shall be legible. Drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD
format and shall be drawn to scale, and shall have neat lettering. Freehand sketches will
not be accepted.
Shop Drawings shall include bills of material, front views, assembly drawings, mounting
details, schematic diagrams, elementary diagrams, block diagrams, and wiring diagrams.
Shop Drawings shall show overall dimensions and minimum clearances for all electrical
equipment. Full-size drawings shall be submitted.
The drawings shall be prepared using graphical symbols and device function numbers
conforming to the latest applicable standards of ANSI.
Approval Shop Drawings and Data
1.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish Shop Drawings, data, and instructions for the
equipment for approval by the ENGINEER.
2.
Approval drawings shall show:
a.
Equipment locations, outlines, and layouts: Approval drawings and information
shall show equipment locations with respect to the structure, enclosure
construction, conduit entries where applicable, grounding plan showing ground
rod locations, dimensions, arrangement of components within the enclosures, and
section arrangement.
b.
Bills of material: Bills of material shall give information of each piece of
equipment including type, style, manufacturer, and other pertinent information
such as scales, trip ratings, settings, and other information, as applicable.
c.
Nameplates: Nameplate lists shall provide information on material, sizes, and
engraved lettering.
d.
Schematic Diagrams: Schematic diagram drawings shall show complete functional
operation of the equipment including equipment devices and components that are
identifiable by reference to the bill of material item.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260500- COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 2 of 7
e.
f.
C.
Final Drawings
1.
D.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish final drawings for all electrical systems. All final
drawings shall show all changes and revision dates made up to the time the drawings are
furnished. The drawings shall show "as-built" equipment and installations. All drawings
furnished shall apply specifically to the equipment actually furnished. No equipment
shall be shipped until the drawings have been updated to show the equipment at the time
of shipment. The final drawings shall include the requirements of 01 33 00 – Submittals.
The following final drawings shall be furnished.
a.
Outlines and location of equipment relative to the structure.
b.
Grounding plan and location of ground rods and grounding connections.
c.
Nameplate lists.
d.
Panel Directories.
e.
Location of conduit hubs, knockouts, openings, and pull boxes.
f.
Schematic diagrams.
g.
Wiring diagrams.
Test Reports
1.
E.
Wiring diagram: Wiring diagram drawings shall show complete wiring of the
equipment devices and components including terminal block numbers and wire
(conductor) designations.
Manufacturer's data: Manufacturer's data, such as catalog cut sheets, shall be
clearly marked to indicate the item being provided. The data shall provide
sufficient comprehensive product information to fully demonstrate that the product
meets the requirements of these specifications.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER certified copies of test reports as
required in Section 26 08 00 Testing for Electrical or as required by specific sections of
Division 26. Ground resistance or equipment, that does not successfully pass the testing
requirements, will be rejected. Equipment tests are defined within Section 26 08 00
Testing for Electrical and the specific equipment requirement Sections elsewhere in
these Specifications.
Operation and Maintenance Instructions, Descriptive Data, and Bills of Material
1.
2.
3.
May 13, 2014
Each set of material shall be assembled into one binder with a cover and front index
sheet.
The operation and maintenance instructions shall be descriptive data that apply
specifically to the equipment furnished and shall include the features pertaining to
operation, maintenance, control, relaying, instrumentation, programming, and other
features.
Descriptive data and bills of material shall describe the components furnished. These
data shall be such that the components can be identified as to manufacturer, type, rating,
characteristics, and other identification so that a component to be replaced could be
ordered from the description furnished.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260500- COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 3 of 7
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to State of Colorado, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code (latest edition).
C.
All equipment and materials will be new and unused and shall conform with the current
applicable industry standards. All equipment and materials shall be installed in compliance
with manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements. Workmanship and neat appearance
shall be as important as electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials
shall be replaced or repaired prior to final acceptance in a manner meeting approval of
Architect and/or Engineer and at no additional cost to Owner.
D.
All work shall be performed by a Licensed Electrical Contractor or Licensed Electrician.
1.5
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.6
Instructions such as "Provide" shall mean the same as though the words "This Contractor shall"
preceded each such instruction. "Provide" shall mean "Furnish and Install." Where the words
"Accepted" or "Acceptable" are used, such "Accepted" or "Acceptable" action by the Engineer
and/or Architect denotes that the work or equipment item is in conformance with the design
concept of the project and, in general, complies with pertinent information given in the
Contract Documents.
SEQUENCING AND COORDINATION
A.
The electrical system construction sequence shall follow the general project sequence.
B.
Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and
arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical
installation.
C.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing
in the building.
D.
Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.
1.
2.
Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities
and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.
Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company
providing electrical power and other services.
E.
No work shall be concealed until after inspection and approval by proper authorities. If work is
concealed without inspection and approval, Contractor shall be responsible for all work
required to expose and restore the concealed work in addition to all required modifications.
F.
Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate
installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260500- COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 4 of 7
G.
Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings
and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A.
Electrical equipment and materials shall be as specified on the drawings and in accordance with
standards referenced in Article 1.03.
B.
All equipment nameplates shall be in English. All signs and symbols shall be in accordance
with ANSI Y32.2.
C.
Mounting bolts, nuts, and washers for items of electrical equipment shall be ASTM A276Type
316 stainless steel. Cadmium-plated mounting hardware will not be permitted.
D.
In addition to the electrical materials specified herein, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish and
install shims, grout, expansion anchors, wood blocking, anchor bolts, screws, nuts, washers,
and all other hardware and incidentals required to complete the electrical installation.
E.
If the CONTRACTOR-furnished electrical equipment and materials are of such size, type,
ratings, or other physical properties that changes are required in the approved
CONTRACTOR's designs, it shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to effect all
changes necessary as required and approved by the ENGINEER without additional
compensation.
F.
Nameplates shall be provided in compliance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical.
2.2
TOUCHUP PAINT
A.
For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
2.3
TOOLS
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all special tools and appliances as required for maintenance
and adjustment of electrical equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all additional tools
and equipment as necessary to properly install, adjust, and check the operation of the electrical
equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
General
1.
May 13, 2014
Installation of electrical equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
installation instructions. Nuts and bolts used in electrical equipment assembly and
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260500- COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 5 of 7
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
installation shall be tightened by the use of torque wrenches to torque values
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
The CONTRACTOR shall make all electrical wire, cable, conduit, and grounding
connections and furnish all miscellaneous materials that are required for making these
connections to the equipment.
The CONTRACTOR shall drill all holes and provide all fastenings required for
mounting or installing electrical equipment and materials.
Repair of damage to painted and/or galvanized surfaces shall be made in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Repair or replacement of damaged parts shall be in accordance with Article 1.05
Equipment Identification
1.
2.
3.
4.
The completed electrical installation shall be provided with adequate identification of
circuits and equipment to assist personnel during maintenance.
Nameplates shall be provided for all panelboards, panels, starters, switches, and push
button stations. In addition to the nameplates shown, control devices shall be equipped
with standard collar type legend plates, as required.
Control devices within enclosures shall be identified with nameplates.
Terminal strips shall be identified by imprinted marker strips
C.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
D.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Adhere to clearances required by the NEC-latest edition, NFPA 70. Connect for ease of
disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
E.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.3
Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B.
Coordinate the repair and refinish of disturbed finish materials and other surfaces with the
appropriate trade to have areas restored to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. This
contractor is responsible for all costs of repairs required by work performed by this contractor.
Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish
materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.4
FIELD TESTING AND STARTUP
A.
After the electrical installations have been completed, the CONTRACTOR shall operationally
test the electrical equipment and circuits installed under these specifications, unless specifically
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260500- COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 6 of 7
indicated otherwise herein, to demonstrate that the requirements of these specifications have
been fulfilled. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work
B.
The CONTRACTOR shall have available, at the construction site, drawings that show the
electrical installation at the time of the examination, instruction books, equipment tests reports,
coordination curves, and data.
C.
Immediately prior to the acceptance tests, the CONTRACTOR shall service all electrical
equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
While performing the functions of testing and checkout, the CONTRACTOR shall retain full
responsibility for the removal and replacement of any wiring connections. The CONTRACTOR
shall make wiring changes, setting adjustments, equipment replacements, or other revisions,
which are necessary for the proper and adequate functioning of the installation. The
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for and shall replace at the CONTRACTOR’s own
expense any wiring, instruments, or equipment which may be damaged in the checkout process.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B.
Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,
and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Final Acceptance.
3.6
WARRANTY
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall warranty all electrical workmanship and materials for a minimum of
two years or for the warranty period specified in individual sections whichever is greater. The
warranty period shall extend from the date of Final Acceptance.
B.
In addition to the standard warranties the CONTRACTOR shall attend a warranty walk through
meeting to be held at eleven months from the date of Final Acceptance.
END OF SECTION 260500
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260500- COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600V and less.
B.
Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Common Work Results for Electrical
Section 26 05 00
B.
Raceways and Boxes for Electrical
Section 26 05 33
C.
Identification for Electrical
Section 26 05 53
D.
Testing for Electrical
Section 26 08 00
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
The latest edition of the following standards and codes are the minimum requirements for this
work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.4
Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA)
InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA ATS)
National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70, The National Electrical Code (NEC-latest edition)
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Listing and Labeling: Provide wires and cables specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1.
2.
B.
The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
Comply with NFPA 70.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260519- LOW-VOLTAGE POWER
CONDUCTORS & CABLES
Page 1 of 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
The insulated conductors furnished shall be of the proper voltage rating, type, and size for the
application, and shall have been manufactured within twenty four (24) months prior to receipt
of the notice to proceed under this contract. All conductors shall be stranded copper unless
specifically stated otherwise. All conductors shall be suitable for installation in a vertical
position. All conductors shall have an AWG or kcmil designation.
B.
600-Volt, Single Conductor for General Use Other Than Direct Burial: The insulated
conductors shall conform to the requirements of NEC-latest edition, shall bear the UL label,
shall be suitable for general use other than direct burial, and shall be NEC-latest edition type
THW, THWN/THHN or XHHW.
C.
Multiconductor Power and Control Cable: Multiconductor cables shall be provided as noted on
the Drawings. The multiconductor cables shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
600 volts insulated.
Multiconductor type suitable for installation in trays and conduits.
Individual conductors shall be insulated with NEC-latest edition type THHN insulation
and color-coded.
Polyester tape, or equivalent, over the conductor group.
Shielded with 100 percent aluminum foil taper and with minimum No. 18 AWG tinned
and copper drain wire.
An overall covering (jacket) of thermoplastic or neoprene.
a.
D.
Instrumentation Cable: The instrumentation cable shall be suitable for all uses and shall be as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Cable with No. 14 AWG individual conductors:
(1) 3/C and smaller - 45 mils thick.
(2) 4/C to 12/C - 60 mils thick.
(3) Over 12/C - 80 mils thick.
Twisted pair, individually shielded, having varying lengths of lay to minimize crosstalk.
UL listed and labeled, Type TC.
Voltage: 300V.
Conductors tinned copper, stranded, and No. 18 AWG minimum.
Pair Shield: Aluminum coated Mylar with tinned copper drain wire, No. 18 AWG
minimum.
Jacket: Plenum Rated.
Conductor Identification: ICEA S-61-402, black and white in pairs. White conductor
printed numerically for group identification.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
May 13, 2014
Wires and Cables:
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260519- LOW-VOLTAGE POWER
CONDUCTORS & CABLES
Page 2 of 6
a.
b.
c.
2.
Connectors for Wires and Cables:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Southwire Company.
The Okonite Company
USA Wire & Cable, Inc.
AMP Incorporated.
General Signal; O-Z/Gedney Unit.
3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
WIRES AND CABLES 600-VOLT NOMINAL OR LESS
A.
UL-listed building wires and cables with appropriate ratings for installed application.
B.
Rubber Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 3.
C.
Thermoplastic Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 5.
D.
Cross-Linked Polyethylene Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 7.
E.
Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 8.
F.
Factory applied insulation color the entire length of conductors for all wire.
G.
Conductor Material: Copper.
H.
Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller (except for Engine/Generator Control
Wiring); stranded conductor for larger than No. 10 AWG.
I.
Insulation Color: All insulated conductors (service entrance, feeder, and branch circuit) shall
have full colored insulation, colors as specified in Section 26 05 53 Identification For
Electrical Systems, for the entire length of the conductor. Neutral conductors installed, in
compliance with the NEC-latest edition for each single pole breaker, shall have a tracer stripe
to match the phase conductor color.
J.
Use of MC cable is prohibited except for luminaire connection whips.
K.
Use of AC, NM, ENT, or other manufactured pre-wired systems cable is prohibited.
2.3
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES 600-VOLT NOMINAL OR LESS
A.
UL-listed, factory-fabricated wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and
class for application and service indicated. Comply with Project's installation requirements
and as specified in Part 3 “Wire and Insulation Applications" Article.
B.
Electrical Tape:
1.
May 13, 2014
Plastic tape, 8.5 mils maximum thickness, 1,000,000 megohms minimum insulation
resistance, oil-resistant vinyl backing, oil-resistant acrylic adhesive, incapable of
supporting combustion per ASTM D-568 Test Method B.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260519- LOW-VOLTAGE POWER
CONDUCTORS & CABLES
Page 3 of 6
2.
C.
Cable Lubricants:
1.
2.
2.4
3M +33 Type.
Wire pulling lubricants shall be specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer for
assisting in pulling jacketed cables. Cable lubricants shall be soapstone, graphite, or talc
for rubber or plastic-insulated cables. Lubricants shall be rated for use in low
temperatures (-20º F). Lubricant shall not be deleterious to the cable sheath, jacket, or
outer coverings.
Ideal Yellow #77, Aqua Blue, Poly Water, Dyna Blue or equivalent.
MISCELLANEOUS WIRING MATERIAL
A.
Miscellaneous Connecting and Splicing Devices: Miscellaneous products, such as heat shrink
tubing, electrical insulation, plug caps, splices and kits, tapes, terminal blocks, and
terminations, shall be approved for the specific application.
B.
Joint compounds shall be approved for the specific type metal joint to be prepared.
C.
Cable ties, clamps, and identification shall be nylon, self-locking.
D.
Fire-seal fittings, certified by UL, for installation where sleeves penetrate fire-rated walls,
floors, etc., as required by NEC-latest edition Article 300-21. Size fire seals for the
application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
All wiring shall be in compliance with the NEC-latest edition: All multi-wire branch circuits
originating at single pole breakers (120V single phase circuits, or 277V single phase circuits)
shall be installed with a dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor. The neutral
conductor shall have a tracer stripe (the stripe color shall match the color of the phase
conductor).
B.
All wiring shall be routed through an UL-listed raceway regardless of voltage application,
unless specified otherwise on the drawings or under other sections of these Specifications.
C.
Derate conductor ampacities based on the NEC-latest edition when more than three current
carrying conductors are installed in one raceway.
D.
No conductors or cable shall be pulled into any portion of conduit system until all construction
work, which might damage the wire, has been completed and raceways have been swabbed. In
no case shall wire be left exposed where students and staff may have access.
E.
Lubricate cables to facilitate pulling. Lubrication material shall be inert to cable and raceways
and rated for -20°F for pulling #4AWG and larger wires.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260519- LOW-VOLTAGE POWER
CONDUCTORS & CABLES
Page 4 of 6
F.
Install compression connectors with hydraulic die, embossing die code into connector.
Connect to bus with Belleville type washers for positive pressure over complete contact area.
Insulate with heat shrink tubing.
G.
Sizes of conduits, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be determined from Chapter 9 of
the latest National Electrical Code based on THW wire in electric metallic tubing.
3.2
INSTALLATION 600 VOLTS, NOMINAL OR LESS GENERAL
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, all wiring for branch circuits shall be #12 AWG protected by 20ampere circuit breakers. Wire size shall be increased to account for voltage drop for all 120volt circuits over 75 feet, and all 277-volt circuits over 150 feet to the first outlet. Wire size
shall be uniform for the entire length of the circuit unless noted otherwise. Homeruns which
indicate upgrading circuit conductors for voltage drop, e.g. #10AWG wire on 20-ampere
circuit, shall have the conductor size indicated carried throughout the circuit to the last device
or fixture.
B.
Do not splice feeders or dedicated branch circuits unless otherwise indicated. Install all wire
continuous from outlet to outlet or terminal to terminal. Splices in cables when required shall
be made in handholes, pull boxes or junction boxes and shall be in strict accordance with cable
manufacturer's recommendations utilizing solderless connectors UL approved for the use
(splices for pole mounted luminaires shall be made in the curved carlon box installed in the
pole base unless the pole base is flush with grade in which case splices shall be made in the
pole handhole). Make up splices in outlet boxes with 8 inches of correctly color-coded tails left
in box. Splices in wires size #10AWG and smaller shall be made with insulated spring type
wire connectors, "Scotchlok." Use U.L. listed compression connectors (Ilsco Clear Tap or
Burndy Hi Press), for wire splices and taps, #8AWG and larger. All insulating tape used on
circuits of 600 volts and less shall be 3-M +33. Tape or heat shrink uninsulated conductors
and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of the conductor.
Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
C.
Make connections, splices, taps and joints with solderless devices, mechanically and
electrically secure.
D.
Provide a separate neutral for dimmer branch circuits, ground fault interrupter branch circuits,
lighting branch circuits serving electronic ballasts.
E.
All phase, neutral, and ground conductors shall be tagged with corresponding circuit numbers
at panelboard as well as at all junction and outlet boxes.
F.
Make all ground, neutral, and line connections to receptacle and wiring device terminals by
means of the side terminal screw connections. Branch conductors shall not be connected to the
device with backside “push-in” connectors. Provide ground jumper from outlet box to ground
terminal of receptacle.
3.3
STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Store wiring materials in a protected environment not subject to physical damage or the effects
of sunlight or inclement weather.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260519- LOW-VOLTAGE POWER
CONDUCTORS & CABLES
Page 5 of 6
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Wire and Cable Tests (600 Volts): Measure the insulating resistance of service entrance
conductors, feeder circuit conductors, and service ground. Measurements shall be taken
between conductors and between conductors and ground. Resistance shall be 1,000,000 ohms
or more when tested at 500 volts by megger without branch circuit loads. Tests and procedures
shall meet the approval of the ENGINEER and shall be in accordance with the applicable
ICEA standards for the wires and cables to be installed. Furnish all instruments, equipment,
and personnel required for testing, and conduct tests in the presence of the ENGINEER Submit
written reports of the tests and results to the ENGINEER.
B.
Testing: On installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1.
C.
Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning conductors and cables at Project site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 260519
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260519- LOW-VOLTAGE POWER
CONDUCTORS & CABLES
Page 6 of 6
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements
specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in
other Sections.
B.
Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Low-Voltage Power Conductors and Cable
Section 26 05 19
B.
Raceways and Boxes for Electrical
Section 26 05 33
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI/ASTM B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
ANSI/ASTM B8 Concentric-Lay –Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
ANSI/UL 467
Grounding and Bonding Equipment
B.
NFPA70 – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC-latest edition)
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the State of Colorado, and marked for intended
use.
1.
Comply with UL 467.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
May 13, 2014
Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:
a.
ILSCO.
b.
Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.
c.
Lyncole XIT Grounding.
d.
O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260526- GROUNDING & BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 1 of 4
e.
f.
2.2
Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.
Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Power Conductors
and Cables."
B.
Material: Copper.
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
D.
Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch (6.4
mm) in diameter.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick.
Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated
with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick.
CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A.
Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and connected items.
B.
Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type. Burndy Hi-Press
series lugs, ILSCO Clear Taps may be used for wire sizes #8 through 500kcmil.
C.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's
written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact
with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B.
In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260526- GROUNDING & BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 2 of 4
3.2
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding
conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70
are indicated.
B.
Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits. This grounding
conductor shall be in addition to the ground path provided by the continuously grounded metallic
raceway system that encloses the phase and neutral conductors . Where there are parallel feeders
installed in more than one raceway, each raceway shall have a green insulated equipment
ground conductor. Provide ground bushings bonded to grounding conductor at both ends of
all feeder conduits.
C.
Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways
unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
D.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 volts and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond
conductor to each unit and to air duct.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to
strain, impact, or damage.
B.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation
hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded
connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a
bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
C.
Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Where metallic piping and
duct systems are rendered metallically non-continuous by non-conductive couplings, provide
bonding jumpers to restore grounding continuity. Use braided-type bonding straps.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select
connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact will be galvanically compatible.
B.
All connections to ground buses shall be by mechanical means.
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type
grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with
winged pressure-type connectors. Use Burndy QGFL 34 B1 type connectors for attachment to
building steel
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260526- GROUNDING & BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 3 of 4
D.
Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings
without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate both ends of conduit with a
grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding
bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits
with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
F.
Compression-Type Connections (#8 and Larger): Use hydraulic compression tools to provide
correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended
by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a
visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
G.
Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of
insulation and cable.
END OF SECTION 260526
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260526- GROUNDING & BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install supports, fasteners, and anchors for all electrical
conduits; boxes, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, and accessories required for a complete
and secure electrical system. The term "conduit" shall be considered synonymous with the term
"raceway" as defined in Article 100 of the NEC-latest edition.
B.
Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Section 26 25 26
REFERENCES
A.
The latest edition of the following standards and codes, are the minimum requirements for this
work.
NFPA No. 70
National Electrical Code (NEC-latest edition)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A.
Provide hangers and supports to support raceways, fixtures, cabinets, boxes, etc. as
manufactured by B-Line, Unistrut, Binkley or Kindorf.
B.
Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
C.
Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations:
fabrication.
D.
Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14-mm-)
diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs.
1.
2.
Steel, hot-dip galvanized after
Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
E.
Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded Cclamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or clicktype hangers.
F.
Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260529- HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 1 of 3
G.
Fabricated supports, use structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a
neat appearance.
H.
Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
I.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
J.
Mounting bolts, nuts, and washers for items of electrical equipment shall be ASTM A276Type
316 stainless steel. Cadmium-plated mounting hardware will not be permitted.
K.
Perforated pipe strap and wire supports are prohibited.
L.
Powder-actuated anchors are prohibited without specific written permission.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in
accordance with NEC-latest edition requirements.
1.
2.
Fasten supports directly to structure. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork,
mechanical equipment, conduit, or ceiling system suspension wires or wire of any type.
Drilling or other modification of structural steel members is prohibited without specific
written permission from the structural engineer.
B.
Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation.
C.
Electrical system layouts indicated on drawings are generally diagrammatic, but shall be
followed as closely as actual construction and work of other trades will permit. Govern exact
routing of raceways and locations of outlets by structure and equipment served. Take all
dimensions from architectural drawings.
D.
Consult all other drawings. Verify all scales and report any dimensional discrepancies or other
conflicts to Architect before submitting bid.
E.
Avoid cutting and boring holes through structure or structural members wherever possible.
Obtain prior approval of Architect, and conform to all structural requirements when cutting or
boring structure is necessary and permitted.
F.
Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC-latest edition and the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
May 13, 2014
Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary
to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware
necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits. Provide a
minimum of 20% space available for future raceways for all multiple raceway supports.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers.
Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners
may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting
and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings. For hanger rods with spring
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260529- HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 2 of 3
4.
5.
6.
7.
steel fasteners, use 1/4-inch-diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners
that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing.
Space supports for raceways in accordance with NEC-latest edition, but in no case shall
support spacing exceed 8-feet between supports or 2-feet from any box or conduit body.
Support raceway within 1 foot of box and access fittings.
In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and
the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load
on raceway connections.
Wire will not be allowed for conduit support.
G.
Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using
expansion anchors or preset inserts.
H.
Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board
partitions and walls.
I.
Use expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls
J.
Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces
K.
Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs.
L.
Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.
M.
Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls for raceways and cable installations. For sleeves
through fire rated-wall or floor construction, apply UL- listed firestopping sealant in gaps
between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s
requirements.
END OF SECTION 260529
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260529- HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all electrical conduits; boxes, and accessories
required for the installation of conductors for the power, control, and instrumentation services.
The term "conduit" shall be considered synonymous with the term "raceway" as defined in
Article 100 of the NEC-latest edition.
B.
Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Section 26 05 26
B.
Wiring Devices
Section 26 27 26
C.
Identification for Electrical
Section 26 05 53
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
The latest edition of the following standards and codes, are the minimum requirements for this
work.
ANSI C80.1
ANSI C80.6
ANSI C80.3
NEMA FB 1
NEMA RN 1
NEMA TC2
NEMA TC 3
NFPA No. 70
UL-651
B.
Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-coated
Intermediate Metal Conduit, Zinc-coated
Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-coated
Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies
Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (Schedule 40 and Schedule 80)
PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
National Electrical Code (NEC-latest edition)
Standard for Safety Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit
Sizes of conduits, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be determined from Tables in
Chapter 9 of latest National Electrical Code (latest edition).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A.
Metallic Conduit Systems:
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260533- RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 1 of 7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Nonmetallic Conduit Systems:
1.
2.
C.
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): RNC shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Schedule 40
or 80 suitable for 90°C. Provide solvent cemented type fittings matched to conduit type
and material.
Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (LFNC): LFNC shall comply with UL3.
Metal Wireways: Wireways shall be hinged cover or screw cover complete with all necessary
manufactured fittings which shall be of one manufacturer. Wireway shall be G.E. Type HS or
ITE KEL Duct or acceptable equal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Electrical Metallic Conduit (EMT). EMT shall be zinc-coated steel, galvanized on the
outside and coated on the inside with a hard smooth lacquer finish. EMT fittings shall be
steel set-screw type with insulated throats.
Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): FMC shall be single strip, continuous, flexible
interlocked double-wrapped steel, zinc-coated inside and out forming smooth internal
wiring channel with steel compression fittings.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): IMC shall be hot-dipped galvanized with a zinccoating. Fittings shall be steel threaded type.
Liquidtight Flexible Steel Conduit (LFSC): FLSC shall be zinc-coated steel the same as
FMC except with sunlight-resistant and mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket.. Fittings
shall be cast malleable iron or steel body and gland nut, cadmium-plated with one-piece
brass grounding bushings threaded to interior of conduit. Provide spiral molded vinyl
sealing ring between gland nut and bushing and nylon insulated throat.
Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC): RSC shall be heavy wall, hot dipped galvanized steel inside
and out with threaded ends. RSC fittings shall be steel, threaded type. Plastic-coated
Rigid Steel Conduit shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit having a 0.030"(.762 mm)
minimum thick factory-bonded PVC jacket, using pre-jacketed couplings as
manufactured by Pittsburgh Robroy, Plastic Applicator, Occidental or approved equal.
Material: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated.
Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as
required for complete system. Provide wire retainers at not greater than 12 inches (300
mm) on center.
Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
Wireway Covers: Hinged type
Exterior, wet, or damp locations shall be NEMA 250 Type 3R
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish
Bushings: For steel conduit larger than 1/2-inch size, provide insulated type bushings, designed
to prevent abrasion of wires without impairing the continuity of the conduit grounding system.
Grounding bushings shall be locking type and shall be provided with a feed-through
compression lug for securing the ground cables. Unions shall be electro-galvanized ferrous
alloy type Appleton UNF or UNY, Crouse-Hinds UNF or UNY, or equal.
Grounding bushings shall be steel type and installed at both ends of the conduit on all feeders,
as well as all transformer, motor, motor controller, kitchen, and TVSS equipment branch
circuits.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260533- RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 2 of 7
E.
Sealing Fittings: Provide threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for steel
conduits. Fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type.
F.
Provide minimum ¾” conduit for all circuit homeruns (from the source panel to the first device
G.
Use of MC cable is prohibited except for luminaire connection whips.
H.
Use of AC, NM, ENT, or other manufactured pre-wired systems cable is prohibited.
2.2
SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS
A.
Surface metal raceway components, fittings, and accessories shall be of one manufacturer,
designed and listed for use together as surface metal raceway.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
2.3
Sheet metal channel with fitted cover.
Couplings, elbows and connectors shall be designed for use with the raceway system.
Boxes and extension rings shall be designed for use with the raceway systems.
(extension rings are not allowed on new construction, one extension ring is allowed on
existing recessed boxes where conductor length will still comply with the latest NEC
requirements)
Use flat head screws to fasten channel to surfaces.
a.
Option: Use suitable clips and straps
Use insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
Maintain grounding continuity between raceway components.
Wiremold Series 700, or equivalent.
OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
2.
B.
Boxes and Cabinets; Bell, Bowers, Raco, Steel City, Appleton, Carlton, Lew Electric,
National Electric Products, or equivalent.
Floor boxes; Walker, Hubbell, Raceway Components Inc., Bowers, Rotco Inc., Steel
City, Appleton, Lew Electric, or equivalent.
Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes:
1.
2.
May 13, 2014
Cast Type Boxes: Cast type boxes shall be ferrous alloy and have gasketed cast covers
and inside threaded hubs with adapters as necessary. Cast-metal boxes shall comply with
NEMA 3R.
Galvanized Pressed Steel Type Boxes: Boxes shall be pressed steel, galvanized or
cadmium-plated, 4-inch x 2 1/8” deep (100 mm) minimum square with galvanized cover
or extension ring as required (extension rings are not allowed on new construction, one
extension ring is allowed on existing recessed boxes where conductor length will still
comply with the latest NEC requirements). Knockout type shall be used with knockouts
removed only where necessary to accommodate the conduit entering. Boxes shall
comply with NEMA OS 1. Provide a grounding terminal in each box containing a green
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260533- RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 3 of 7
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
equipment ground conductor, or serving motors, lighting fixtures, or receptacles.
Grounding terminal shall be green-colored washer-in-head machine screw or grounding
bushing.
Field gang type boxes are prohibited in all applications and extension boxes are
prohibited on new construction.
Floor Boxes and Fittings:
a.
General: Provide surface floor boxes and fittings of the types, ratings, and
configurations as shown on the Drawings.
Cover and Device Plates: Provide device plates for each switch, receptacle, signal and
telephone outlet, and special purpose outlet. Do not use sectional gang plates. Provide
multi-gang outlet plates for multi-gang boxes. Provide high impact thermoplastic or
nylon for devices in finished areas, and galvanized steel on surface-mounted devices in
unfinished areas, unless otherwise selected by Architect. Surface outlet coverplates shall
have beveled edges. Color of thermoplastic device plates shall be the same as the device
or as selected by Architect.
Cut-in/after-set boxes are not allowed.
Metal Pull boxes: Pullboxes shall be screw cover complete with all necessary manufactured
fittings which shall be of one manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Material: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated.
Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
Exterior, wet, or damp locations shall be NEMA 250 Type 3R
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Electrical system layouts indicated on drawings are generally diagrammatic, but shall be
followed as closely as actual construction and work of other trades will permit. Govern exact
routing of raceways and locations of outlets by structure and equipment served. Take all
dimensions from architectural drawings.
B.
Consult all other drawings. Verify all scales and report any dimensional discrepancies or other
conflicts to Architect before submitting bid.
C.
All home runs to panelboards are intended to be started from outlet nearest panel and
continuing in general direction of that panel. Continue such circuits to panel as though routes
were completely indicated. Terminate homeruns of signal, alarm, and communications systems
in a similar manner.
D.
Avoid cutting and boring holes through structure or structural members wherever possible.
Obtain prior approval of Architect, and conform to all structural requirements when cutting or
boring structure is necessary and permitted.
E.
Furnish and install all necessary hardware, hangers, blocking, brackets, bracing, runners, etc.
required for equipment specified under this section.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260533- RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 4 of 7
F.
3.2
Raceways shall be installed and complete prior to pulling any wire into raceway.
RACEWAYS - GENERAL
A.
Protect all non-PVC coated metallic raceway in earth or fill from corrosion with two coats of
corrosion resistant paint or tape wrap.
B.
Elbows for conduit installed below grade or floor slabs shall be rigid steel conduit with factory
PVC coating or two coats of corrosion resistant paint or tape wrap.
C.
Tie embedded raceways securely in place prior to concrete placement. Raceways installed
below floor slabs shall extend a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) above the finished slab or
housekeeping pad to the first connector. Install capped bushings on conduit stub ups.
D.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament
plastic line with not less than 200-lb. (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300
mm) of slack at each end of the pull wire. Tag both ends noting destination.
E.
Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering conduits.
F.
Make all bends using an approved bending tool. Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not
reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless
otherwise indicated. Cut all conduits square and ream all cuts to remove burrs. Exercise all
necessary precautions during the construction period to prevent entry or accumulation of
moisture, dust, concrete, and all foreign matter into the raceway system. The contractor shall
pull a mandrel through each raceway to ensure the raceway interior is clean and dry prior to
pulling conductors or cable.
G.
Make bends in exposed parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel.
Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends
for exposed parallel raceways.
H.
Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a
maximum of 72 inch (183 cm) liquid tight flexible conduit. Install separate ground conductor
across flexible connections.
I.
Above grade - defined as areas above finished grade for a building exterior and above top
surface of any slabs (or other concrete work on grade) for a building interior. Installation of
and materials for above-grade raceways shall conform with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
May 13, 2014
Install all raceways concealed within finished walls, ceilings, and floors except at surface
cabinets, for motor and equipment connections, and in building service equipment rooms
unless otherwise indicated. Route all exposed and concealed raceways parallel or
perpendicular to building lines with right angle turns and symmetrical bends.
Install raceways a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and
steam pipes or other heated lines. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam
piping.
Install raceways a minimum of 6 inches below the roof deck.
Provide for waterproofing of all raceways, outlets, fittings, etc. which penetrate exterior
walls or the roof to preserve the weatherproof integrity of the building. Provide pockets
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260533- RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 5 of 7
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
May 13, 2014
for waterflashing and counterflashing or pitch pockets for waterproofing of all raceways,
outlets, fittings, etc. which penetrate roof. Wherever conduits penetrate concrete walls to
outdoors, the Contractor shall provide a watertight seal as manufactured by O.Z. Gedney
Company, Type CSMC; Thunderline Corporation, Link Seal, or equal.
Raceways between cabinets, fittings or boxes shall not exceed 200 feet (60 m) for
straight runs or 100 feet (30 m) for runs with the maximum number of bends.
Provide one empty 3/4-inch (20 mm) conduit for each set of three spare circuit breakers
or spaces in flush-mounted panelboards into the overhead accessible ceiling space.
Raceways Above Suspended Ceilings:
a.
Raceways shall not be supported from ceiling support wires. Provide independent
support of raceways.
b.
Install conduit 1 foot (300 mm) minimum above top of ceiling.
Rigid metallic steel conduit shall be installed in the following above-grade areas:
a.
Where exposed/surface mounted, exterior locations, and where subject to damage.
Rigid steel conduit shall extend to a minimum of 8-feet above finished floor/grade.
b.
Where specifically required by the National Electrical Code - 2008.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): May be installed in:
a.
Concealed locations in furred or masonry walls or ceilings.
b.
Embedded in poured insulating fills.
c.
Exposed areas at least 4 feet (2.5 m) above floor.
Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be provided in sufficient lengths for makeup of
motors, transformers, or equipment, and/or raceway connections where isolation of
sound and vibration transmission is required. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall
contain a separate equipment grounding conductor, sized per NEC-latest edition
requirements.
Flexible metallic 3/8-inch (10 mm) fixture whip connections to recessed lighting fixtures
shall not exceed 6 feet (1.8 m) in length.
Surface raceways, where indicated on drawings, shall be metal and of a size approved for
number and size of wires to be installed and shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike
manner, with runs parallel or perpendicular to walls and partitions. Raceways, elbows,
fittings, outlets and devices shall be of same manufacturer, and designed for use together.
Conduit Supports and Fasteners:
a.
Supports: Provide supports for horizontal steel conduits and EMT not more 2 feet
from boxes and conduit bodies, and not more than 8 feet (2.5 m) apart with one
support near each elbow or bend, including runs above suspended ceilings.
b.
Individual: Install spring steel fasteners with hanger rods on conduits 1-1/2 inch
(40 mm) or smaller. Install individual pipe hangers for conduits larger than 1-1/2
inch (40 mm).
c.
Trapezes: Install multiple (trapeze) pipe hangers where two or more horizontal
conduits run parallel and at the same elevation. Secure each conduit to the
horizontal hanger member by a U-bolt, one-hole strap or other specially designed
and approved fastener. Install 3/16-inch (5 mm) diameter or larger steel rods for
trapezes, spring steel fasteners, clips and clamps. Wire or perforated strapping
shall not be used for the support of any conduit.
d.
Roof Top Conduit Support: Fasten pipe to stands specifically manufactured for
support of pipes installed on roofs. Stands shall support pipe a minimum of 6
inches above the roof and be resistant to damage from environmental conditions
and other causes such as birds. Stands shall be Caddy Pyramid 50 series or
equivalent. Support stands requiring fastening through the roof membrane are
prohibited.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260533- RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 6 of 7
e.
14.
15.
3.3
Fastening: Fasten pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete by means of inserts or
expansion bolts, to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollow masonry
by means of toggle bolts. Wooden plugs and shields shall not be used. Powerdriven fasteners may be used to attach pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete
where approved by Architect. Install raceway on steel construction with approved
clamps which do not depend on friction or set-screw pressure alone.
Fittings: Use approved type couplings and connectors in all conduit runs, and make all
joints tight. Provide insulated bushings or rain-tight connections with insulated throats
for all terminations in pipe sizes 1-1/4" (32 mm) and larger. Provide waterproof fittings
for all runs in wet locations, such as exposed to weather, buried in slabs, etc. Provide
raceway expansion joints, in compliance with NEC-latest edition and approved by the
State, with necessary bonding conductor at building expansion joints, between structures
and where required to compensate for raceway or building thermal expansion and
contraction.
Firestops and seals shall be provided for penetrations through fire-rated walls and floors.
Firestops and seals shall be Dow Corning's Firestop Series #2000, 3M's fire barrier
composite sheets #CS195, or equal, and shall be applied in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Products which are affected by water are not
acceptable.
OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A.
Provide galvanized or zinc-coated, pressed steel outlet boxes for all locations except where
otherwise indicated or where cast metal boxes are required by the NEC-latest edition. Boxes
are to be minimum 4-inch (100 mm) square or octagonal, and of depth as required (minimum
depth 2 1/8-inches). Provide plaster or tile rings for all flush outlets installed where wood,
drywall, tile, plaster, etc. types of finishes are applied. All outlets for exterior application shall
be cast, weatherproof type, with gasket and cast coverplate.
B.
Junction and Pull Boxes: Use outlet boxes as junction boxes wherever possible. Larger
junction and pull boxes over 12 inches (300 mm) in any dimension shall be fabricated from
sheet steel, sized according to NEC-latest edition, and have screw-on covers. All junction
boxes shall be accessible.
C.
Surface-mounted devices are to be mounted in Legrand-Wiremold Series 700 Surface Metallic
Boxes or equivalent.
END OF SECTION 260533
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260533- RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with
ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and the State of Colorado.
B.
Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Common Work Results for Electrical Section 26 05 00
REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code (NEC-latest edition)
B.
NESC
National Electrical Safety Code
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI C2.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and NFPA 70 for color-coding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS
A.
Pretensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic band sized
to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pretensioned
gripping action when placed in position.
B.
Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick aluminum
sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing
around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.
C.
Plasticized Card-Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends. Orange
background, unless otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener.
D.
Tape Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white characters.
E.
"Kroy" Labels: Kroy tape with 3/8 inch minimum characters.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260533- RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 1 of 7
2.2
NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS
A.
Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.
B.
Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum
1/16-inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 square inches (129 square cm) and 1/8-inch (3.2
mm) thick for larger sizes.
1.
2.
C.
2.3
Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32,
stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.
B.
Paint: Formulated for the type of surface and intended use.
1.
2.
Primer for Galvanized Metal: Single-component acrylic vehicle formulated for
galvanized surfaces.
Enamel: Silicone-alkyd or alkyd urethane as recommended by primer manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
B.
Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install
identification after completing finish work.
C.
Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other
designations with corresponding designations. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Install painted identification according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
E.
White characters on black background for "Normal",
White characters on red background for "Emergency" and fire alarm devices
White characters on green background for "Ground".
Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting.
Prime surfaces using type of primer specified for surface.
Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of enamel.
Color Banding Raceways and Exposed Cables: Band exposed and accessible raceways of the
systems listed below:
1.
May 13, 2014
Apply the following colors to the systems listed below:
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260533- RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 2 of 7
a.
b.
Fire Alarm System: Red
Emergency Power System: Red
F.
Device Coverplates: Use preprinted label for identification of circuits at all individual wall
switches and receptacles, control device stations. Locate label on the front side of the
coverplate as well as identify circuits with permanent ink on the backside of the coverplate.
G.
Wire Identification: Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes,
outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number
as indicated on equipment manufacturer’s shop drawings for control wiring.
H.
Junction Box and Pull Box Identification: Use indelible black marker to inscribe circuit or bus,
switch numbers and source panel on the outside of each junction and pullbox cover.
I.
Secondary Service, Feeder, and Branch-Circuit Conductors:
secondary electrical system.
1.
2.
3.
J.
Color-code throughout the
Color-code 208/120-volt system as follows:
a.
Phase A: Black
b.
Phase B: Red
c.
Phase C: Blue
d.
Neutral: White
e.
Ground: Green
Color-code 480/277-volt system as follows:
a.
Phase A: Brown
b.
Phase B: Orange
c.
Phase C: Yellow
d.
Neutral: White with a colored stripe or gray
e.
Ground: Green
Factory apply color the entire length of all conductors.
Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit of equipment,
including central or master unit of each system. Apply labels for each unit of the following
categories of equipment using mechanical fasteners:
1.
2.
3.
Panelboards, Switchboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures:
a.
1/4 inch lettering for equipment designation
b.
1/8 inch lettering to identify voltage rating, fault current rating, and source.
Individual Control Equipment (timeclocks, lighting control relay cabinets and contactors)
Circuit Breakers and Switches in Panelboards and Switchboards:
a.
1/8 inch lettering to identify circuit and load served, including location.
b.
1/8 inch lettering to identify voltage rating, fault current rating, and source.
Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Disconnect Switches, and Motor Starters:
a.
1/8 inch lettering to identify load served.
b.
1/8 inch lettering to identify voltage rating, fault current rating, and source.
END OF SECTION 260553
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260533- RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 3 of 7
SECTION 260800 - TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
The drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
B.
C.
1.3
Common Work Results for Electrical
Low-Voltage Power Conductors and Cables
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Section 26 05 00
Section 26 05 19
Section 26 05 26
TEST REPORT SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide a single submittal with examples of test reports for each system to be tested to the
Owner/Architect/Engineer prior to testing in accordance with Division 1.
B.
Submit results of testing (1 hard copy and 1 electronic (PDF) copy) for each system to the
Owner/Architect/Engineer when complete in accordance with Division 1.
1.4
SAFETY AND PRECAUTIONS
A.
Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to, the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
1.5
Occupational Safety and Health Act
Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, National Safety Council
Applicable state and local safety operating procedures
Owner's safety practices
National Fire Protection Association - NFPA 70E
American National Standards for Personnel Protection
All tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized (Thermographic Survey shall be
performed under load). Exceptions must be thoroughly reviewed to identify safety hazards and
devise adequate safeguards.
QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING PERSONNEL
A.
The testing personnel shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment devices,
installations, and systems.
B.
The lead, on-site, technical person shall be currently certified by the InterNational Electrical
Testing Association (NETA) or National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies (NICET) in electrical power distribution system testing or equal.
C.
Test Equipment Suitability: Comply with NETA ATS, Section 5.2.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260800- TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 4
D.
1.6
Test Equipment Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, Section 5.3.
APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS, AND REFERENCES
A.
All inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards except
as provided otherwise herein:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association - NEMA
American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE
InterNational Electrical Testing Association - NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications ATS-1999
American National Standards Institute - ANSI C2: National Electrical Safety Code
Codes and ordinances of the State, County, and City
Insulated Cable Engineers Association - ICEA
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies - AEIC
Occupational Safety and Health Administration - OSHA
National Fire Protection Association - NFPA
a.
ANSI/NFPA 70: National Electrical Code
b.
ANSI/NFPA 70B: Electrical Equipment Maintenance
c.
NFPA 70E: Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces
d.
ANSI/NFPA 780: Lightning Protection Code
e.
ANSI/NFPA 101: Life Safety Code
All inspections and tests shall utilize the following references:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Project design specifications
Project design drawings
Manufacturer's instruction manuals applicable to each particular apparatus
Project list of equipment to be inspected and tested as stated in Paragraph 1.04.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SWITCHGEAR, SWITCHBOARDS, AND PANELBOARDS
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
May 13, 2014
Inspect for physical damage.
Verify proper installation. This includes alignment, anchorage, clearances, grounding,
bending radius of cables, wiring aesthetics, etc.
Inspect for proper identification, nameplate ratings, sizes of protective devices, switches,
and busses, and adherence to one-line diagrams.
Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints, cable connections, and anchor bolts.
Physically test all electrical or mechanical interlocks to assure proper function.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260800- TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 4
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Test Values:
1.
3.2
Inspect for proper operation of space heaters and thermostat settings (if applicable)
Clean interior and insulator surfaces.
Exercise all active components and verify proper barrier and shutter installation and
operation.
Verify proper neutral and ground connections.
Implement settings of overcurrent protective devices per the coordination study.
Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with values specified by manufacturer or
NETA Table 10.12 of ATS 1999.
CABLES - LOW-VOLTAGE - 600V MAXIMUM
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
C.
Perform continuity test to insure proper cable connection.
Perform phase rotation tests. Color code conductors.
Test Values:
1.
3.3
Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with single-line
diagram.
Test cable mechanical connections to manufacturer's recommended values using a
calibrated torque wrench.
Check cable color coding with applicable Engineer's specifications and National
Electrical Code standards.
Bolt torque values should be in accordance with NETA Table 10.12 of ATS 1999 unless
otherwise specified by the manufacturer.
GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
3.4
Inspect ground system for compliance with codes, drawings and specifications.
LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Inspect for physical damage.
Mechanical operational test will be made in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Check tightness of all hardware connections.
Check cell fit and element alignment (if applicable).
WIRING DEVICES
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260800- TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
Page 3 of 4
1.
2.
3.
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.6
Inspect relays for physical damage, presence of foreign material, moisture, and
corrosion.
Clean cover glass and relay components as required.
Check for freedom of movement, proper travel and alignment and tightness of mounting
hardware and tap screws.
Perform wiring continuity test on each receptacle.
Perform ground fault interruption test on each GFI receptacle using external ground fault
simulation testing equipment.
SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS
A.
General: Perform system function tests upon completion of equipment component tests as
defined in this specification. It is the purpose of system function tests to prove the proper
operation of all devices.
END OF SECTION 260800
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
260800- TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all wiring devices shown on the Drawings and as
required for the electrical distribution systems.
B.
Wiring devices shall include lighting switches, plug receptacles, multi-outlet assemblies, and
miscellaneous wiring devices including cover plates and all other materials and accessories
required for the complete wiring device installations as shown on the Drawings and as described
in this Section.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Low-Voltage Power Conductors and Cables
Section 26 05 19
B.
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Section 26 05 26
C.
Raceways and Boxes for Electrical
Section 26 05 33
D.
Identification for Electrical
Section 26 05 53
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
NEMA WD 1-83: General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
B.
NEMA WD 6-88: Wiring Device – Dimensional Requirements.
C.
UL 486A-91: Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.
D.
UL 20: General-Use Snap Switches.
E.
UL 498: Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.
F.
UL 943: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
The CONTRACTOR shall submit drawings, data, and descriptive information in accordance
with the requirements of this Section, Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical,
and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications:
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
262726-WIRING DEVICES
Page 1 of 4
1.
2.
Provide products specified in this Section that are “listed and labeled” (as defined by the
National Electrical Code, Article 100).
Comply with NEMA WD 1. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Items of material furnished for the Work, subject to compliance
with requirements, items listed or equal approved from manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Wiring Devices:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.2
Bryant Electric, Inc.
Arrow-Hart
Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.
GE Company; GE Wiring Devices.
Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div.
Ilsco
Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
Lutron
Slater
Raceway Components, Inc. – for floor mounted service fittings
Wood Head – for cord drops
COMPONENTS
A.
Straight-Blade Receptacles: 20-Ampere, Heavy-Duty grade, nylon, flat faced Comply with
NEMA WD 6.
B.
Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade, Comply with NEMA WD 6.
C.
GFCI Receptacles: Nylon, flat faced, feed-through type, with integral NEMA WD 6
Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle. Manufactured to protect connected downstream
receptacles on same circuit (when downstream receptacles are located in the same room).
Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter.
D.
Cord and Plug Sets: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to
requirements of equipment being connected.
Rubber-insulated cord, stranded-copper
conductors, with type SOW-A jacket. Green-insulated grounding conductor and equipmentrating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. Nylon plug body and integral cable-clamping
jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.
E.
Snap Switches: General-duty, nylon, quiet type. Switch shall be rated at 20 A, 120/277-VAC.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
262726-WIRING DEVICES
Page 2 of 4
F.
Multi-pole Contactors and Relays:
1.
2.
3.
Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, and complying with UL 508
and NEMA ICS 2.
Current Rating for Switching: UL listing or rating consistent with type of load served,
including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent
or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Secure all devices and assemblies plumb and secure
B.
Arrange devices and assemblies, unless otherwise noted, mounted flush with long dimension
vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on top.
C.
Provide adequate protection for devices and assemblies prior to commencement of painting.
Install device wall plates and assembly cover plates upon completion of painting.
D.
Connect wiring device and assembly grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.
Connect wiring device and assembly grounding terminal to branch circuit conductors and
equipment grounding wire with six inch wire pigtails.
E.
Tighten all electrical connectors and electrical terminals according to manufacturers publishes
torque-tightening values. If torque values are not published, use torque values as specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.3
Comply with Section 26 05 53 “Identification for Electrical”
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Site Tests, Inspections:
1.
2.
3.4
Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device and
assembly at least six times.
Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with
manufacturer’s written testing procedures.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Replace damaged and/or defective components.
CLEANING
A.
Keep all items protected before, during, and after installation. Clean area and remove all debris.
Remove all paint overspray and/or spattering from devices and assemblies.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
262726-WIRING DEVICES
Page 3 of 4
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
The Contractor shall provide for demonstration and complete instruction to the Owners’
operating personnel as to the operation, maintenance, and repair procedures of all installed
devices and assemblies.
END OF SECTION 262726
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
262726-WIRING DEVICES
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 265561 - THEATRICAL LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes equipment for stage lighting systems, including fixtures, lamps, dimmers,
controls, and distribution components.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
1.4
Division 11 Section "Portable Theater and Stage Equipment" for related on-stage
components.
SUBMITTALS (FIVE SETS)
A.
Product Data: For fixtures, lamps, distribution components, and control systems, including
dimensions and data on features and components. Include data on ratings and features of
devices.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail wiring for power and control systems and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Indicate wiring types.
C.
Bill of Materials: Listing all manufacturers’ components with model numbers.
D.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with
requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience.
E.
Field Test Reports:
requirements.
F.
Maintenance Data: For fixtures, distribution components, software operating manuals, and
controls to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
G.
Record Data: Show connections and circuit and channel assignments.
H.
Owner’s operation and maintenance manuals as well as three copies of all software required for
communicating with and programming the system.
I.
Warranty certificate and information.
J.
Manufacturer and Service Center contact information.
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
QUALITY ASSURANCE
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
265561-THEATRICAL LIGHTING
Page 1 of 7
A.
Installer Qualifications: A licensed electrical contractor and experienced installer who is
working in conjunction with an authorized representative of the stage lighting manufacturer for
both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing equipment similar to that
indicated for this Project for a minimum of ten years and one that maintains technical support
service available by toll-free telephone number. Service capable of providing user with
training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repair support with 24 hours' maximum
response time.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC-latest edition).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Fixtures:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Control Equipment:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.
Leviton Colortran
Strand Lighting.
Distribution Equipment:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Altman Stage Lighting Co., Inc.
Electronic Theater Controls.
Lycian Stage Lighting.
Phoebus Manufacturing.
Strand Lighting.
Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.
Leviton Colortran
Strand Lighting.
FIXTURES AND DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges.
B.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
C.
Fixture Doors and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under
operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors,
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
265561-THEATRICAL LIGHTING
Page 2 of 7
lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when
secured in operating position.
D.
Pigtail: Factory-wired, 36-inch- (900-mm-) long, three-wire cord and plug connector assembly
with cord encased in woven fiberglass or silicone tubing.
E.
Plug Connectors: Two-pole, three-wire, 20-A, twist-locking type.
F.
Pipe Clamps: Malleable iron, suitable for clamping fixtures or items to pipe from 2 inches in
OD. Arrange fixture clamps for horizontal rotation of yoke for aiming and equipped with Tbolt to lock alignment.
G.
Safety Cables: Heavy-duty, flexible steel, 30-inch (760-mm) nominal length, with spring clip at
one end and steel ring at other.
H.
Fixture Ventilation Openings: Baffled against light leaks.
I.
Fixture Operating Controls and Handles: Thermally insulated.
J.
Lenses: Borosilicate glass in silicone mountings.
K.
Framing Shutters: Stainless steel, four way, with each blade in a separate plane under
adjustable tension mounting. Blades adjust plus or minus 30 degrees of rotation in gate, for
120-degree-minimum total angular rotation between adjacent blades.
L.
Color Filter Frame Holder: Attached to front of fixture.
M.
Fixture Yoke: Rigid metal, arranged for vertical aiming of unit and equipped with T-bolt or
hand screw to lock alignment.
2.3
LAMPS
A.
2.4
Comply with the standard of the ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp.
Where lamps of designated type, characteristics, and wattage are not indicated, provide lamps
recommended by manufacturer of fixture in highest wattage for which fixture is listed.
DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS
A.
Connector Strip: Factory-wired wireway and receptacle assembly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Wireway: Steel, with removable cover and internal terminal block.
Receptacles: Flush mounted in wireway cover.
Receptacle Wiring: Connect to terminal blocks with 125 deg C, cross-linked,
polyethylene-insulated, identification-labeled wire.
Terminal Blocks: Molded-barrier type, with screw lugs to suit supply conductors.
Mounting Hardware: Furnished with each unit, permits surface, single-pipe-bracket, or
double-pipe-bracket mounting.
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A.
Description: Microprocessor-based, LED lighting modular system consisting of control
modules operated from remote-control stations and a control console.
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
265561-THEATRICAL LIGHTING
Page 3 of 7
1.
2.
Comply with UL 508.
Comply with USITT DMX 512 for data transmission.
B.
Control System: microprocessor-based control system with a nonvolatile system memory to
adjust LED channel settings for different scenes, to patch dimmers to channels, and to manually
or automatically change dimmer settings from one preset scene to another.
C.
Control Console: Tabletop unit. Includes system manual and programming controls, memory
units, and indicating devices. Console features include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
D.
2.6
Servicing access through hinged top panel.
Grand master level control.
Blackout switch.
24 submaster level controls with overlapping pile-on performance.
Bump buttons for momentary control of channels or submasters. One for each submaster
level control.
Two cross-fade controls for split dipless fade between scenes, each with its own fade
progress indicator.
One set of scene level controls for each of two scenes when used in two-scene preset
mode. When used in multiple single-channel scene memory mode, controls set levels
into memory for expanded single scenes. Provide each set with same quantity of scene
level controls as is used for submaster level controls.
Multibutton keypad for programming in multiscene memory mode.
Fade time control for assigning fade time to cues, with individual cue adjustment from 1
to 300 seconds, minimum.
Liquid-crystal display with associated display controls, to display operating menus and
memory readout.
Controls for setting levels into memory.
One 10 ft and one 100 ft Cord with DMX connector for connecting console to outlets for
console power and control.
Signal from fire alarm control panel that automatically brings selected circuits to fully on
or fully bright condition, overriding normal dimming and on-off controls.
One eight button DMX snap-shot station in a recessed metal locking enclosure.
FINISHES
A.
Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods."
1.
2.
May 13, 2014
Set permanently mounted items level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls.
Indicated mounting heights are to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounted items.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
265561-THEATRICAL LIGHTING
Page 4 of 7
B.
3.2
Mount and connect fixtures, and install and connect plugging boxes and connector strips.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section
“Identification for Electrical Systems”.
B.
Label each fixture, lighting outlet, and dimmer module with unique designation.
designations on elevated components readable from floor.
3.3
Make
WIRING
A.
Install wiring as specified in Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables"
for hard-wired connections. Install wiring in raceway except cable and plug connections.
B.
Install power wiring with a separate neutral for each output circuit from main dimmer and for
each house and stage lighting circuit.
C.
Wiring in Enclosures: Bundle, train, and support.
D.
Ground equipment.
1.
3.4
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including electrical connections, and to
test, adjust, and program lighting control system.
B.
Reports: Prepare a schedule of lighting outlets by number; indicate circuits, dimmers,
connected fixtures, and control channel assignments. Prepare a schedule of control settings and
circuit assignments for house control channels. Prepare written reports of tests and
observations. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results.
Include records of repairs and adjustments made.
C.
Visual and Mechanical Inspections and Tests: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
May 13, 2014
Inspect each fixture, outlet, module, control, and item of equipment for defects, finish
failure, corrosion and physical damage, nationally recognized testing laboratory labeling,
and nameplate.
Exercise and perform operational tests on mechanical parts and operable devices
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Check tightness of electrical connections with torque wrench calibrated within previous
six months.
Verify proper protective device settings, fuse types, and ratings.
Record results of inspections and tests.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
265561-THEATRICAL LIGHTING
Page 5 of 7
D.
Electrical Tests: Perform tests according to manufacturer's written instructions. Exercise
caution when testing devices containing solid-state components. Include the following:
1.
E.
3.5
Operational Tests: Connect each outlet to a fixture and a dimmer output circuit so each
dimmer module, dimmer control and output circuit, outlet, and fixture in a typical
operating mode will be sequentially tested. Set and operate controls to demonstrate
fixtures, outlets, dimmers, and controls in a sequence that cues and reproduces actual
operating functions for a typical system of the size and scope installed. Include operation
and control of houselights and control of stage lights from each control location and
station, including optional plug-in control console outlet locations. Record fixture and
outlet assignments, control settings, operations, cues, and observations of performance.
Correct deficiencies disclosed by inspections and tests, and retest deficient items. Verify that
specified requirements are met.
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Repair scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean fixtures, devices, and
equipment internally and externally using methods and materials recommended by
manufacturers.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain lighting equipment as specified below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Provide two training sessions; one at project completion; one approximately 45 days after
staff and students return. Each session shall be a minimum of 4 continuous hours.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for troubleshooting,
servicing, and maintaining equipment.
Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
Video Training: Provide two DVD copies of an instructional recording covering features,
capabilities, operation, and maintenance of installed lighting control system. Illustrate actual
equipment and related functions. Show cause-and-effect sequences during operation. Crossreference instruction manuals throughout. Follow same order of presentation as instruction
manual. Include the following:
1.
Control Console Introduction: As follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
May 13, 2014
Describe controls and features.
Demonstrate software and review instruction manuals.
Demonstrate setup of unit and related equipment.
Initialize and set defaults.
Review maintenance procedures and schedules.
Control Console Operation: As follows:
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
265561-THEATRICAL LIGHTING
Page 6 of 7
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
3.
Describe controls and features.
Demonstrate elementary on-off operation.
Set manual cues.
Electronically patch dimmer to channels.
Set manual, two-scene preset operation.
Demonstrate fundamental memory operation.
Set and record simple cues.
Demonstrate recall and playback, revising cues and scenes, use of submasters, split
cues, storing and recalling programs, setting up special effects, printing out cues,
and setting up and running system for a typical event or performance.
Show how to get help.
Dimmer Bank: As follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Describe features, functions, and safety and security precautions.
Demonstrate dimmer module features, dip switches, non-dim function, and racking
system.
Check loads against dimmer capacity ratings.
Set basic power-in and power-out connections.
Demonstrate basic maintenance; need for qualified electrician for internal
maintenance; basic maintenance schedule; techniques for keeping terminals
properly tightened, filter screens clean, and overheat sensors checked; and
techniques for performing other required servicing.
Demonstrate adjustment of control cards. Describe warranty and show how to get
help.
END OF SECTION 265561
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
265561-THEATRICAL LIGHTING
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 274100 - PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes a system for amplifying and mixing sound signals from sources such as
microphones, CD player, etc. and distributing and reproducing them on loudspeakers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Channels: Separate parallel signal paths, from sources to loudspeakers or loudspeaker zones,
with separate amplification and switching that permit selection between paths for speaker
alternative program signals.
B.
Zone: A separate group of loudspeakers and associated supply wiring that may be arranged for
selective switching between different channels.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit product literature and information for each item in this Article according to
the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B.
Manufacturer Product Literature and Data for each component and product specified.
C.
Shop Drawings detailing public address and music systems rack arrangements.
D.
Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiating
clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Identify terminals to
facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.
E.
Report of field tests and observations, including record of final tap settings of speaker line
matching transformers and signal ground-resistance measurement certified by Installer.
F.
Operation and Maintenance data for system shall be included in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1.
2.
May 13, 2014
The Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code 2008.
Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
274100-PUBLIC ADDRESS AND
MUSIC SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 5
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain system components from a single supplier that assumes
responsibility for all system components furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products as
identified in this specification, on the drawings or equivalent.
B.
Available Suppliers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide equipment/components
through Elite Sound or equivalent.
2.2
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the features of materials and equipment to form an integrated system. Match
components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.
B.
Functional Performance: System functions include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Ability for the existing phone/paging system to override the gym sound system for
emergency announcements.
Ability to control output sound levels for general loud speakers and stage monitor
speakers.
Selectability of sources for mixing and amplifying sound between various microphone
outlets and other inputs.
High-Quality Sound Reproduction: Sound is free from noises, such as pops, clicks,
hisses, and hums at all loudspeakers at all times during system operation, including
standby mode with inputs off. System output is free from distortion and nonuniform
coverage of amplified sound.
EQUIPMENT – MARTIN LUTHER KING EARLY COLLEGE
A.
General: Use all new components, fully rated for continuous duty at the ratings indicated.
Select equipment for normal operation on input power usually supplied at 105 to 130 V, 60 Hz.
Provide one of each item listed below unless noted otherwise in item descriptions below or
indicated otherwise by note or diagrammatically on the drawing.
B.
Main Speakers and Power Amps
4
Yorkville E152 Main Speakers
15” Woofer
3” High Frequency Driver
80º x 50º Horn
2
SKS-Wall Speaker Mounting Brackets
1
Adaptive Technologies FasPac Flying Hardware
2
Adaptive Technologies Tilt Cable Kit
2
QSC PL380 Power Amp
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
274100-PUBLIC ADDRESS AND
MUSIC SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 5
C.
Rear Area Ceiling Speakers and Power Amp
12
SoundTube CM800i Ceiling Speaker
8” Woofer
1” High Frequency Driver
Broadbeam Waveguide Technology
1
Crown CDi-1000 Power Amp
D.
Hanging Microphones
3
Audio Technica U853r Microphones
E.
Mixers and Head End Equipment (Digital Mixer)
1
Allen & Heath GLD-80 Compact Digital Mixer
28 Channels, expandable up to 48 channels
12 Outputs
Record 2-Track Stereo to USB
iPad Controllable
1
Allen & Heath AR-2412 Stage Box (24 in, 12 out)
1
CAT5E Cable – 200’
1
Wall Plate with Ethercon
1
50’ CAT5E Cable with Ethercon Connectors
1
Wireless Router
1
Allen & Heath AR-84 Expander (8 In, 4 Out for a total of 32 In, 16 Out)
F.
Stage Rack, Equipment & Simple System
1
Raxxess NE1F3623 36-Space Rack
1
Raxxess NE1D36F Perforated Front Door
2
Furman CN-2400S Power Sequencer / Conditioner
1 for Sound Booth
1 for Amp Rack located on stage
Sound Booth unit will control the amp rack unit remotely
1
ART MX821 8-Channel “Simple System” Mixer
1
Horizon SP-2DFNO Dual XLR Wall Plate for “Simple System”
2
Audio Technica ATW-3141bD Wireless Handheld Systems
For “Simple System”
2
A105MC 5’ Microphone Cable
1
Symetrix Solus 8x8 DSP System Processor
1
RDL TX70A Paging System Interface
G.
New Microphone Jack Wall Plates
4
Horizon SP-2DFNO
H.
Stage Monitors
2
Yorkville YX15 Speakers (Floor)
2
SoundTube RS-800i Pendant Speakers (Hanging)
1
Crown XLS-1000 Power Amp (for RS-800i)
1
Crown XLS-1500 Power Amp (for YX15)
2
50’ Speaker Cables SP250SS
I.
System Installation
1
Sound System Installation – Labor, Cable, Lift, Materials, Raceway
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
274100-PUBLIC ADDRESS AND
MUSIC SYSTEMS
Page 3 of 5
2.4
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
2.5
General: Use all new components, fully rated for continuous duty at the ratings indicated.
Select equipment for normal operation on input power usually supplied at 105 to 130 V, 60 Hz.
Provide one of each item listed below unless noted otherwise in item descriptions below or
indicated otherwise by note or diagrammatically on the drawing.
CABLES
A.
Infra-Red Receiver Cable: West Penn 25355B 22 AWG Plenum 4-Conductor Shielded Wire
B.
Speaker Cable: West Penn 25226B 14 AWG Plenum Speaker Wire
C.
Microphone Cable: West Penn 25292B 20 AWG Shielded Plenum Microphone Wire
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within equipment rack.
C.
Wiring Within Enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace, and train the
conductors to terminal points with no excess.
D.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered terminal
strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment enclosures.
E.
Identification of Conductors and Cables: Use color coding of conductors and apply wire and
cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so all media are identified in coordination
with system wiring diagrams.
3.2
GROUNDING
A.
Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops,
common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B.
Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power
system and equipment grounding.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to
supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the testing and adjustment of
the system.
B.
Testing Procedure: Conform to the following:
1.
May 13, 2014
Schedule tests a minimum of 7 days in advance of performance.
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
274100-PUBLIC ADDRESS AND
MUSIC SYSTEMS
Page 4 of 5
2.
3.
C.
3.4
Report: Submit a written record of test results.
Operational Test: Perform operational system test to verify conformance of system to
these Specifications. Perform tests that include originating program and page material at
microphone outlets, preamplifier program inputs, and other inputs. Verify proper
volume levels and freedom from noise and distortion.
Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and
terminals are identified.
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Prior to final acceptance, clean system components and protect from damage and deterioration.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Demonstration and Training: Obtain and pay for the services of a representative of the
equipment supplier to demonstrate the system in all operating modes and functions and to train
Owner's maintenance personnel. Provide a minimum of two training/demonstration sessions
(minimum 1 ½ hours each). One session shall be reserved for and scheduled with the school
staff at the discretion of the Principal.
B.
Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
C.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
D.
Training Aid: Use the approved operation and maintenance manual as an instructional aid.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." Provide copies of pertinent excerpts from the
manual for use in the instruction.
3.6
ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting matching transformer taps,
adjusting controls, and investigating possible need for any system revisions required to meet
actual occupancy conditions. Provide up to 3 visits to the site for this purpose.
END OF SECTION 274100
May 13, 2014
DPS MLK 6-12 and Noel MS
274100-PUBLIC ADDRESS AND
MUSIC SYSTEMS
Page 5 of 5